RX-9010VBK

SERVICE MANUAL

AUDIO/VIDEO CONTROL RECEIVER

RX-9010VBK

J

Area Suffix

U.S.A.

MAIN ROOM SUB ROOM

MAIN ROOM SUB ROOM

ON/OFF ON/OFF

STANDBY

TV/CATV/DBS

POWER

ON

VCR1

POWER

DVD

VCR 1

DVD MULTI PHONO

VCR 2 TAPE/MD

CD

CDR

TV/DBS VIDEO FM/AM USB AUDIO

ANALOG/DIGITAL

INPUT

SOUND

LEVEL+

LEVEL–

L—BALANCE—R

1

CENTER

4

REAR·L

7

DIGITAL EQ

10

TEST

RETURN

SURROUND

ON/OFF

LINE DIRECT

2

SUBWFR

5

REAR·R

8

EFFECT

3

ROOM SIZE

6

LIVENESS

9

0

CENTER TONE

+

10

100+

FM MODE

DSP BASS BOOST

MODE

MIDNIGHT MODE

SLEEP

/REW

DOWN

REC

CONTROL

DIMMER

TV

CATV/

DBS

PLAY

TUNING

STOP

FF/

UP

PAUSE

TV VOL

TV/VIDEO

CHANNEL

MUTING

VOLUME

MENU

TEXT

DISPLAY

SET

DVD

MENU

EXIT

RM-SRX9010J

REMOTE CONTROL

A/V CONTROL RECEIVER

STANDBY

POWER

SPEAKERS ON/OFF

1

MAIN ROOM

2

SUB ROOM

SUBWOOFER OUT ON/OFF

RX-9010V AUDIO/VIDEO CONTROL RECEIVER

FM/AM TUNING FM/AM PRESET FM MODE

MEMORY

D I G I T A L

S U R R O U N D D I G I T A L

SURROUND ON/OFF DSP MODE

USB AUDIO

S-VIDEO

INPUT

ANALOG/DIGITAL MIDNIGHT MODE

INPUT ATT

VIDEO

VIDEO L—AUDIO—R

DVD MULTI DVD VCR 1 VCR 2 VIDEO TV SOUND/DBS

PHONO CD CDR

SOURCE NAME

TAPE / MD USB AUDIO FM / AM

DIGITAL

EQ

LEVEL

ADJUST

EFFECT SETTING

CONTROL

DOWN UP

SOURCE NAME

MAIN ROOM ON/OFF SUB ROOM ON/OFF SUB ROOM CONTROL DIMMER

MASTER VOLUME

PHONES

LINE DIRECT

BASS BOOST

D I G I T A L

Contents

Safety precautions --------------------------------------------------------1-2

Importance administering point on the safety --------------------- 1-3

Disassembly method -----------------------------------------------------1-4

Adjustment method -------------------------------------------------------1-10

Self-diagnose function ----------------------------------------------------1-11

Description of major ICs -------------------------------------------------1-13 30

COPYRIGHT 2001 VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LTD.

No.20940

Apr. 2001

http://getMANUAL.com

RX-9010VBK

1-2

1. This design of this product contains special hardware and many circuits and components specially for safety purposes. For continued protection, no changes should be made to the original design unless authorized in writing by the manufacturer. Replacement parts must be identical to those used in the original circuits. Services should be performed by qualified personnel only.

2. Alterations of the design or circuitry of the product should not be made. Any design alterations of the product should not be made. Any design alterations or additions will void the manufacturer`s warranty and will further relieve the manufacture of responsibility for personal injury or property damage resulting therefrom.

3. Many electrical and mechanical parts in the products have special safety-related characteristics. These characteristics are often not evident from visual inspection nor can the protection afforded by them necessarily be obtained by using replacement components rated for higher voltage, wattage, etc. Replacement parts which have these special safety characteristics are identified in the Parts List of Service Manual. Electrical components having such features are identified by shading on the schematics and by ( ) on the Parts List in the Service Manual. The use of a substitute replacement which does not have the same safety characteristics as the recommended replacement parts shown in the Parts List of Service Manual may create shock, fire, or other hazards.

4. The leads in the products are routed and dressed with ties, clamps, tubings, barriers and the like to be separated from live parts, high temperature parts, moving parts and/or sharp edges for the prevention of electric shock and fire hazard. When service is required, the original lead routing and dress should be observed, and it should be confirmed that they have been returned to normal, after re-assembling.

5. Leakage currnet check (Electrical shock hazard testing)

After re-assembling the product, always perform an isolation check on the exposed metal parts of the product

(antenna terminals, knobs, metal cabinet, screw heads, headphone jack, control shafts, etc.) to be sure the product is safe to operate without danger of electrical shock.

Do not use a line isolation transformer during this check.

Plug the AC line cord directly into the AC outlet. Using a "Leakage Current Tester", measure the leakage current from each exposed metal parts of the cabinet, particularly any exposed metal part having a return path to the chassis, to a known good earth ground. Any leakage current must not exceed 0.5mA AC (r.m.s.).

Alternate check method

Plug the AC line cord directly into the AC outlet. Use an AC voltmeter having, 1,000 ohms per volt or more sensitivity in the following manner. Connect a 1,500 10W resistor paralleled by a 0.15 F AC-type capacitor between an exposed metal part and a known good earth ground.

Measure the AC voltage across the resistor with the AC voltmeter.

Move the resistor connection to eachexposed metal part,

AC VOLTMETER

(Having 1000 ohms/volts, or more sensitivity) particularly any exposed metal part having a return path to the chassis, and meausre the AC voltage across the resistor.

Now, reverse the plug in the AC outlet and repeat each measurement. voltage measured Any must not exceed 0.75 V

AC (r.m.s.). This corresponds to 0.5 mA AC (r.m.s.).

0.15 F AC TYPE

1500 10W

Place this probe on each exposed metal part.

Good earth ground

1. This equipment has been designed and manufactured to meet international safety standards.

2. It is the legal responsibility of the repairer to ensure that these safety standards are maintained.

3. Repairs must be made in accordance with the relevant safety standards.

4. It is essential that safety critical components are replaced by approved parts.

5. If mains voltage selector is provided, check setting for local voltage.

!

Burrs formed during molding may be left over on some parts of the chassis. Therefore, pay attention to such burrs in the case of preforming repair of this system.

In regard with component parts appearing on the silk-screen printed side (parts side) of the PWB diagrams, the parts that are printed over with black such as the resistor ( ), diode ( ) and ICP ( ) or identified by the " " mark nearby are critical for safety.

When replacing them, be sure to use the parts of the same type and rating as specified by the manufacturer.

(Except the JC version)

Importance administering point on the safety

RX-9010VBK

PW20 PW17

PW18 PW26 PW19

FC1 B3142

FC2

6.3A-125V

PW30

TA2 TA1

R1

EP1 LVA10222-A3

112

131

132

113

R61

B3191

LVA10222-A6

RY63

CN55

D67

RY62

CN811

CN56

111

123

B3192

122

133

121

FC62

134

FC64

2A-125V

FC61

2A-125V

FC63

Caution: For continued protection against risk of fire, replace only with same type 6.3A/125V for

F201, 2A/125V for F202 and F203. This symbol specifies type of fast operating fuse.

Precaution: Pour eviter risques de feux, remplacez le fusible de surete de F201 comme le meme type que 6.3A/125V, et 2A/125V pour F202 et F203.

1-3

RX-9010VBK

Disassembly method

Removing the top cover (See Fig.1)

1.

Remove the four screws A attaching the top cover on both sides of the body.

2.

Remove the three screws B on the back of the body.

3.

Remove the top cover from behind in the direction of the arrow while pulling both sides outward.

Top cover

B

Removing the front panel assembly

(See Fig.2 to 4)

Prior to performing the following procedure, remove the top cover.

Tie band

Main

board

1.

Disconnect the card wire from connector CN400 on the audio board and CN402 on the power supply board in the front panel assembly.

CN400

2.

Cut off the tie band fixing the harness.

3.

Remove the three screws C attaching the front panel assembly.

Audio board

4.

Remove the four screws D attaching the front panel assembly on the bottom of the body. Detach the front panel assembly toward the front.

5.

Remove the screw a fixing a bonding ground.

A

2

A

2

C

Fig.1

Front panel assembly

C

D

Fig.2

CN402

Power supply board

Front panel assembly

D

Fig.3

Front panel assembly a

Headphone jack

Fig.4

1-4

RX-9010VBK

Removing the rear panel (See Fig.5)

Prior to performing the following procedure, remove the top cover.

1.

Remove the power cord stopper from the rear panel by moving it in the direction of the arrow.

E E

2.

Remove the thirty five screws E and a hexagon nut b attaching the each boards to the rear panel on the back of the body.

F

Rear panel

3.

Remove the three screws F attaching the rear panel on the back of the body.

E E

F E

Fig.5

b

Cord stopper

F

Removing each board connected to the rear side of the audio board

(See Fig.6 to 12)

Prior to performing the following procedure, remove the top cover and the rear panel.

Tie band

1.

Cut off the tie band fixing the harness.

CN361

2.

Disconnect the connect CN501, CN243, CN205,

CN381, CN361 on the DVD board.

CN381

3.

Disconnect the harness from connector CN721,

CN722 and CN723 on the main board.

Main board

4.

Disconnect the harness from connector CN1 on the antenna unit and remove the antenna unit.

5.

Disconnect the harness from connector CN491 on the relay board.

CN723

CN205 CN243

Fig.6

CN501

CN721 CN722

Relay board

CN491

6.

Disconnect the tuner board and audio board from connector CN101 and CN301 on the audio board.

7.

Pull out the video audio board, video board, S-video board.

8.

Disconnect the DSP board from connector CN601 on the audio board.

DVD board Fig.7

Antenna unit

CN1

DVD board

Fig.8

1-5

RX-9010VBK

Audio board

CN416

CN206

Tuner

board

CN101

CN301

Fig.9

Audio input

board

CN303

CN201

CN241

CN244

Video audio

board

Video

board

Fig.10

S Video

board

DSP board

Video audio

board

Fig.11

Video

board

S Video

board

Fig.12

CN601

Removing the audio board

(See Fig.13 to 14)

Prior to performing the following procedure, remove the top cover and the rear panel.

1.

Disconnect the harness from connector CN813 and

CN814 on the main board.

Main

board

CN814 CN813

Relay board

CN71 power supply board

Tie band

2.

Disconnect the card wire from connector CN931 and

CN932 on the audio board.

3.

Cut off the tie band fixing the harness.

4.

Disconnect the relay board from the audio board and the power supply board. (CN71,CN81)

Audio board

CN931/ 932

Fig.13

CN81

Power transformer

Power / Fuse board

5.

Disconnect the card wire from connector CN831 on the main board.

6.

Remove the three screws G attaching the audio board assembly.

7.

Remove the screw H attaching the audio board assembly.

CN831

G

G

Fig.14

H

1-6

RX-9010VBK

Removing the main board (See Fig.15)

Prior to performing the following procedure, remove the top cover, the rear panel and audio board.

1.

Cut off the tie band fixing the harness.

2.

Disconnect the harness from connector CN811 on the power supply board respectively.

3.

Disconnect the harness from connector CN881 on the main board.

NOTE:

In order to prevent the wire of CN881 from touching to the wire of CN813,the wire of CN881 is secured by tape. This is one of the preventive measures for possible troubles of the remote controller.

When assembling the unit,secure the wire of CN881 with the original tape so as to prevent both wire from touching each other.

4.

Remove the four screws I and the two screws J attaching the main board.

I

J

J

I I

Main

board

CN813 CN881 I

Fig.15

Tie band

J

CN811

Removing the Amp board

(See Fig.16 to 17)

1.

Remove the two screws L attaching the rear side of main board from the heat sink .

2.

Remove the ten screws K attaching each amp board from the heat sink.

L

Heat sink

Main board

rear side

Heat sink

K

Fig.16

K K

L

Fig.17

1-7

RX-9010VBK

Removing the power transformer

(See Fig.18)

Prior to performing the following procedures, remove the top cover.

Power transformer board

1.

Unsolder the two harnesses connected to the power transformer.

2.

Disconnect the harness from connector CN55 and

CN56 on the power transformer board.

CN55 / 56

3.

Remove the four screws M attaching the power transformer.

Removing the power / fuse board

(See Fig.18)

Prior to performing the following procedure, remove the top cover and the rear panel.

1.

Remove the screw N attaching the power / fuse board.

2.

Unsolder the power cord and other harnesses connected to the power / fuse board.

Solder

Removing the power supply board

(See Fig.19 to 20)

Prior to performing the following procedure, remove the top cover and the front panel.

1.

Remove the one nut attaching the headphone jack of the power supply board on the front side of the body.

2.

Disconnect the card wire from connector CN402 on the power supply board.

Power supply board

3.

Remove the three screws O attaching the power supply board and pull out the power supply board from the front bracket backward.

4.

Unsolder the three harnesses connected to the power supply board.

O

CN402

Power supply board

M

Power transformer

M

N

Solder

Power cord

Power / fuse board

Fig.18

Nut

Headphone jack

Fig.19

Power supply board

Headphone jack

O

Hook

Fig.20

Solder

Tie band

O

Tie band

1-8

RX-9010VBK

Removing the system control board / power switch board (See Fig.21 to 23)

Prior to performing the following procedure, remove the top cover and the front panel assembly.

1.

Pull out the volume knob on the front side of the front panel and remove the nut attaching the system control board.

2.

Remove the two screws P attaching the power switch board.

3.

Remove the two screws Q attaching the switch board.

4.

Remove the cords from the three hooks a.

5.

Remove the eight screws R attaching the system control board on the back of the front panel.

Q

6.

On the back of the front panel, release the four joints by pushing the joint tabs inward.

Remove the operation switch panel toward the front.

7.

Disconnect the harness from connector CN420 and

CN422 on the system control board.

8.

Release the two hooks b attaching the system control board.

Operation switch panel

Switch

board

Joint

R

Nut

Front panel assembly

Fig.21

Volume knob

R Cords

Power switch

board

R

Joint

Fig.22

Joint Joint

Hook a

System control board

P

CN420 Hook b

Fig.23

Hook b

CN422

System control board reverse side

Matters that require attention during replacement of IC400 (See Fig.24 to 25)

In case where there is a resistance array:

Both onetime IC and mask IC can be used

In case where there is no resistance array:

Only mask IC can be used

Fig.24

IC400

System control board top view

Resistance array

Fig.25

1-9

RX-9010VBK

Adjustment method

Power amplifier section

Adjustment of idling current

Measurement terminal

Adjustment volume

B2204-B2205(Lch) , B2213-2214(Rch)

VR787(Lch) , VR788(Rch)

Attention

This adjustment does not obtain a correct adjustment value immediately after the amplifier is used (state that an internal temperature has risen).

Please adjust immediately after using the amplifier after turning off the power supply of the amplifier and falling an internal temperature.

<Adjustment method>

1. Prior to turning the power ON, fully turn the adjusting resistor (VR787(Lch),VR788(Rch)) counterclockwise

direction and connect the DC voltmeter to the measuring terminal(B2204-B2205(Lch) , B2213-2214(Rch)).

2. Set the surround mode OFF.

3. Adjust the resistor so that the measured value becomes 2mV immediately after turning the power ON.

4. When the idling current has been stable (about 30 minutes after the power is turned ON),

confirm that the measured value falls within 1.0mV `10mV(2.3mV).

* It is not abnormal though the idling current might not become 0mA even if it is finished to turn variable

resistance (VR787,VR788) in the direction of counterclockwise.

Heat sink

B2213, B2214 (Rch)

VR788 (Rch)

VR787 (Lch)

B2204, B2205 (Lch)

1-10

RX-9010VBK

Self-diagnose function

1. Detection of abnormal power supply and voltage

When the power is turned ON, if an abnormality is detected during the signal input at the A/D port (IC901,

pin 2-5, 7) for one second continuously, the status will become STANDBY mode immediately.

When the power is turned ON again, detection of abnormal power supply and voltage will not be carried out

during the first 4 seconds.

Given below is a list of threshold values at the detection of abnormalities.

Pin 2

Micro-computer+5V

Pin 3

Digital+5V

Pin 4

Analog+5V

Pin 5

+12V

Pin 7

Tuner+9V

At abnormal state

(Low voltage)

Analog value

0 - 2.2V

Analog value

0 - 2.2V

Analog value

0 - 2.2V

Analog value

0 - 2.2V

Analog value

0 - 2.2V

At abnormal state

Analog value

2.2 - 2.8V

Analog value

2.2 - 2.8V

Analog value

2.2 - 2.8V

Analog value

2.2 - 2.8V

Analog value

2.2 - 2.8V

At abnormal state

(High voltage)

Analog value

2.8 - 5.0V

Analog value

2.8 - 5.0V

Analog value

2.8 - 5.0V

Analog value

2.8 - 5.0V

Analog value

2.8 - 5.0V

2. Initial setting on ship

To gain the initial setting on ship, put the power plug in the socket while pressing DOWN key and UP key together simultaneously, then turn the power ON.

3. Test mode

To enter the test mode, put the power plug in the socket while pressing EFFECT key and UP key together simultaneously, then turn the power ON.

Workings of test mode:

All FLs are turned ON for 3 seconds. (the FLs, which are divided in two groups, are turned ON alternatively)

Faster volume UP/DOWN operation can be achieved with the remote controller.

When the power is turned OFF, the test mode will be released.

The FL display returns to normal after the three seconds. Then the STANDBY LED is turned ON (flashing

ON and OFF for each one second) to show the present status being a test mode.

1-11

RX-9010VBK

4. Self-diagnose

To enter the self-diagnose mode, put the power plug in the socket while pressing SETTING key and UP key together simultaneously, then turn the power ON. With the UP/DOWN key operation, DSP microcomputer,

ROM No.of system microcomputer as well as working status of DSP can be displayed for five seconds.

While the working status is being displayed, the followings items can be switched with the UP/DOWN key operation.

VERSION of system microcomputer Local microcomputer CH0

Local microcomputer CH01 Local microcomputer CH2

Local microcomputer CH3 Local microcomputer CH4

When the power is turned OFF, the self-diagnose mode will be released.

During the self-diagnose mode, the STANDBY LED is turned ON .

(flashing ON for one second then OFF for three seconds)

FL transient display will be carried out as follows. When the transient display is not carried out, normal display/workings are carried out.

Upper 1 2 3 4 5 digits

Lower 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 digits

FL Display

S 0 0 1 1

2 0 0 0 1 2 0 9 0 0

D 0 0

Information on VERSION of system microcomputer (IC901)

Example : VER1.1 2000/12/9

Display of communication information on DSP microcomputer (IC581)

D 0 1

Display of communication information on DIR AK4112A (IC551)

D 0 2

Display of communication information on DSP XCA56367 (IC501)

D 0 3

Display of communication information on CODEC AK4527 (IC571)

D 0 4 1 1

2 0 0 0 1 2 0 9 0 0 Information on VERSION of DSP microcomputer (IC581)

Example :VER1.1 2000/12/9

1-12

RX-9010VBK

Description of major ICs

AK4527 (IC571) : A/D,D/A Converter

1.Pin layout

SDOS

OCKS

MIS

BCLK

LRCK

SDTI1

SDTI2

SDTI3

SDTO

DAUX

DFS

9

10

11

6

7

8

1

2

3

4

5

27

26

25

24

23

33

32

31

30

29

28

VREFL

RIN+

RIN-

LIN+

LIN-

ROUT1

LOUT1

ROUT2

LOUT2

ROUT3

LOUT3

2.Block diagram

LIN+

LIN-

RIN+

RIN-

LOUT1

ROUT1

LOUT2

ROUT2

LOUT3

ROUT3

Audio

I/F

ADC

ADC

HPF

HPF

LPF

LPF

LPF

LPF

LPF

LPF

DAC

DAC

DAC

DAC

DAC

DAC

DATT

DATT

DATT

DATT

DATT

DATT

LRCK

BICK

MCLK

SDOUT

SDIN1

SDIN2

SDIN3

Format

Converter

Block Diagram (DIR and AC-3) DSP are external parts)

DAUX

SDOS

SDTO

SDTI1

SDTI2

SDTI3

1-13

RX-9010VBK

8

9

10

11

4

5

6

7

3. Pin function (1/2)

No.

1

Pin name

SDOS

I/O

I

2

3

OCKS

MIS I

I

AK4527(1/2)

Function

SDTO Source select pin

"L" : Internal ADC output, "H" : DAUX input

ORed with serial control register if P/S="L".

MCKO Clock frequency select pin

"L" : MCLK, "H" : MCLK/2. ORed with serial control register if P/S= "L".

Connect to GND

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

27

28

29

30

23

24

25

26

31

32

BICK

LRCK

SDTI1

SDTI2

SDTI3

SDTO

DAUX

DFS

DEM1

DEM0

MCKO

DVDD

DVSS

PD

XTS

ICKS1

ICKS0

CAD1

CAD0

LOUT3

ROUT3

LOUT2

ROUT2

LOUT1

ROUT1

LIN-

LIN+

RIN-

RIN+

-

I

O

-

I

I

I

I

I

O

O

I

I

O

O

O

O

I

I

I

O

I

I/O

I

I

I

I

I

I

Audio serial data clock pin

Input/Output channel clock pin

DAC1 Audio serial data input pin

DAC2 Audio serial data input pin

DAC3 Audio serial data input pin

Audio serial data output pin

AUX Audio serial data input pin

Double speed sampling mode pin

"L" : Normal speed, "H" : Double speed, the ADC is powered down.

ORed with serial control register if P/S="L".

De-emphasis pin

ORed with serial control register if P/S="L"

De-emphasis Pin

ORed with serial control register if P/S="L"

Master clock output pin

Digital power supply pin

Digital ground pin

Power-down & Reset pin

When "L", the AK4527 is powered-down and the control registers are reset

to default state. If the state of CAD0-1 changes, then the AK4527

must be reset by PDN.

X'tal oscillator Select/Test mode pin

"H" : X'tal Oscillator selected

"L" : External clock source selected

Input clock select 1 pin

Input clock select 0 pin

Chip address pin

Used during the serial control mode.

Chip address pin

Used during the serial control mode.

Lch #3 analog output pin

Rch #3 analog output pin

Lch #2 analog output pin

Rch #2 analog output pin

Lch #2 analog output pin

Rch #1 analog output pin

Lch analog negative Input Pin

Lch analog positive Input Pin

Rch analog negative Input Pin

Rch analog positive Input Pin

1-14

RX-9010VBK

3.Pin function (2/2)

No.

33

34

Pin Name

VREFL

VCOM

I/O

I

O

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

VREFH

AVDD

AVSS

XTI

XTO

MCKI

P/S

DIF0

CS

DIF1

CCLK

LOOP0

CDTI

LOOP1

CDTO

I

-

-

I

O

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

O

AK4527(2/2)

Function

Negative voltage reference Input pin, AVSS

Common voltage output pin,AVDD/2

Large external capacitor around 2.2uF is used to reduce power-supply noise

Positive voltage reference input pin,AVDD

Analog power supply pin

Analog ground pin

X'tal input pin

X'tal output pin if XTS="H"

External master clock input pin if XTS="L"

Parallel/Serial select pin

"L" : Serial control mode, "H" : Parallel control mode

Audio data interface format pin in parallel mode

Chip select pin in serial mode

Audio data interface format pin in parallel mode

Control data clock pin in serial mode

Loop back mode pin in parallel mode

Enables digital loop-back from ADC to 3 DACs.

Control data input pin in serial mode

Loop back mode pin in parallel mode

Enable all 3 DAC channels to be input from SDTII.

Control data output pin in serial mode

1-15

RX-9010VBK

BA15218F(IC303, IC304, IC372, IC385, IC384, IC386) : OP AMP.

OUT1 1

-IN1 2

+IN1 3

-

+

1

V EE 4

8 V CC

7 OUT2

-

2

+

6 -IN2

5 +IN2

BA7625 (IC201, IC242) : Video selector

MONITOR OUT 1

GND 2

IN5

GND

3

4

IN4 5 logic

16 IN1

15 CTL A

14 VOUT 1

13 V

CC

12 IN2

11 CTL B

CTL E 6

IN3 7

CTL D 8 logic

10 VOUT 2

11 CTL C

BA7626 (IC241) : Video selector

MONITOR OUT 1

GND 2

IN5

GND

3

4

IN4 5

CTL E 6

IN3 7

CTL D 8 logic logic

16 IN1

15 CTL A

14 VOUT 1

13 V

CC

12 IN2

11 CTL B

10 VOUT 2

11 CTL C

1-16

A B E

L L

*

H L *

L H *

H H L

H H H

C D E

L L *

H L *

L H *

H H L

H H H

C D E

L L *

H L *

L H

*

H H L

H H H

MONITOR OUT

IN1

IN2

IN3

IN4

IN5

VOUT1

--

IN2

IN3

IN4

IN5

VOUT2

IN1

--

IN3

IN4

IN5

A B E

L L

*

H L

*

L H

*

H H L

H H H

C D E

L L

*

H L

*

L H *

H H L

H H H

C D E

L L

*

H L *

L H *

H H L

H H H

MONITOR OUT

IN1

IN2

IN3

IN4

IN5

VOUT1

--

IN2

IN3

IN4

IN5

VOUT2

IN1

--

IN3

IN4

IN5

BU2092(IC402):PORT EXPANDER

1.Terminal Layout

Vss 1

DATA

2

CLOCK 3

LCK

4

Q0

5

Q1

6

Q2 7

Q3 8

Q4

9

CONTROL

CIRCUIT

2.Pin Function

Pin No.

1

2

3

4

5~16

Symbol

Vss

DATA

CLOCK

LCK

Q0~Q11

I

I

I/O

-

I

O

Function

Connect to GND

Serial Data input

Shift Clock of Data

Latch Clock of Data

Parallel Data Output

Latch Data L H

OUTPUT ON OFF

17

18

OE

Vdd

I

-

Output Enable

Power Supply

18 Vdd

17

OE

16 Q11

15

Q10

14

Q9

13 Q8

12 Q7

11

Q6

10 Q5

RX-9010VBK

1-17

RX-9010VBK

MB90088 (IC203) : On screen display controller

1.Terminal Layout

YIN

VIN

CIN

AVcc

IOUT

VOC

Vcc

EXS

XS

HSYNC

VSYNC

EXHSYN

EXVSYN

Vss

10

11

12

13

6

7

8

9

14

1

2

3

4

5

2.Block Diagram

SIN

SCLK

CS

18

17

16

15

22

21

20

19

28

27

26

25

24

23

AVss

YOUT

VOUT

COUT

CS

SIN

SCLK

TEST

BOUT

ROUT

GOUT

VOB

XD

EXD

Serial Input

Control

Each Control, Data

EXHSYN

EXVSYN

H/V Separate

VIN

YIN

CIN

HSYNC

VSYNC

XS

EXS

XD

EXD

NTSC/PAL

Signal OSC

Display Memory

Control

VRAM

4FSC CLK

OSC

Dot CLK

OSC

Each Block

Each Block

Analog SW

Video Signal

OSC

Output

Control

CGROM

VOUT

YOUT

COUT

BOUT

ROUT

GOUT

IOUT

VOC

VOB

1-18

3.Functions

24

25

26

27

28

21

22

23

17

18

19

20

14

15

16

11

12

13

9

10

7

8 pin no Symbol I/O

1 YIN I

2 VIN I

3

4

5

6

CIN

AVcc

IOUT

VOC

-

I

O

O

Vcc

EXS

XS

HSYNC

VSYNC

EXHSYN

EXVSYN

Vss

EXD

XD

I

-

I

O

O

O

-

I

I

O

VOB

GOUT

ROUT

BOUT

TEST

SCLK

SIN

O

O

I

I

I

CS

COUT

VOUT

YOUT

AVss -

O

O

I

O

Function

Lux signal Input terminal for Superinpause indication

Composite video signal input terminal for Superinpause indication

Contrast signal input terminal for Superinpause indication

Analog power supply terminal

Color (Lux) signal output terminal

Character output terminal

Power supply terminal

Clock generater outside circuit terminal for color burst

Horizontal signal output terminal

Vertical signal output terminal

EXT horizontal signal input terminal

EXT vertical signal input terminal

GND

Dot clock generater outside circuit signal terminal for indication

Character & background signal output terminal

Color signal (Green, Red, Blue)

Test signal input terminal

Shift clock input terminal for serial transmission

Serial data input terminal

Chip select terminal

Contrast signal output terminal

Composite video signal output terminal

Lux signal output terminal

Analog GND terminal

RX-9010VBK

1-19

RX-9010VBK

MAX4018ESD (IC390) : OP AMP.

ENA

ENC

ENB

Vcc

INA+

INA-

OUTA

N.C.

3

4

5

1

2

6

7

8

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

OUTC

INC-

INC+

V

EE

INB+

INB-

OUTB

N.C.

NJM2285V-W(IC202) : 2-INPUT 3CHANNEL VIDEO SWITCH

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

L

BIAS TYPE

CLAMP TYPE

H L

H

CLAMP TYPE

H

L

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

IN1B CTL1 OUT1 GND2 OUT2 OUT3 CTL3 IN3A

NJM2406F-X(IC387): SINGLE-SUPPLY COMPARATORS

1

2

3

5

4

PIN FUNCTION

1. -INPUT

2. GND

3. +INPUT

4. OUTPUT

5.V

+

1-20

NJM4580D (IC301) : LPF, Mic and H.phone Amp.

1.Terminal layout

2.Block diagram

V

+

A OUT 1

A -IN 2

A +IN 3

V 4

A

(TOP VIEW)

B

8 V+

7 B OUT

6 B -IN

5 B +IN

INPUT

+

V

-

NJU7241F33(IC411) : VOLTAGE REGULATOR

1

2

3

5

4

PIN FUNCTION

1. GND

2. V

IN

3. V

OUT

4. +NC

5. STB

OUTPUT

RX-9010VBK

1-21

RX-9010VBK

PCM2702E-X (IC410) : DIGITAL / ANALOG CONVERTER

1.Pin layout 2. Block diagram

1

2

3

4

XTI

V

DD

C

DGNDC

V DD

DGND 5

6

7

D+

D-

8

9

V

BUS

DGND

10 PLYBCK

11 SSPND

12 ZERO

13 TEST3

14 TEST2

XTO 28

VccP 27

AGNDP 26

VccL 25

AGNDL 24

V OUT L 23

Vcc 22

V COM 21

AGND 20

V

OUT

R 19

AGNDR 18

VccR 17

TEST0 16

TEST1 15

D+

D-

VBUS

DGNDU

VDDC

DGNDC

USB I/F

USB packet data

WRCLK

FIFO audio data

8x

Oversampling

Digital Filter

Multi-level

Delta-Sigma

Modulator

DAC

DAC

MCLK

RDCLK System Clock

USB clock generator

SPACT

Audio clock generator

Crystal OSC

XTI XTO VDDP DGNDP

Power supply

VCC AGND VDD DGND

Low-pass

Filter

Low-pass

Filter

VOUTL

VCOM

VOUTR

3.Pin function

IN

-

-

OUT

-

-

-

OUT

-

-

-

-

OUT

IN

-

OUT

OUT

OUT

IN

IN

IN

-

-

I/O

I/O

I/O

IN

-

-

TEST0

VccR

AGNDR

V

OUT

R

AGND

V

COM

Vcc

V

OUT

L

AGNDL

VccL

AGNDP

VccP

XTO

Symbol

XTI

V

DD

C

DGNDC

V

DD

DGND

D+

D-

V

BUS

DGNDU

PLYBCK

SSPND

ZERO

TEST3

TEST2

TEST1

20

21

22

23

16

17

18

19

24

25

26

27

28

12

13

14

15

8

9

10

11

6

7

4

5

PIN

1

2

3

Function

Crystal Oscillator Input.

Digital Power Supply for Clock Generator, +3.3V.

Digital Ground for Clock Generator.

Digital Power Supply, +3.3V.

Digital Ground.

USB Differential Input/Output Plus.

USB Differential Input/Output Minus.

USB Bus Power (This pin NEVER consumes the USB bus power).

Digital Ground for USB Transceiver.

Playback flag, active LOW. (LOW: playback, HIGH: idle).

Suspend flag, active LOW. (LOW: suspend, HIGH: operational).

Zero flag, (LOW: Normal, HIGH: ZERO).

Test pin 3. Connect to digital ground.

Test pin 2. Connect to digital ground.

Test pin 1. Connect to digital ground.

Test pin 0. Connect to digital ground.

Analog Supply for R-channel, +5V.

Analog Ground for R-channel.

Analog Output for R-channel.

Analog Ground.

Common for DAC.

Analog Supply, +5V.

Analog output for L-channel.

Analog Ground for L-channel.

Analog Supply for L-channel, +5V.

Analog Ground for PLL.

Analog Supply for PLL, +5V.

Crystal Oscillator Output.

Note:

(1) 3.3V tolerant.

(2) Schmitt trigger input with internal pull-down, 5V tolerant.

(1)

(2)

(2)

(2)

(2)

(2)

1-22

L-S1

2

L-S2

3

L-COM1

4

L-S3

5

L-S4

6

L-COM2

7

L-S5

8

L-S6

9

L-COM3

10

L-S7

11

L-COM4

12

ST

13

TC9162AN (IC380) : ANALOG SWITCH

VSS

L-S1

L-S2

L-COM1

L-S3

L-S4

L-COM2

L-S5

L-S6

L-COM3

L-S7

L-COM4

ST

GND

7

8

9

10

11

3

4

1

2

5

6

12

13

14

22

21

20

19

18

28

27

26

25

24

23

17

16

15

VDD

R-S1

R-S2

R-COM1

R-S3

R-S4

R-COM2

R-S5

R-S6

R-COM3

R-S7

R-COM4

DATA

CK

VSS GND VDD

1 14 28

SHIFT REGISTER

27 R-S1

26 R-S2

25 R-COM1

24 R-S3

23 R-S4

22 R-COM2

21 R-S5

20 R-S6

19 R-COM3

18 R-S7

17 R-COM4

16 DATA

15 CK

RX-9010VBK

1-23

L-S1

2

L-S2

3

L-S3 4

L-COM1 5

L-S4

6

L-S5

7

L-S6

8

L-COM2 9

L-S7

10

L-S8

11

L-COM3

12

ST 13

RX-9010VBK

TC9163AF-X (IC371, IC392) : ANALOG SWITCH

VSS

L-S1

L-S2

L-S3

L-COM1

L-S4

L-S5

L-S6

L-COM2

L-S7

L-S8

L-COM3

ST

GND

12

13

14

7

8

9

10

11

1

4

5

2

3

6

20

19

18

17

16

15

25

24

23

22

21

28

27

26

VDD

R-S1

R-S2

R-S3

R-COM1

R-S4

R-S5

R-S6

R-COM2

R-S7

R-S8

R-COM3

DATA

CK

VSS GND VDD

1 14 28

SHIFT REGISTER

1-24

27 R-S1

26 R-S2

25 R-S3

24 R-COM1

23 R-S4

22 R-S5

21 R-S6

20 R-COM2

19 R-S7

18 R-S8

17 R-COM3

16 DATA

15 CK

L-S1 2

L-S2 3

L-S3 4

L-S4 5

L-COM1 6

L-S5 7

L-S6 8

L-COM2 9

L-S7 10

L-S8 11

L-COM3 12

ST 13

TC9164AF-X (IC302, IC391) : ANALOG SWITCH

VSS

L-S1

L-S2

L-S3

L-S4

L-COM1

L-S5

L-S6

L-COM2

L-S7

L-S8

L-COM3

ST

GND

7

8

5

6

9

10

11

1

2

3

4

12

13

14

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

28

27

26

25

17

16

15

VDD

R-S1

R-S2

R-S3

R-S4

R-COM1

R-S5

R-S6

R-COM2

R-S7

R-S8

R-COM3

DATA

CK

VSS GND VDD

1 14 28

SHIFT REGISTER

27 R-S1

26 R-S2

25 R-S3

24 R-S4

23 R-COM1

22 R-S5

21 R-S6

20 R-COM2

19 R-S7

18 R-S8

17 R-COM3

16 DATA

15 CK

RX-9010VBK

1-25

RX-9010VBK

TC9459F (IC381, IC382, IC383, IC393) : Electronic volume control

1.Terminal layout

L-ch

VSS

L-OUT

NC

L-IN

L-LD1

L-LD2

L-A-GND

NC

CS1

NC

GND

CK

7

8

9

10

11

12

1

2

3

4

5

6

18

17

16

15

14

13

24

23

22

21

20

19

VDD

R-OUT

NC

R-IN

R-LD1

R-LD2

R-A-GND

NC

CS2

NC

STB

DATA

R-ch

2. Block diagram

L-OUT 2

NC 3

L-1N 4

50k /

915TEP

VR

L-LD1 5

L-LD2 6

L-A-GND 7

NC 8

CS1 9

NC 10

GND 11

CK

12

VSS

1

VDD

24

L-ch 7 to 91

decoder

L-ch data latch circuit

R-ch 7 to 91

decoder

R-ch data latch circuit

Shift register (24BIT)

Level shift circuit

Same as L-ch

Circuit

23 R-OUT

22 NC

21 R-IN

20 R-LD1

19 R-LD2

18 R-A-GND

17 NC

16 CS2

15 NC

14 STB

13 DATA

3.Pin function

7

8

9

10

11

12

3

4

5

6

Pin No.

1

2

Symbol

VSS

L-OUT

NC

NC

L-LD1

L-LD2

L-A-GND

NC

CS1

NC

NC

CK

Function

Negative power supply pin

Volume output pin

No connection

No connection

Loudness tap output pin

Loudness tap output pin

Analog GND pin

No connection

Chip select input pin

No connection

No connection

Clock input pin

19

20

21

22

23

24

15

16

17

18

Pin No.

13

14

R-LD2

R-LD1

R-IN

NC

R-OUT

VDD

Symbol

DATA

STB

NC

CS2

NC

R-A-GND

Function

Data input pin

Strobe input pin

No connection

Chip select input pin

No connection

Analog GND pin

Loudness tap output pin

Loudness tap output pin

Volume input pin

No connection

Volume output pin

Positive power supply pin

1-26

PQ3DZ53 (IC583) : Regulator IC

DC INPUT(Vin) 1 3

DC OUTPUT(Vo)

CUSTOM IC

5

GND

TC74HC4053AF (IC388, IC389) : MULTIPLEXER

2 ON/OFF CONTROL(Vc)

1Y

0Y

IZ

Z-COM

0Z

INH

V

EE

GND

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

B

C

Vcc

Y-COM

X-COM

1X

0X

A

CONTROL INPUTS

INHIBIT

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

L

H

X: Don't Care.

C

L

L

L

L

H

H

H

H

X

H

L

L

H

B

L

L

H

H

X

H

K

H

K

A

K

H

K

H

X

W24L010AJ-12 (IC511) : CMOS STATIC RAM

1. Pin layout

2. Block diaglam

V

DD

Vss

12

13

14

15

16

8

9

10

11

5

6

7

3

4

1

2

A0

I/O1

I/O2

I/O3

Vss

A4

A3

A2

A1

NC

A16

A14

A12

A7

A6

A5

I/O8

I/O7

I/O6

I/O5

I/O4

A11

OE

A10

CS1

V

DD

A15

CS2

WE

A13

A8

A9

32

31

26

25

24

23

30

29

28

27

22

21

20

19

18

17

A0

A16

CS2

CS1

OE

WE

DECODER

CONTROL

A11

A9

A8

A13

WE

CS2

A15

VDD

NC

A16

A14

A12

A7

A6

A5

A4

8

9

10

11

12

13

3

4

5

1

2

6

7

14

15

16

32-pin

TSOP

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

32

31

30

29

19

18

17

16

A0

A1

A2

A3

OE

A10

CS1

I/O8

I/O7

I/O6

I/O5

I/O4

Vss

DO3

DO2

DO1

CORE

ARRAY

DATA I/O

I/O1

I/O8

3. Pin function

SYMBOL

A0 - A16

I/O1 - I/O8

CS1, CS2

WE

OE

V DD

Vss

NC

DESCRIPTION

Address Input

Data Input/Output

Chip Select Inputs

Write Enable Input

Output Enable Input

Power Supply

Ground

No Connection

RX-9010VBK

1-27

RX-9010VBK

UPD784215AGC132(IC581) : UNIT CPU

1.Pin layout

75 ~ 51

76 50

1-28

100

1 ~ 25

26

2.Pin function

Pin No.

Symbol

71

72

73~75

76

77

78

79,80

81

54

55

56

57~63

64,65

66

67

68~70

82,83

84

85

86

87

88

89~93

94

95~100

44

45,46

47

48

49

50,51

52

53

34,35

36

37,38

39

40

41

42

43

16

17

18

19~22

23

24

25~32

33

12

13

14

15

1~8

9

10

11

DSPCOM

DSPSTS

DSPCLK

DSPRDY

MIDIO_IN/OUT

MICK

HREQ

SS

DSP_RST

D_CS

PD/ DIR

CDTI/CDTO

CCLK

CS

PD

GND

EQ

CTR TONE

3D

VDD

ANA_TT

LEF_MIX

LEF_OUT

MIX_OUT

S_MUTE

TEST

VDD

X2

X1

VSS

XT2

XT1

RESET

AUTO

ERR

Fz96k

P03~P06

AVDD

AV REF0

P10~P17

AVSS

P130, P131

AV REF1

RX, TX

I/O

-

-

O

O

O

-

-

O

O/I

O

O

-

O

-

O

-

-

-

O

O

-

-

O

O

O

O

-

O

-

O

I/O

O

I

I

I

I

O

O

-

O

O

-

-

-

-

I

I

I

I

I

I

-

-

I

-

-

-

Function

Non connect

Power supply terminal

Connecting the crystal oscillator for system main clock

Connecting the crystal oscillator for system main clock

Connect to GND

Connecting the crystal oscillator for system sub clock

Connect VSS

System reset signal input

Output of DSP to general-purpose port

Output of DSP to general-purpose port

Output of DSP to general-purpose port

Output of DSP to general-purpose port

Power supply terminal

Connect to GND

Connect to GND

Connect to GND

Non connect

Power supply terminal

Not use

Non connect

Communication port from IC901

Status communication port to IC901

Clock input from IC901

Ready signal input from IC901

Non connect

Interface I/O terminal with microcomputer

Interface I/O terminal with microcomputer of clock signal

HREQ

System slave select

Non connect

Reset signal output of DSP

Non connect

Chip select output

Non connect

Reset signal output

Non connect

Interface I/O terminal with microcomputer

Interface I/O terminal with microcomputer of clock signal

CS

Non connect

Reset signal output

Connect to GND

Non connect

EQ

CENTER TONE

3D-Phonic

Non connect

Power supply

Non connect

Analog./T.TONE

Select 1

Select 2

Select 3

S.MUTE

Non connect

Test terminal

Non connect

RX-9010VBK

LC72136N (IC121) : PLL frequency synthesizer

1. Pin layout

XT

FM/AM

CE

DI

CLOCK

DO

FM/ST/VCO

AM/FM

SDIN

5

6

7

8

1

2

3

4

9

10

11

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

XT

GND

LPFOUT

LPFIN

PD

VCC

FMIN

AMIN

IFCONT

IFIN

2. Block diagram

Reference

Driver

Phase

Detector

Charge Pump

1

22

16 1/2

Unlock

Detector

18

19

20

15

12bit

Programmable

DriverS

12

3

4

5

6

17

21

C

2

B

I/F

Power on

Reset

Data Shift Register & Latch

Universal

Counter

7 8 2 11 13

3. Pin function

8

9

10

11

5

6

2

3

Pin

No.

1

4

7

Symbol

XT

FM/AM

CE

DI

CLOCK

DO

FM/ST/VCO

I/O

I

O

I

I

I

O

O

Function

X'tal oscillator connect (75kHz)

LOW:FM mode

When data output/input for 4pin(input) and

6pin(output): H

Input for receive the serial data from controller

Sync signal input use

Data output for Controller

Output port

"Low": MW mode

15

16

17

18

AM/FM

LW

MW

SDIN

O

I/O

I/O

I/O

Open state after the power on reset

Input/output port

Input/output port

Data input/output

Pin

No.

12

13

14

Symbol

IFIN

IFCONT

I/O

I

O

-

Function

IF counter signal input

IF signal output

Not use

19

20

21

22

AMIN

FMIN

VCC

PD

LPFIN

LPFOUT

GND

XT

I

-

I

O

I

-

I

O

AM Local OSC signal output

FM Local OSC signal input

Power suplly(VDD=4.5-5.5V)

When power ON:Reset circuit move

PLL charge pump output(H: Local OSC frequency Height than Reference frequency.

L: Low Agreement: Height impedance)

Input for active lowpassfilter of PLL

Output for active lowpassfilter of PLL

Connected to GND

X'tal oscillator(75KHz)

1-29

RX-9010VBK

LA1838(IC102): FM AM IF AMP&detector, FM MPX decoder

1. Block Diagram

30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

ALC AM

OSC

REG

AM

MIX

FM

RF.AMP

DECODER

ANIT-BIRDIE

MUTE

BUFF

P-DET

STEREO

5N

SW

AGC

AM IF DET

SD

COMP

VCO

384KHz

FF

38k

FF

19k /

2

FF

19k / LS

PILOT

DET

AM

S-METER

FM

S-METER

S-CLRVE

AM/FM

IF-BUFF

TUNING

DRIVE

STEREO

DRIVE

FM IF

PM

DET

GND

1

2. Pin Function

2

Pin

No.

Symbol I/O

1

FM IN I

3 4 5

Function

6

This is an input terminal of FM IF signal.

2 AM MIX O This is an out put terminal for AM mixer.

3 FM IF I Bypass of FM IF

4 AM IF I Input of AM IF Signal.

5

6

7

8

9

10

GND

TUNED

STEREO

VCC

FM DET

AM SD

O

This is the device ground terminal.

When the set is tuning, this terminal becomes "L".

O Stereo indicator output. Stereo "L",

Mono: "H"

This is the power supply terminal.

FM detect transformer.

This is a terminal of AM ceramic filter.

11 FM VSM O Adjust FM SD sensitivity.

12

13

14

15

AM VSM

MUTE

FM/AM

O Adjust AM SD sensitivity.

I/O When the signal of IF REQ of IC121(

LC72131) appear, the signal of FM/AM

IF output. //Muting control input.

I Change over the FM/AM input.

"H" :FM, "L" : AM

MONO/ST O Stereo : "H", Mono: "L"

7

VCC

8

Pin

No.

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Symbol

L OUT

I/O Function

O Left channel signal output.

R OUT

L IN

R IN

RO

LO

IF IN

O Right channel signal output.

I

I Input terminal of the left channel post

AMP.

Input terminal of the right channel post AMP.

O Mpx Right channel signal output.

O Mpx Left channel signal output.

I Mpx input terminal

23

24

25

26

27

28

FM OUT

AM DET

AM AGC

AFC

AM RF

REG

O

O

FM detection output.

AM detection output.

I

I

This is an AGC voltage input terminal for AM

This is an output terminal of voltage for FM-AFC.

AM RF signal input.

O Register value between pin 26 and pin28 desides the frequency width of the input signal.

29 AM OSC This is a terminal of AM Local oscillation circuit.

30 OSC BUFFER O AM Local oscillation Signal output.

1-30

RX-9010VBK

4

3

2

1

5

Block diagrams

Signal I/O block section

CN400

CN731 CN732

Main section

LVA10220-1

L ch

Q761

Q763

CN244

S Video

CN242

LVA10219-5

CN200 CN204

Video

CN206

LVA10219-4

CN587

DSP

CN581

LVA10223

CN313 CN371

V Audio input

CN416

LVA10219-3

CN311

Audio input

CN351

LVA10219-2

CN111

Tuner

LVA10009

DATA/ CLK

IC387

FW481 CN480

DVD

SUB WOOFER

DVD

CENTER

R ch

Q762

Q764

LVA10220-2

LVA10220-3

CEN

Q1751

Q1752

LVA10220-4

RL ch Q1851

Q1853

RR ch

Q1852

Q1854

LVA10220-5

A B C D E

SL

SR

R

L

CEN

LVA10221-1

F

LVA10222-7

G

RY831

LVA10221-2

L

R

SPK1

RY832

L

R

SPK2

/SUB

ROOM

SPK

SUB

ROOM

RY833

RY851

RY852

CENTER

REAR L

REAR R

2-1

Video section

DVD

TV/DBS

5

R

VCR1

P

4

VCR2

R

P

MON

SW

IC 201

Y/C SEP

IC 202

V SIG

LVA10219-4

IC 203

DATA

MON Y/C OUT

MON Y/C IN

FRONT VIDEO

IN (RCA)

RX-9010VBK

3

S Video section

DVD F

TV/DBS

VCR1 REC

VCR1 P.B

VCR2 REC

VCR2 P.B

SUB PRE

OUT

V Audio input section

LVA10219-3

MAIN ROOM SIG

SOUTCE

SELECTOR

IC 371

SOUTCE

SELECTOR

IC 392

SUB

DATA/

CLK

SUB

ROOM

SIG

REAR/ SUB

ROOM SIGNAL

REAR SIG

SUB ROOM

SIG

DATA/CLK

SUB

DATA/CLK

IC 394

IC 393

IC 395

MAIN ROOM SIG

IC372

SUB ROOM

SIG

USB

FRONT VIDEO

2

DVD

TV/DBS

R

VCR1

P

R

VCR2

P

MON

1

A B

IC 241

SW

(C)

LVA10219-5

DATA

C

FRONT Y/C

IC 242

SW

(Y)

Y

Y

C

MON Y/C

MON Y/C

C 2-2

DIGITAL

IN1

DIGITAL

IN2

DIGITAL

IN3

DIGITAL

IN4

D

DIGITAL

OUT

DSP section

SELECTOR

IC 551

DSP

CONTROLLER

IC 581

DSP

IC 501

LVA10223

DATA

AD/DA

CONVERTER

IC 571

R/L

C

SR/SL

SD RAM

IC 511

E F G H

Audio input section

5

PHONO

L/R

4

CD

L/R

TAPE

P.B

TAPE

REC

CDR

P.B

CDR

REC

EQ

IC 301

SOURCE

SELECTOR

IC 302

3

LVA10219-2

DATA/CLK

TUNER

SUB DATA/ CLK

VOL

DATA/

CLK

MAIN ROOM SIGNAL

IC 303

AUDIO

SOURCE

SELECTOR

IC 391

SUB ROOM SIGNAL

2

DVD

REAR

IC 304

DVD REAR

1

A B C D

System control & FL section

KEY

Tuner section

FM

TUNER

RF 101

FL DISPLAY D400

SYSTEM CONTROLLER

IC 400

Y/C

VIDEO

AUDIO

USB

LVA10218-1

AM/FM DET

IC102

LVA10009

AM

E

MW RF & OSC

T111

F

PLL

IC102

DATA

G

RX-9010VBK

2-3

RX-9010VBK

5

Standard schematic diagrams

Power supply section

4 sheet 10/11

CN402

3

CN72

CN71

2

1 sheet 3/11

CN82

CN491

TO FW481 sheet 6/11

SHEET

NUMBER

1/11

2/11

3/11

4/11

5/11

6/11

7/11

8/11

9/11

10/11

11/11

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

POWER SUPPLY

MAIN

AUDIO

AUDIO SIGNAL INPUT

VIDEO SIGNAL INPUT

VOLUME COMPONENT

AUDIO AMP (FRONT CHANNEL)

AUDIO AMP (CENTER, REAR CHANNEL)

DSP

SYSTEM CONTROL

TUNER

A B

C69

0.047MY

C68

0.047MY

R74

100K

CN811

D67

1SS133

R61

F61

F62

3.3

111

123

122

121

131

132

113

112

134

133

PW10

PW11

PW12

PW13

PW14

PW15

PW16

D75

Q61

KRC105M

MTZ8.2JC

CN55 CN56

FW51

C61

0.1MY

D61

10E2-FD

1SR35-400A

D62

C62

0.1MY

C63

0.1MY

D63

10E2-FD

C65

3300/35

C66

1000/35

R73

22K

Q71

KTA1046/Y/

D74

MTZ33JC

C72

22/50

D73

1SR35-400A

C70

220/50

TH71

QAD0095-4R7

D71

1SR35-400A

D72

1SR35-400A

D53

1SR35-400A

C51

0.0047/100

C52

1000/25

D57

1SS133

RY1

QSK0098-001

Q53

KRC105M

Q52

KTD863/Y/

R53

6.8

C54

470/16

C 2-4 D E

C44

470/16

PW20

PW17

PW28

PW29

PW40

PW26

PW18

PW19

PW30

F1

TA1

R1

3.3M

TA2

Q42

KTD863/Y/

F

EP51

Parts are safety assurance parts.

When replacing those parts make sure to use the specified one.

G

SHEET 1/11

H

5

4

3

CN801

C801

D801

30DF2-FC

D803

30DF2-FC

C802

D802

30DF2-FC

D804

30DF2-FC

2

Main & Speaker terminal section

CN703 sheet 8/11

CN701 sheet 7/11 sheet 6/11 sheet 7/11

C816

47/25

D816

MTZ18JC

R816

3.3k

CN721

R811

Q811

2SD2395/EF/

Q812

KTC3200/GL/

D811

R814

10k

FRONT Signal

CENTER Signal

REAR Signal

SUB ROOM Signal

MAIN ROOM

CN702 CN705 sheet 8/11 sheet 6/11 sheet 8/11

CN723

R823

10K

CN706

Parts are safety assurance parts.

When replacing those parts make sure to use the specified one.

CN831 sheet 3/11

R841 100K

R842 82K

R843 100K

R844 100K

R845 82K

RY831

R831

12

D831

1SS133

R833

10

C835

0.022

C834

0.022

R832

12

C846

220P

C847

220P

C839 0.022

ST831

CN813 CN823

R835

12

L844 0.45

B124

L845 0.45

B125

L843 0.45

B123

CN814

CN824

RY871

QSK0109-001

CN881

FW881

R91 470

R92 470

C92

470P

C91

470P

R851

12

C885

0.1

C891

220P

C881

220p

R852

12

C888

0.1

C892

220P

C884

220p

C887

0.1

ST851

C893

220P

C883

220p

S831

J91

FW931 sheet 3/11

C850

4.7/50

D841

MTZ5.1JC

Q830

KRC109M

R864

4.7K

Q831

KRC109M

Q832

KRC109M

D843

1SS133

D844

1SS133

4.7/50

D842

1SS133

4.7/50 4.7/50

D845

1SS133

R867

10K

D846

1SS133

Q833

KRC109M

R865

4.7K

Q834 Q836

KRC109M KRC109M

R866

4.7K

Q835

KRC109M

1

RX-9010VBK

A B C D E F G

SHEET 2/11

2-5

RX-9010VBK

5

4

3

2

1

Audio section

sheet 4/11

CN301

MAIN_STB

MAIN_CLK

MAIN_DAT

SUB_STB

SUB_CLK

SUB_DAT

-15V

+15V

VOL_STB

VOL_CLK

VOL_DAT

CN303

R944 220

R945

R946

R947

R948

R949

220

220

220

220

220

R954

R955

R956

220

220

220 sheet 4/11 SUBV_STB

SUB_PRE

SUB_MUTE

S_MUTE

SW_MUTE sheet 11/11

CN101

220

TUNER_CE

TUNER_CK

R938

R939

TUNER_MUTE

220

220

TUNED

STEREO sheet 11/11

CN102

R999

10K

RDS_ST

RDS_DATA

RDS_CLK

R936

R935

R934

220

220

220

FL991

QQR0590-001

C975

470/6.3

C991

0.0056

C992

0.0056

FL992

QQR0590-001

Q971

2SD2395/EF/

C972

0.0047

R971

12

R973

3.3K

C971

100/25

D971

MTZ10JC

Q951

2SD2395/EF/

C952

0.0047

R951

12

C951

100/25

D951

MTZ13JC

R953

2.2K

R961

12

Q961

KTA1046/Y/

C962

0.0047

C961

100/25

D961

MTZ13JC

R963

2.2K

CN201 sheet 5/11

CN241 sheet 5/11

C985

0.01

R910

22k

R911

4.7K

C904

2.2/50

CN601 sheet 6/11

C994

270P

Q941

2SD2395/EF/

C942

0.0047

C941

100/25

D941

MTZ5.6JC

R941

33

R942

33

R943

2.7K

R921

33

Q921

2SD2395/EF/

C922

0.0047

C921

100/25

D921

MTZ5.6JC

R922

33

R923

2.7K

R915

8.2

R916

8.2

Q931

2SD2395/EF/

C932

0.0047

C931

100/25

D931

MTZ6.2JC

R933

2.7K

R931

R932

R917

10

Q908

KRC105M

R924

10K

CN81

R980

R981

R982

R983

R984

R985

R986

R987

220

220

220

220

220

220

220

220

FW831

CN400

M_CLK

M_COMMAND

M_STATUS

M_CS

M_BUSY

M_RESET

STANDBY_LED

VCR_S/C sheet 2/11 sheet 10/11

R976 4.7K

R978 4.7K

R993 6.2K

R995 13K

R997 15K

1SS133

X901 8MHz

OSD_DAT

OSD_CS

OSD_CLK

M_COMMAND

M_STATUS

M_CLK

M_RESET

M_CS

IC901

MN101C49GHM

C993

100P

D993

1SS133

VIDEO5

SUB_MUTE

SUB_PRE

SUB_RELAY

SUR_RELAY

C_RELAY

F2_RELAY

F1_RELAY

HP_RELAY

SUBV_STB

SUB_DAT

SUB_CLK

SUB_STB

MAIN_DAT

MAIN_CLK

MAIN_STB

VOL_DAT

VOL_CLK

VOL_STB

VIDEO4

VIDEO3

VIDEO2

VIDEO1

F1_RELAY

F2_RELAY

SUB_RELAY

C_RELAY

SUR_RELAY

4/8_IN

CN931

EP901

CN932 sheet 2/11

A B C 2-6 D E F

TUNER Signal

Parts are safety assurance parts.

When replacing those parts make sure to use the specified one.

G

SHEET 3/11

H

RX-9010VBK

5

4

3

2

Audio / V Audio signal input section

R301

2.2k

C301

4.7/50

R305

620

R306

620

IC301

NJM4580DD

C311

C305

0.0018MY

C307

0.0068MY

4.7/50

R307 39k R309 470k

IC301

NJM4580DD

C306 0.0018MY

C308 0.0068MY

R308 39k R310 470k

C312

4.7/50

R333

470

CD-L

R323

470

REC-L

R325

470

PLAY-L

R327

470

CDR.REC-L

R329

470

CDR.PLAY-L

R331

470

R302

2.2k

C302

4.7/50

C333

390p

C325

220p

C327

220p

C329

220p

C321

220p

C323

220p

C331

220p

C334

390p

R334

C326

220p

C328

220p

C330

220p

C332

220p

C322

220p

C324

220p

470

R324

470

R326

470

R328

470

CD-R

REC-R

PLAY-R

R330

470 CDR.REC-R

R332

470 CDR.PLAY-R

J301

J302

J303

C335

22/25

R335

68

C336

22/25

R336

68

C361

4.7/50

IC304

BA15218F

C363

4.7/50

C362

4.7/50

C364

IC304

BA15218F

4.7/50

DVD-LS

DVD-RS

C339

560p

R316

330

CN351

QGB1214K1-16S

R315

330

C1201

22/25

R1201

68

C1202

22/25

R1202

68 sheet 6/11

R371

DVD.F-L

470

R373

TV/DBS-L

470

R375

VCR1.REC-L

470

R377

VCR1.PLAY-L

470

R379

VCR2.REC-L

470

R381

VCR2.PLAY-L

470

R1261

470

C372

220p

C374

220p

C376

220p

C378

220p

C380

220p

C382

220p

C1262

220p

C371

220p

C373

220p

C375

220p

C377

220p

C379

220p

C381

220p

C1261

220p

R372

470

DVD.F-R

R374 470

TV/DBS-R

J371

R376

470

VCR1.REC-R

R378 470

VCR1.PLAY-R

R380

470

VCR2.REC-R

J372

R382 470

VCR2.PLAY-R

J373

R1262

470

2SC3576-JVC-T

Q1249

R1253

1k

2SC3576-JVC-T

Q1247

R1247 1k

R1249 10k

R1251 10k

R1252 10k

R1250

10k

Q1250

2SC3576-JVC-T

Q1248

2SC3576-JVC-T

R1254 1k R1248 1k

IC395

BA15218F

C1243

4.7/50

R1243

100k

R1244

100k

C1245

22/50

Q1245

KRA104M

R1245

SUB.PRE

1k

C1244

4.7/50

IC395

BA15218F

C385 22/25

C391

10/50

R391

5.1k

R393

10k

R395

5.1k

C393

1200p

C395

120p

C394

1200p

C392

R392

10/50

5.1k

R396

5.1k

R394

10k

C396

120p

IC372

BA15218F

IC372

BA15218F

C397

10/50

R397

100k

R398

100k

C398

10/50

USB-L

USB-R

IC371

TC9163AF-X

C386 22/25

C389

560p

C1241

4.7/50

R1241

100k

R1242

100k

C1242

4.7/50

R385

68

R386

68

C1209

560p

CN311

QGB2510K1-14 sheet 3/11

C341

10/50

IC303

BA15218F

C343

10/50

C342

10/50

IC303

BA15218F

C344

10/50

SUB-L

C1221

10/50

IC394

BA15218F

C1223

10/50

R1225

100k

SUB-R

C1222

10/50

IC394

BA15218F

R1226

100k

C1224

10/50

R1229

100k

R1227

68

C1225

47/25 C1227

4.7/50

IC393

TC9459F

R1228

68

C1226

47/25

C1228

4.7/50

R1230

100k

C1229

4.7/50

C1230

4.7/50

C1231

220p

R1231

1k

SUB.MUTE

Q1231

KRA104M

C1232

22/50

R1233

1k

R1235

10k

Q1233

2SC3576-JVC-T

C1233

10/50

R1232

470k

R1236

10k

R1234

1k

Q1234

2SC3576-JVC-T

R1211

68

C1211 22/25

IC392

TC9163AF-X

C1219

560p

C1212 22/25

R1212

68

1

A

CN416

QGA2501F1-06 sheet 10/11

B C

CN371

QGB1214K1-14S sheet 6/11

D E

CN313

QGB2510K1-13 sheet 2/11

F

AUDIO Signal

TUNER Signal

PHONO Signal

REAR Signal

SUB ROOM Signal

MAIN ROOM Signal

Parts are safety assurance parts.

When replacing those parts make sure to use the specified one.

G

SHEET 4/11

2-7

RX-9010VBK

Video / S video signal input section

5

4

3

2

J201

J202

J203

C226

47P

C208 47/16

C209 0.01

R200

75

R201

75

R202

75

R207

330

C201

4.7/50

R208

330

C202

4.7/50

C203

R209

47k

R210

330

470/6.3

C204

4.7/50

R203

75

R204

75

R205

75

R206

75

C205

R211

47k

R212

330

470/6.3

C206

4.7/50

R213

47k

C207

470/6.3

Q200

KTA1267/YG

Q201

KTA1267/YG

IC201

BA7625

MOUT

IN5

IN1

A

VOUT1

IN4 IN2

IN3

D

VOUT2

R216

300

Q202

KRC110M

Q203

KRC107M

CN206

QGA2501F1-02

C211

4.7/50

C212

47/16

IC202

NJM2285V-W

C213

0.01

IN1B

OUT1 IN2B

OUT2

OUT3

CTL3

IN3A IN3B

C219

15p

C220

10p

C231

4.7/50

R231

2.2k

Q207

KTA1267/YG

C215

4.7/50

C214 4.7/50

C216

0.047

IC203

MB90088

YOUT

VOUT

COUT

CS

SIN

SCLK

XD

EXD

L200

22u

CN204

QGB1214K1-08S sheet 10/11 sheet 6/11

2.2

R225

CN200

QGB2510K1-11

OSDCS

OSDDATA

OSDCLK sheet 3/11

J241

J242

J243

R240 75

R241

75

C242

4.7/50

R242 75

R243

C245

75

4.7/50

C269

47P

R266

C268

47P

75

C246

0.047

R244

75

R267

C247

470/6.3

47k

R246

C250

R245

75

75

4.7/50

C276

47P

C275

47P

R274

75

C273

0.047

R273

C274

470/6.3

75

R272

47k

R276

R275

75

75

C277 4.7/50

C271

100P

R268

75

C251

0.047

R269

C252

47k

470/6.3

R247

75

C270

100P

R253

R254

R255

15k

15k

15k

C241 0.047

C244

0.047

C249

0.047

Q240

KTA1267/YG

Q242

KTA1267/YG

IC241 BA7626

Q244

KRC107M

Q246

KRC110M

D240

D241

1SS133

1SS133

CN240

QGB2510K1-12 sheet 3/11

C272

0.047

IC242 BA7625

R271

3.3

C253

10p

CN244

QGA2501F1-04 sheet 10/11

Q241

KTA1267/YG

Q243

KTA1267/YG

Q245

KRC110M

Q247

KRC107M sheet 6/11

CN242

QGB1214K1-10S

Parts are safety assurance parts.

When replacing those parts make sure to use the specified one.

1

A B C 2-8 D E F G

SHEET 5/11

H

RX-9010VBK

VOLUME/ COMPONENT section

5 sheet 1/11

CN480

QJK017-031301

FW481

QUM134-10DGZ4

C1354

100/10V

D1391

1SS133

D1392

1SS133

Q1391

KRA107M

R1391

39k

R1392

39k

C1351

1000p

R1393

100k

C1352

100/10

R1395

100k

R1396

10k

C1353

0.1u

IC387

NJM2406F-X

R1394

27k

R1398

1k

R1399

1.5k

Q1392

KTA1273/Y/-T

R1397

5.6

J1390

4

3 sheet 5/11 sheet 5/11 sheet 9/11

CN243

QGB1214J1-10S

Yin

Cin

Cmoni

Ymoni

AV_VCR

DCS

TEXT

CN205

QGB1214J1-08S

Yin

YOSD

Cin

Cmoni

Ymoni

VIDEO5

VIDEO6

CN501

QGB1214J1-12S

DSP_IN_L

DSP_IN_R

DSP.L

DSP.R

DSP.LS

DSP.RS

DSP.C

DSP.SW

2 sheet 4/11 sheet 4/11

CN381

QGB1214J1-14S

V.SIG.L

V.SIG.R

SUB-L

SUB-R

REAR.SIG.L

REAR.SIG.R

REAR.AMP.L

REAR.AMP.R

S.MUTE

CN361

QGB1214J1-16S

V.SIG.L

V.SIG.R

SUB-L

SUB-R

FRONT-L

FRONT-R

DVD-LS

DVD-RS

STB

CLK

DATA

VOL_STB

VOL_CLK

VOL_DATA

1

DSP_IN_L

DSP_IN_R

R1355

2.2k

FRONT-L

R1357

3.9k

R1358

3.9k

R1356

2.2k

FRONT-R

A

J1360

R1361

560

C1363

4.7/50

IC386

BA15218F

C1365

4.7/50

DVD-C

R1362

560

C1364

4.7/50

C1366

DVD-SW

IC386

BA15218F

4.7/50

J1340

B C

Q1343

KRA104M

C1301

47/25

IC380

TC9162AN

C1302

47/25

J1370

J1371

J1372

D

R1370

R1371

470

220

R1372 100

R1373 220

R1375

R1374

220

220

D1370

MA3062/H/-X

R1347

470

R1348

10k

R1351

68

IC385

BA15218F

C1344 47/25

R1345

470

R1346

10k

R1350

68

C1342

IC385

BA15218F

4.7/50

R1343

18k

C1343

47/25

C1341

R1341

100k

4.7/50

C1303

220p

R1305

68

R1306

68

E

IC381

TC9459F

R1312

100k

C1380

47/25

S.MUTE

C1281

R1281

4.7k

100/10

IC390

MAX4018ESD

R1282

4.7k

R1283

1k

C1282

470/10

R1284

1.1k

C1283

47/25

R1285

4.7k

IC390

MAX4018ESD

R1286

4.7k

R1287

1k

C1284

100/10

R1288

1.1k

C1285

47/25

R1289

4.7k

IC390

MAX4018ESD

R1290

4.7k

R1291

1k

C1286

100/10

R1292

1.1k

C1381

47P

R1379 75

C1384

47/25

C1382

47P

R1380 75

C1385

4.7/50

C1383

47P

R1381 75

C1386

4.7/50

C1387

47P

R1382 75

C1390

47/25

C1388

47P

R1383 75

C1391

4.7/50

C1389

47P

R1384 75

C1392

4.7/50

J1380

C1393

100P

C1394

100P

C1395

100P

R1388 47k

C1396

470/6.3

R1389 47k

C1397

100/10

R1390 47k

C1398

100/10

R1307

1k

C1307

47/16

Q1307

KRA104M

R1313

1k

R1315

10k

Q1313

2SC3576-JVC-T

SIG.L

SIG.R

R1314

10k

R1316

1k

Q1314

2SC3576-JVC-T sheet 2/11

R1322

100k

IC382

TC9459F

C1329

220p

CCH

R1323

1k

R1324

10k

R1333

1k

R1335

10k

Q1333

2SC3576-JVC-T

R1334

10k

Q1334

2SC3576-JVC-T

R1336

1k

Q1323

2SC3576-JVC-T

C1335

10/50

C1336

10/50

IC384

BA15218F

C1337

10/50

C1338

IC384

10/50

BA15218F

REAR.SIG.L

REAR.SIG.R

sheet 8/11

R1321

100k

R1332

100k

SIG.C

REAR.AMP.L

REAR.AMP.R

C1339

220p sheet 2/11

IC383

TC9459F

R1331

100k

Parts are safety assurance parts.

When replacing those parts make sure to use the specified one.

F

FRONT Signal

CENTER Signal

REAR Signal

MAIN ROOM Signal

SUB ROOM Signal

MAIN ROOM

G

SHEET 6/11

2-9

5

Audio amplifier section (1/2)

RX-9010VBK

R705

2K

R707

2K

Q707

KTA1268/GL

D701

1SS133

R701 C701

2.2K 10/35

C703

100P

R703

100K

C705

100P

Q701

2SC2240-BL/AB

Q703

2SC2240-BL/AB

R709

9.1K

C713

68P

C715

68P

C709 10P

R715

100K

R711

620

C707

100/16

R761

10

C751

47P

D771

1SS133

R771

390

R775

200

VR787

500

R783

620

Q781

2SD637( Q.R)

R781

390

R789

470

R777

200

R773

390

D773

1SS133

R763

10

C753

47P

Q761

R779

0.22( 7W)

Q791

KTA1268/GL/

C795

0.022

R795

1K

R787

47K

Q763

R791

33

L791

1

R793

10

C791

0.047

C793

0.047

4

3

2

R706

2K

R708

2K

Q708

KTA1268/GL

D702

1SS133

R702

C702

2.2K 10/35

C704

100P

R704

100K

C706

100P

Q702

2SC2240-BL/AB

Q704

2SC2240-BL/AB

R710

9.1K

C714

68P

C716

68P C710

10P

R716

100K

R712

620

C708

100/16 sheet 2/11

VR788

500

R784

620

Q782

2SD637( Q.R)

R782

390

R790

470

R762

10

C752

47P

D772

1SS133

R772

390

R776

200

R778

200

R774

390

D774

1SS133

R764

10

C754

47P

Q762

R780

0.22( 7W)

Q792

KTA1268/GL/

C796

0.022

R796

1K

R788

47K

Q764

R792

33

L792

1

R794

10

C792

0.047

C794

0.047

CN711

1

A B C 2-10 D E

CN712 sheet 2/11

F

FRONT Signal

Parts are safety assurance parts.

When replacing those parts make sure to use the specified one.

G

SHEET 7/11

H

RX-9010VBK

5

4

Audio amplifier section (2/2)

sheet 6/11

R1701

2.2K

C1701

1/50

D1701

1SS133

R1702

68K

R1721

220

R1712

56K

C1705

5P

C1711

33P

R1724

3.3k

C1743

47/100

R1741

220

R1751

10

C1751

47P

R1771

R1753

0.22

R1752

10

R1795

47K

R1761

33

L1761

0.45u

R1762

10

C1761

0.047

C1762

0.047

C1741

47/100 sheet 2/11

3

2

D1801

C1801

1/50

C1805

Q1801

2SC2240( A,B)

R1813

56K

C1809

5P

R1811

330

C1807

100/16

R1821

220

C1815

2.2/50

Q1805

KTA1268/GL/

C1811

33P

C1813

0.01MY

R1825

3.3k

R1827

3.3k

R1829

3.3k

C1817

47/50

C1843

47/100

R1851

10

C1851

47P

Q1851

2SD2390/OPY/-F6

R1895

47K

R1853

10

R1875

200

R1877

200

Q1853

2SB1560/OPY/-F6

R1855

0.22

C1891

0.022

R1891

1K

R1893

18K

R1861

33

L1861

0.45u

R1863

10

C1861

0.047

C1863

0.047

C1841

47/100 sheet 2/11

1

A B C D

CENTER Signal

REAR/ SUB ROOM Signal

Parts are safety assurance parts.

When replacing those parts make sure to use the specified one.

R1802 C1802

2.2K

1/50

D1802

1SS133

R1804

68K

R1810

12K

C1816

2.2/50

C1812

33P

R1822

220

Q1806

KTA1268/GL/

R1814

56K

C1810

5P

R1812

330

C1808

100/16

R1826

3.3k

C1818

47/50

C1844

47/100

R1842

220

D1872

1SS133

R1852

10

C1852

47P

Q1852

2SD2390/OPY/-F6

D1874

1SS133

R1854

10

R1876

200

R1878

200

C1854

47p

R1856

0.22

C1892

0.022

R1892

1K

D1892

1SS133

R1896

47K

R1862

33

L1862

0.45u

R1864

10

C1862

0.047

C1864

0.047

sheet 2/11

E F G

SHEET 8/11

2-11

RX-9010VBK

5

4

3

2

1

DSP section

LIN

R2001

100K

C2001

4.7/25

R2003

10K

C2003

0.0012

R2005

10K

R2007

10K

C2005

120P

IC521

BA15218F

C2009

0.1

C2010

0.1

R2009

10K

R2011

22K

C2007

390P

C2013

33P

R2013

22K

IC522

BA15218F

C2019

C2020

0.1

0.1

C2018

47/6.3

R2022 330

R2021

R2018

4.7K

R2017

4.7K

330

Q2201

2SD1328/ST

Q2202

2SD1328/ST

Q2301

2SD1328/ST

Q2302

2SD1328/ST

Q2401

2SD1328/ST

Q2101

2SD1328/ST

R2002

100K

RIN

L

R

SL

SR

C

C2002

4.7/25

R2201

10K

R2202

10K

R2301

10K

R2302

10K

R2401

10K

R2101

10K

C2004

0.0012

R2004

10K

IC521

BA15218F

R2006

10K

R2008 10K

C2006 120P

R2010

10K

C2008

390P IC522

BA15218F

R2012

22K

R2014 22K

C2014 33P

R2023 330

R2205

1K

C2201

0.001

C2202

0.001

R2208

100K

R2206

1K

C2208

2.2/50

C2302

0.001

R2306

1K

C2401

0.001

C2207

2.2/50

R2207

100K

R2308

100K

C2308

4.7/25

R2407

100K

C2441

0.1

C2251

0.1

C2237

33P

R2235

33K

R2237

R2233

33K

68K

R2231

33K

IC523

BA15218F

IC523

BA15218F

R2350

30K

C2348

33P

R2238

68K

C2238

33P

C2230

4.7/25

R2232

33K

R2234

33K

R2236

33K

R2305

1K

C2307

4.7/25

C2349 0.1

R2349

30K

IC526

R2351

11k

BA15218F

C2301

0.001

R2307

100K

R2405

1K

C2407

4.7/25

C2347 33P

C2350 0.1

R2024 330

C2261

4.7/25

R2261

100K

R2262

100K

R2263

10k

C2253

0.1

C2254

0.1

R2285

IC524

11k

BA15218F

C2283

R2283

C2255

0.1

33P

10k

0.1

C2256

C2262

4.7/25

R2264

10K

IC524

BA15218F

R2286

11k

IC525

BA15218F

R2284

10k

C2284

33P

R2353 C2351

2.2K

1/50

R2355

10k

Q2363

2SD1328/ST

C2353

33P

R2357

22k

C2355

0.1

IC527

BA15218F

R2359

10K

C2356

0.1

R2363

100K

C2357

4.7/25

IC525

BA15218F

R2275

6.8k

R2273

10K

Q2273

2SD1328/ST

R2274

10K

Q2274

2SD1328/ST

R2276

6.8k

C2257

2.2/50

R2257

100K

R2258

100K

C2258

2.2/50

IC526

BA15218F

Q2364

2SD1328/ST

R2356 10k

R2354

2.2K

C2352

1/50

R2364

100K

R2352

11k

R2358

22K

C2354

33P

IC527

BA15218F

R2360

10K

R2128

22K

C2135

10/16

R2132

10K

Q2163

2SD1328/ST

Q2165

2SD1328/ST

R2135

C2138

4.7/25

2.2K

R2136

10K

C2358

4.7/25

R2425

10K

Q2155

DTA114YE

Q2156

DTA114YE

Q2157

DTA114YE

C2439

0.1

C2440

0.1

C2433

33P

R2433

82K

IC529

BA15218F

R2429

10K

Q2431

2SD1328/ST

C2427

2.2/50

R2427

100K

C2101

0.01

SUBWFR R2105

1K

C2107

4.7/25

C2442

0.1

IC528

R2127

BA15218F

22K

Q2164

2SD1328/ST

IC528

BA15218F

R2158

30k

C2158 33P

C2157

2.2/50

R2181

1M

R2182

1M

R2183

1M

R2184

1M

R2189

22K

C2189

33P

Q2151

DTA114YE

Q2152

DTA114YE

Q2153

DTA114YE

Q2154

DTA114YE

IC529

BA15218F

R2137

10K

R2187

100K

C2187

2.2/50

C2481

47/6.3

R2485

1K

LIN-

LIN+

RIN+

RIN-

LOUT1

ROUT1

LOUT2

ROUT2

LOUT3

ROUT3

C2712

0.1

C2710

47/6.3

IC571

AK4527BVQ

C573

0.1

R2597

1K

IC582

TC7SET32FU

Q572

DTC114YE

TEST

IC581 uPD784215AGC152

C571

0.01

C577

100P

R577

8.2K

R573

4.3K

R2715

4.3K

C2703

47/6.3

CDTI

CCLK

C_CS

C2704

47/6.3

C2705

0.1

C2706

0.1

R2718

220

DZF

TP607

DSP_RST

SCK

D7

C2518

C2519

C2503

C2521

R2614

47K

R2615

47K

R2616

47K

TPMODD

TPMODC

TPMODB

TPMODA

TPTDO

TPTDI

TPTCK

TPTMS

R2517

10K

R2613

47k

C2529

100/4

C2523

0.1

MOSI

MISO

IC503

TC7S04FU

R570

10K

R2502

Tx

Rx

R2582

R2583

R2584

R2585

R2586

220 SS

220

220

HREQ

SCK

220

220

MOSI

MISO

R574

R575

R576

4.3K

4.3K

4.3K

DSPREADY

DSPCLK

DSPCOMMAND

C579

100P

Q570

DTC114YE

DSPSTATUS

CN588

IC501

XCA56367PV150

C2504 C2505

C2533

0.1

IC505

PQ070XZ1HZ

LC503

NQR0322-001

LC551

NQR0322-001

C2553

100/4

%PD/DIR%

C2555

0.1

C2551

27P

C2556

0.1

X2551

11.2896MHz

C2552

27P

R2551

18k

RX1

RX2

RX3

RX4

C2557

33P

IC551

AK4112AVF

CDTO

CDTI

CCLK

D_CS

R2557

R2555

R2554

220

DAUX

BCK

DATA

220

220

LRCK

ERR

FS96

R2553

220

AUTO

R2560 220

C2560

0.1

UN560

GP1FA550TZ

TP_RX1

RX1

R2561 1.1K

C2561

0.1

R2571 5.1K

TP_RX2

RX2

R2562 1.1K

C2562

0.1

R2572 5.1K

TP_RX3

RX3

R2563 1.1K

C2563

0.1

TP_RX4

R2573 5.1K

K2606

NQR0269-004

RX4

R2568 C2568

220 1.0/50

B584

K2607

NQR0269-004

C2605 0.1

UN561

GP1FA550RZ

UN562

GP1FA550RZ

UN563

GP1FA550RZ

J564

C2602

0.1

EP561

E409182-001SM A0

CE

READ

WRITE

R2504

C2511

R2505

IC502

TC7S04FU

R2501 1M

C2510

C2508

R2514

10K

C2501

0.01

R2503

C2507

C2506

TPHAD0

TPHAD1

TPHAD2

TPHAD3

TPHAD4

X2501

12.5MHz

A6

A5

A4

A3

A16

A14

A12

A7

A2

A1

A0

D0

D1

D2

LC502

NQR0322-001

C2532

100/4

IC511

W24L010AJ-12

A15

D6

D5

D4

D3

WRITE

A13

A8

A9

A11

READ

A10

CE

D7

C2536

0.1

AUDIO Signal

FRONT Signal

CENTER Signal

REAR Signal

A B

CN581

QGB1214K3-12W sheet 6/11

C581

10/16

C582

10/16

C583

47/6.3

C584

0.1

C 2-12

X581

6.14MHz

D

IC583

PQ3DZ53

E

C587

0.1

C589 C590

0.1

100/4

C588

47/6.3

CN587

QGB2510K1-07 sheet 3/11

F G

SHEET 9/11

H

RX-9010VBK

5

System control

& FL display section

C400

4.7/50

C409

4.7/50

4

3

2

CN412

QGF1205F1-08 sheet 5/11 sheet 5/11 sheet 4/11 sheet 1/11

IC411

NJU7241F33

J401

QNZ0541-001

NQR0201-018X

K451

K452

K453

K454

C443

100/10

C432

22p

X410 QAX0320-001Z

C433

1M

22p

R474

IC410 PCM2702E-X

C435

C436

R475

R476

R477

0.1

0.1

22

22

22

C444

330p

0.1

0.1

C437

C438

C442

100/10

10/16

C441

0.1

C440

K456

NQR0201-018X

J400 C464

R471

47p

75

C456

0.1

C461

220p

C462

220p

C430

R470

75

C463

47p

R495

1k

CN406

WJP0031-001A

R472 75

C465 47p

C431

0.022

1

A

S480

S481

S482

S483

B

CN430

QGA2501C1-03

CN420

QJK025-031301

C

C410

4.7/50

DI400

QLF0084-001

S20

S21

S22

S23

S24

S25

S26

S27

S28

S29

S30

S31

S32

S33

S34

S35

S36

VPP

S13

S14

S15

S16

S17

S18

S19

IC400

MN101C35DHL1

C412

100/6.3

C407

1.5

QAX0246-001Z

X400

Q402

DTC114TKA

Q404

R443

1k

G14

G15

G16

G17

M_CLK

M_COMMAND

M_STATUS

VCRI

DCSI

JOG1

RM

M_CS

M_BUSY

VCRO

DCSO

BASS_LED

DIRECT_LED

DSP_LED

M_RESET

G1

G17

Q407

DTC114YKA

Q408

DTC114YKA

R444

JS400

QSW0898-001

IC404

GP1U281X

R458

10k

C404

0.022

LED_DATA

LED_CLK

LED_LCK

C408

0.022

C401

0.1

C402

0.1

IC402

BU2092

D405

DTC114YKA

1SS133

R479 180

FM_AM_LED

USB_LED

TAPE_LED

CDR_LED

PHONE_LED

CD_LED

D410

SLR-342VC

D411

SLR-342VC

D412

SLR-342VC

D413

SLR-342VC

D414

SLR-342VC

D415

SLR-342VC

TV_DBS_LED

VIDEO_LED

VCR2_LED

VCR1_LED

D416

SLR-342VC

D417

SLR-342VC

D418

SLR-342VC

D419

SLR-342VC

DVD_MULTI_LED

DVD_LED

D420

SLR-342VC

D421

SLR-342VC

M_CLK R459

M_STATUS

M_CS

M_BUSY

M_RESET

R461

R462

R463

R464

CN410

QGF1205F1-10

220

220

220

220

220

220 sheet 2/11

DSP_LED

SURROUND_LED

S400

S401

S402

S403

S404

S405

S406

S407

S408

S409

S410

S411

S412

S413

S414

S415

S416

S417

S418

S419

S420

S421

S422

S423

S424

S425

S426

S427

S428

S429

S430

S431

B400

B401

B402

B403

B407

B408

B409

B404

B405

B406

CN422

QJK025-041201

CN432

QGA2501C1-04

S490

S491

D E F G

SHEET 10/11

2-13

RX-9010VBK

3

2

5

Tuner section

4

1

A B C 2-14 D

CN101 sheet 3/11

E

FM/TUNER Signal

AM Signal

F

Parts are safety assurance parts.

When replacing those parts make sure to use the specified one.

G

SHEET 11/11

H

4

3

2

1

5

Printed curcuit boards

Main board

CN82

CN491

Q825

Q823

B308

R823

Q824

R825

R826

B205

D851

ST851

C886

B211

R885

C885

C891

C892

R852

R888

C890

C888

C889

C893

R887

R851

RY851

RY852

FW931

C838

C844

B711

B111

C848

B433

C847

R837

C843

B115

B511

RY833

R835

C837

D835

B112

B241

B521

B522

B523

B528

B529

B530

B531

B524

B525

B526

B527

S831

B117

B434

R832

ST831

B116

R860

C853 B118

R863

D832

C842

C836

C846

R834

CN823

C845 C841

R833

B512

B712

RY831

B114 R855

R831

R866

D841

C850

D846

D831

B120

Q836

D845

Q833 Q834

R856

C852

D843

B119

Q832

R861

Q831

R864

R857

D842

C851

Q830

R858

CN72

C802

R871

D804

D802

B302

B303

R802

CN831

EP801

C808

RY871

CN881

CN813

CN723

B309

CN814

B851

B755

B425

B756

B202

CN721

B305

B204

R816

B504

D816

C816

B801

B802

B803

B804

B901

B701

B704

B757

B758

B904

B306

B307

B753

C805

C801

CN801

B421

B301

C820

B102

R820

C807

R801

D803

D801

B501

R811

R812

C811

Q811

D811

Q812

R814

R813

B311

B312

A B C D E F G

RX-9010VBK

2-15

RX-9010VBK

5

4

3

2

1

Micon board

PW25

PW27

PW24

PW19

TA1

PW21

PW26

PW30

TA2

VS1

FC5

PW18 PW17 PW20

FC1

EP1

FC6

FC2

R1

PW22

PW23

R55

FW51

C66

B3234

B3334

CN71

R73

C73

B3237

B3130

B3238

B3236

Q71

C69

R72

Q74

D75

C74

C62

D62

D64

C65

TH71

B3233

B3235

HS51

C71

C72

D74

C63

C70

D71

D73

B3230

D72

RY1

D61

D57

Q42

R44

C45

D46

C44

D63

Q52

R54

C55

D56

C61

Q61

B3231

Q53

B3430

C54

B3331

B3127

R53

B3126

CN402

Q51

C53

B3128

D55

PW40

T2

B3122

PW28

C1

B3123

PW29

R92

FW881

C92

C91

R91

CN932

B3115

B3221

J91

EP91

B3114

CN931

R931

R933

B3113

R932

C932

Q931

B3751

D931

C931

B3320

B3601

R940

C994

D900

D905

D902

R941

R942

R943

R925

B3131

B3219

R929

R917

R926

R927

R928

B3319

HS941

HS921

C942

D941

C941

Q941

B3111

R978

R921

R922

R923

Q921

C922

D921

C921

R993

R998

R996

R994

R979

R976

R995

B3132

R997

D979

B3307

B3308

B3309

B3310

B3311

B3516

D978

D977

D976

D975

Q908 FW831 B3206

B3402

C903

B3703

B3417

R965

R966

R967

R968

R969

B3418

R975

B3501

B3502

B3503

B3504

B3505

R944

B3408

B3409

B3410

B3411

B3412

B3413

B3414

B3415

B3416

B3305

B3306

B3207

B3208

B3209

B3704

R954

R955

R956

IC901

PW911

R908

D993

CN55

CN56

D67

CN811

C975

R935

R939

RY63

RY62

FL991

FL992

D961

C961

D951

C951

B3191

R61

B3192

FC61

FC63

PW901

B3203

C902

B3103

C905

IC903

Q901

R910

X901

D904

C904

B3301

R911

R981

R982

R980

R985

R986

R983

R987

122

FC62

121

134

FC64

133

C981

EP901

C982

B3117

R999

C983

B3118

Q971

C971

Q961

Q951

131

132

113

112

111

123

D971

R961

R963

A B C 2-16 D E F G H

Front board

5

4

3

B1118

D422

CN420

S400

K452

J401

K451

B1264

C454

R469

C431

R471

J400

D423

B1114

R472

C465

B1115

R485

R402

B1108

K455

B1413

Q403

Q402

R457

C461 C462

B1120

R478

R407

B1313

C441

K456

B1103

B1104

C438

X410

R474

C437

C442

C439

C440

R477

S419

R476

D414

B1204

S408

R473

IC410

C436

B1252

R475

R408

B1310

D421

B1311

R411

S410

R410 R406

S406

C407

C412

B1253

B1254

R404 B1415

B1255

CN412

R415

S415

R419

R417

S417

D413

R409

B1116

S409

D420

D415

Q408

B1408

S412

D419

B1906

RA400

Q407

B1903

IC400

RA401

S423

R423

D412

R418 S418

D411

R420

S420

D410

S413

R413

D418

R414

S414

D417

R443 R444

B1307

X400

R452

B410

B1224

B1101

S416

D416

B1216

B1217

B1218

B1221

B1219

B1220

B1223

B1305

B1306

B1222

R424

R425

S424

S425

S431

S421

S426

R426

R422

S422

RA402

DI400

B1902

IC402

B1228

RA403

B1314

B1315

B1227

IC404

S427

D480

S491

R491

D491

S490

R490

D490

S480

R480

Q412 Q410 Q411

R466

R465

JS400

R453

B409

B408

R440

R442

B407

R441

B405

B404

R428 R429

B406 B400

R438 B401

R437 B402

R436

B403

R432

R433

R434

R435

R430

S428 S429 S430

S481

R481

S482

R482

S483

R483

2

RX-9010VBK

1

A B C D E F G 2-17

RX-9010VBK

5

4

3

2

1

Input board (Reverse side)

R385

R1211 R1227

R1225

IC394

R1223

R1224

C371

C372

C1231

R390 R389 R388

R387

C1227

CN416

R1241

IC395

R1243

R1226

C373

C374

R1242

R1228

IC393

R391 R393

C1228

R1230

C395

R395

R396

IC392

R1244

R392

R394

C396

IC371

C382

R1250

R1249

R1251

Q1249

R1261 C1261

R1252

Q1250

R1262

C1262

R1245

C1245

Q1245

Q1247

C389

C1219

R381

C376 C377 C378

IC381

R1304

C1365

C1366

R1364

J1360

C1362

C1303 R1303

IC386

R1365

R1366

R1363

C1361

C1319

IC380

R1312

R1311

R1301

R1302

C1305

C1306

R1305

R1306

R1314

R1316

R1313

R1315

R345 IC303

R346

C260

C261

C259

C258

C253

CN244

R285

IC242

R284

C257

C256

R271

D240

D241

IC241

IC382

C1329

C333

IC304

R361

R363

R362

R364

C363

C364

CN731

C334

R1322

R1321

J301

R1324

IC302

J302

C309

C310

C325

C339

IC301

C326

IC391

R309

R310

C329

J303

R311

R312

C1209

C330

R242

R245 C249

R241

R272

C273

C277

R231

Q207

C231

J242 R275 C270 J243

J241

C213

IC202

C212

IC201

CN206

C210

C216

C215

C214

IC203

C219

X200

C220

D201

R222

R223

R225

D200

R224

R1339

CN732

R1340

C1339

IC384

R1332

R1334

R1336

R1331

IC383

J201

R214

C208

J202

C209

R217

R215

J203

R1283

R1284

C1281

R1293

IC388

R1294

R1349

R1345

Q1343

R1344

R1346

R1348

Q1341

IC385

R1342 R1343

Q1342

J1340

C1381

R1379

J1380

C1284

IC390

R1288

R1287

C1382

R1380

C1283

C1383

R1381

R1292

R1291

C1285

IC389

R1374

C1370

J1370 R1370

R1373

FW481

CN480

D1392

D1391

R1395

C1354

J1371

D1370

R1375

R1398

R1399

Q1392

C1353

C1352

R1394

R1391

C1351

J1372 J1390

A B C 2-18 D E F G H

5

Input board (Forward side)

D240

D241

R271

IC241

C256

C257

C277

J243

4

3

CN244

C259

C258

C260

C261

IC242

J242

D200

R225

D201

X200

C220 C219

C216

C210

C215

C214

CN206

C213

Q207

C231

C212

IC201

C209

J203

C208

J202 J201

J241

2

CN480

FW481

D1392

D1391

C1353

C1352

Q1392

J1390

C1354

J1372

J1371 J1370

C1285

C1281

C1283 C1284

Q1343

Q1341

J1380

Q1342

J1340

1

CN732

CN731

CN416

J303

IC301

J302

C363

C364

J301

C1245

Q1245

Q1248

Q1250

Q1247

Q1249

J373

R1305

C1305

R1306

C1306

R1227

R385

R1211

R1228

J372

R1301

R1302

IC380

C1365

C1366

J1360

J371

A B C D E F G

RX-9010VBK

2-19

RX-9010VBK

Power board

5

4

3

2

1

R1831

B2131

D1871

R1875

R1873

B2501

B2425

R1823

B2130

C1843

C1817

C1861

L1861

B2221

C1895

C1809

B2807

R1861

R1863

C1863

B2220

R1813

R1811

C1807

R1809

B2502

R1805

C1805

D1801

R1803

C1801

CN715

B2120

R1703

C1703

D1701

CN713

B2421

B2301

C1762

R1762

R1761

C1761

R1773

Q1771

D1771

C1741

L1761

R1725

R1724

C1705

R1712 B2303

B2302

R1772

R1701

CN722

C1802

D1802

C1806

R1806

B2140

R1810

C1808

B2506

R1814

B2225

C1864

CN716

C1862

R1864 Q1872

R1876

D1872

R1862

B2809

C1810 B2226

C1896

L1862

C1818

C1844

R1824 B2430

B2505

R1874

B2141

R1731

R1832

C795

VR787

B2204

B2106

Q791

C717

B2319

B2203

B2206

C719

R797

D791

R791

L791

B2801

Q771

R723

Q705

R793

C791 C793

B2201

C721

R715

C709

R711

R709

CN711

R733

R703

C701

R775

C705

D701

VR788

C796

B2213

B2115

Q792

C718

B2320

B2212

B2215

C720

R798

D792

R792

L792

B2803

C792

R794

C794

R776

Q772

R724

Q706

B2210

C722

R716

C710

R712

CN712

R710

R734

R704

C706

D702

C702

A B C 2-20 D

DSP board

R2564

C2564

K2606

R2560

TPRX3

R2501

C2507

Reverse side

C2006

R2004

C2002

R2355

R2003

C2005

C2001

E

UN562

UN563

Q572

R2504

CN588

R582

R2514

TPPB14

C2509

R2593

R2591

R573

C571

B583

Q570

R2596

R2594

R2595

R2589

R2587

CN587

TPTDI

TPTCK

TPTMS

IC503

C2523

R2616

R2517

R2615

TPTDO

R2614

R2613

TPMODB

TPMODA

TPMODC

TPMODD

C588

C2520

C583

CN581

C2557

R2551

IC551

R2555

R2554

R2557

Forward side

C2481

R2138

R2127

C2133

R2360

R2433

C2433

R2429

R2358

C2354

C2134

R2139

C2710

C2258

R2359

R2357

C2353

R2137

R2189

C2189

C2138 C2137

R2140

C2356

R2352

R2350

C2135 C2407

C2348

R2159

R2157

C2107

R2158

C2158

R2105

C2308

R2405 R2407

R2306

IC527

C2355

R2351

R2349 C2347

R2305

C2307

C2208

C2257

IC525

R2284

C2284

R2286

R2264

C2262

IC524

R2283

R2275

C2283 R2285 R2263

C2261

R2262

R2234

R2232

IC523

R2233

R2237

C2237

R2221

R2238

C2238

R2222

F G H

RX-9010VBK

Tuner board

5

4

3

2

1

A

AT101

[DOM]

E Q112

B

B105

D124

D125

C107

B198

[DOM]

B173

B123

L111

C117

C158

C157

E

Q111

C118

B180

R146

B

C168

C138

C133

C136

C135

C161

R109

R108

B197

E

B

Q103

B

E

C105

R107

R105

R103

B192

B195

B194

R119

B189

B134

B135

B151

R129

B193

CF103

C162

R157

C137

C139

B188

C186

B133

B122

B121

B186

R145

R162

C185

R161

R141

X121

C128

R133

R127

R128

R130

B113

B112

B111

X191

R191

C194

R192

B C D

2-21

PARTS LIST

[ RX-9010VBK ]

* All printed circuit boards and its assemblies are not available as service parts.

Area suffix

J ----------------------------- U.S.A.

RX-9010VBK

- Contents -

Exploded view of general assembly and parts list

Electrical parts list

Packing materials and accessories parts list

3- 3

3- 5

3-22

3-1

RX-9010VBK

< M E M O >

3-2

4

3

2

1

5

RX-9010VBK

Exploded view of general assembly and parts list

Block No.

M 1 M M

72

Power trans board

66

71

Power trans

board

49

47

67

49

70

3

8

5 power switch

board

13

6

16

2

1

73

19

25

65

77

26 24

46

Power supply

board

67

46

Relay board

39

41

37

48

69

78

Speaker

board

I/O board

Power/Fuse board

DSP board

42

38

39

Center board

32

41

38

Front

board (L)

33

Main board

33

40

33

33

Front

board (R)

Rear

board (L)

Rear

board (R)

33

S Video

board

45

71

63

64

44

74

Video

board

V A udio input

board

75

51

52

50

60

61

59

58

57

51

56

55

60

53

62

51

54

Audio input

board

Audio

board

21

34

35

42

45

43

28

27

28

28

27

Tuner board

7

15

36

73

Front key &

System

control board

12

9

17

18

14

11

Switch board

22

23

20

29

68

4

76

31

30

31

A B

10

C D E F G

3-3

QZF6018-001

E47227-036

QYSBST3010Z

LV20984-002A

E73525-003SS

LV42098-001A

QYSBST3006Z

LV32433-001A

LV32434-001A

QYSBSG3008Z

QYSBSG3006Z

QYSBSG3006Z

QYSBST3006Z

QYSBSG3006Z

E65923-003

LV30225-0B2A

QYSBSG3006Z

QYSBSG3006Z

QYSBSG3006Z

QQT0325-001

LV42096-001A

LV20951-001A

LV20940-001A

LV20944-001A

LV20942-001A

LV32486-001A

LV42095-002A

QYSBSF2610Z

QYSBSF2610Z

QYSBSF2610Z

QUQ412-0815CJ

QUQ412-1030CJ

QYSDSG3006Z

QYSBSG3006Z

LV10019-003A

EXO150010H09S11

LV10471-002A

QYSDSG3006Z

LV42094-002A

QYSBSG3006Z

VKZ4150-001

E68587-223SM

QYSBST3006Z

A

A

Parts list (General assembly)

Item

1

Parts number

LV10469-007A

Parts name

FRONT PANEL

2

3

VJD5429-001SS

LV20950-004A

JVC MARK

LENS

4

5

LV10470-001A

LV20939-001A

SUB PANEL

PUSH BUTTON

A

38

39

40

41

34

35

36

37

29

30

31

32

33

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

6

7

8

9

10

FOOT

FOOT

T.SCREW

HEAT SINK

SCREW

C.B BKT

T.SCREW

H.S BRACKET(R)

H.S BRACKET(L)

T.SCREW

T.SCREW

T.SCREW

T.SCREW

T.SCREW

TAPPING SCREW

SPACER

T.SCREW

T.SCREW

T.SCREW

POWER TRANS.

INDICATOR

PUSH BUTTON

P.BUTTON ASSY

P.BUTTON ASSY

PUSH BUTTON

P.BUTTON ASSY

FL SCREEN

SCREW

SCREW

SCREW

FFC WIRE

FFC WIRE

SCREW

T.SCREW

CHASSIS BASE

FELT SPACER

FRONT BRACKET

SCREW

H.P. BKT

T.SCREW

SPECIAL NUT

CB BKT

T.SCREW

RX-9010VBK

Q'ty Description

1

1

1

1

1 POWER

1 POWER

1 TUNER

1 DOLBY

1 SOURCE

1 SEA

1 LINE STRAIGHT

1 FL

2 FRONT C.B

2

8 FRONT C.B FL

1

1

4 FRONT D

3 FRONT U

1

1 FOR C.BASE

1

7 C.B-F.B

1

1 H.P BKT-F.B

1

3

3 C.B-BKT

2

2

4 FOOT

1

10 TR

1

1

1 PRI/SEC C.B

1 C.B BKT

4 H.S-BKT

2 H.S BKT-F.BKT

2 H.S BKT

4 H.S BKT-CHASSIS

2 M.C.B

1 M.C.B

1

3 H.S-C.B

3 P.C.B

1 C.B-CHASSIS

1

Block No. M1MM

Area

3-4

A

Parts list (Genaral assembly)

Item Parts number

49 QYSDSTL4008Z

Parts name

SPECIAL SCREW

50

51

LV10472-012A

QYSBSGY3008M

REAR PANEL

SPECIAL SCREW

A

A

A

A

QYSBSGY3008M

QYSBSGY3008M

FMYH4004-001

QYSBSGY3008M

QYSBSGY3008M

QYSBSGY3008M

QYSBSGY3008M

QYSBSGY3008M

QYSBSGY3008M

QYSBSGY3008M

E409257-001

QMPD220-200-JD

QZW0033-001

LV20038-009A/S/

QYSBSGY3008M

E406308-003

LV32435-003A

QMF51U1-6R3-J8

QMF51U1-2R0-J8

LV42388-001A

E409394-001

E3400-444

QYSBSG3008E

QYSBSG3008E

LV20952-001A

QYSBSG3006Z

QAU0237-001

64

65

66

67

68

69

57

58

59

60

61

62

63

52

53

54

55

56

75

76

77

78

70

71

72

73

74

SPECIAL SCREW

SPECIAL SCREW

PLASTIC RIVET

SPECIAL SCREW

SPECIAL SCREW

SPECIAL SCREW

SPECIAL SCREW

SPECIAL SCREW

SPECIAL SCREW

SPECIAL SCREW

GND TERMINAL

POWER CORD

STRAIN RELIEF

TOP COVER

SPECIAL SCREW

SPECIAL SCREW

VOL KNOB

FUSE

FUSE

FUSE CAUTION

CAUTION LABEL

FELT SPACER

T.SCREW

T.SCREW

PUSH BUTTON

T.SCREW

RF MODULE UNIT

Q'ty Description

4 P.TRANS

1

3 R.P-C.BASE

1 R.P-ud---

2 TUNER

1 A.INPUT

4 A.INPUT

4 V.INPUT

3 VIDEO

4 S VIDEO

6 DIGITAL

7 COMPONENT

4 SPK C.B

1

1

3

4

1

1

1 BK

1 F1

2 F61 F62

2

1

2 FS400 FS401

3

3

1 RDS/M.ROOM

1

1 RF UNIT

Block No. M1MM

Area

RX-9010VBK

A

A

A

A

A

A

R 816

R 823

R 824

R 825

R 826

R 831

R 832

R 835

R 841

R 842

Q 824

Q 825

R 801

R 802

R 811

R 812

R 813

R 814

R 815

D 804

D 811

D 816

D 825

D 831

D 832

D 835

D 851

D 852

30DF2-FC

MTZJ24C-T2

MTZJ18C-T2

1SS133-T2

1SS133-T2

1SS133-T2

1SS133-T2

1SS133-T2

1SS133-T2

D 871

EP801

1SS133-T2

QNZ0136-001Z

FW931 QUM137-08DGZ4

Q 811

Q 812

Q 823

2SD2395/EF/

KTC3200/GL/-T

KTC3199/GL/-T

KTC3200/GL/-T

KTA1268/GL/-T

QRE141J-104Y

QRE141J-104Y

QRJ146J-150X

QRK126J-332X

QRE141J-473Y

QRE141J-103Y

QRJ146J-120X

QRL022J-332

QRE141J-103Y

QRE141J-134Y

QRE141J-103Y

QRE141J-104Y

QRJ146J-120X

QRJ146J-120X

QRJ146J-120X

QRE141J-104Y

QRE141J-823Y

CN702

CN703

CN705

CN706

CN721

CN723

CN801

CN813

CN814

CN823

CN824

CN831

CN881

D 801

D 802

D 803

C 805

C 807

C 808

C 811

C 816

C 823

C 824

CN 72

CN 82

CN491

CN701

QCE22HP-103

QEZ0462-688

QEZ0462-688

QCF31HZ-472Z

QETN1EM-476Z

QETN1CM-476Z

QETN1EM-106Z

QGB2510K1-11

QGB2510K1-09

QGD2503F1-04

QGB2510J1-14

QGB2510J1-14

QGB2510J1-10

QGB2510J1-12

QGB2510J1-12

QGA2501C1-03

QGA2501C1-04

QJK012-032403

QGA3901C1-04

QGA3901C1-06

QJK015-043004

QJK015-063504

QGD2501C1-04Z

QGD2501C1-03Z

30DF2-FC

30DF2-FC

30DF2-FC

A

Electrical parts list (Main board)

Item Parts number Parts name

C 801

C 802

QCE22HP-103

QCE22HP-103

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

CONNECTOR

CONNECTOR

SOCKET

CONNECTOR

CONNECTOR

CONNECTOR

CONNECTOR

CONNECTOR

3P CONNECTOR

4P CONNECTOR

SKT WIRE ASSY

4P CONNECTOR

6P PLUG ASSY

SKT WIRE ASSY

SKT WIRE ASSY

SOCKET

SOCKET

DIODE

DIODE

DIODE

Block No. 01

Remarks

.010MF +100:-0%

.010MF +100:-0%

.010MF +100:-0%

6800MF

6800MF

4700PF +80:-20%

47MF 20% 25V

47MF 20% 16V

10MF 20% 25V

DIODE

Z DIODE

Z DIODE

SI DIODE

SI DIODE

SI DIODE

SI DIODE

SI DIODE

SI DIODE

SI DIODE

EARTH PLATE

PARA RIBON WIRE

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

UNF C RESISTOR

UNF C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

UNF C RESISTOR

100K 5% 1/4W

100K 5% 1/4W

15 5% 1/4W

3.3K 5% 1/2W

47K 5% 1/4W

10K 5% 1/4W

12 5% 1/4W

UNF OMF RESISTOR 3.3K 5% 1/2W

C RESISTOR 10K 5% 1/4W

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

130K 5% 1/4W

10K 5% 1/4W

100K 5% 1/4W

UNF C RESISTOR

UNF C RESISTOR

UNF C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

12 5% 1/4W

12 5% 1/4W

12 5% 1/4W

100K 5% 1/4W

82K 5% 1/4W

Area

A

Item

RY833

RY851

RY852

RY871

S 831

ST831

ST851

R 843

R 844

R 845

R 851

R 852

R 871

RY831

RY832

Parts number

QRE141J-104Y

QRE141J-104Y

QRE141J-823Y

QRJ146J-120X

QRJ146J-120X

QRJ146J-120X

QSK0109-001

QSK0109-001

QSK0109-001

QSK0109-001

QSK0109-001

QSK0109-001

QSW0509-001

QNB0105-002

QNB0078-001

Parts name

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

UNF C RESISTOR

UNF C RESISTOR

UNF C RESISTOR

RELAY

RELAY

RELAY

RELAY

RELAY

RELAY

SLIDE SW

SPK TERMINAL

SPK TERMINAL

Remarks

100K 5% 1/4W

100K 5% 1/4W

82K 5% 1/4W

12 5% 1/4W

12 5% 1/4W

12 5% 1/4W

Area

3-5

RX-9010VBK

A

Electrical parts list (Front board)

Item Parts number Parts name

BK400 LV42092-001A FL HOLDER(R)

C 441

C 442

C 443

C 444

C 456

CN406

CN410

CN412

CN420

C 423

C 424

C 425

C 430

C 431

C 432

C 433

C 435

C 436

C 437

C 438

C 439

C 440

BK401

C 400

C 401

C 402

C 404

C 406

C 407

C 408

C 409

C 410

C 411

C 412

C 420

C 421

C 422

D 421

D 422

D 423

D 480

D 490

D 491

DI400

IC400

IC402

IC404

CN422

CN430

CN432

D 405

D 410

D 411

D 412

D 413

D 414

D 415

D 416

D 417

D 418

D 419

D 420

NCB31HK-471X

NCB31HK-471X

NCB31HK-471X

NCB31EK-223X

NCB31EK-223X

NCS31HJ-220X

NCS31HJ-220X

NCB31EK-104X

NCB31EK-104X

NCB31EK-104X

NCB31EK-104X

NCB31EK-104X

NCB31EK-104X

QEKC1CM-106Z

QETN1AM-107Z

QETN1AM-107Z

NCS31HJ-331X

NCB31EK-104X

WJP0031-001A

QGF1205F1-10

QGF1205F1-08

QJK025-031301

LV42093-001A

QEKC1HM-475Z

NCB31CK-104X

NCB31CK-104X

NCB31EK-223X

NCB31HK-331X

QCZ0205-155Z

NCB31EK-223X

QEKC1HM-475Z

QEKC1HM-475Z

NCB21AK-225X

QEKC0JM-107Z

NCB31HK-471X

NCB31HK-471X

NCB31HK-471X

QJK025-041201

QGA2501C1-03

QGA2501C1-04

1SS133-T2

SLR-342VC-T

SLR-342VC-T

SLR-342VC-T

SLR-342VC-T

SLR-342VC-T

SLR-342VC-T

SLR-342VC-T

SLR-342VC-T

SLR-342VC-T

SLR-342VC-T

SLR-342VC-T

SLR-342VC-T

SLR-342VC-T

SLR-342VC-T

SLR-342VC-T

SLR-342VC-T

SLR-342VC-T

QLF0084-001

MN101C35DHL1

BU2092

GP1U281X

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C-B WIRE ASSY

CONNECTOR

CONNECTOR

C-B WIRE ASSY

FL HOLDER(L)

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

ML C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

LED

LED

LED

LED

LED

LED

FL TUBE

IC

IC

IC

LED

LED

LED

LED

LED

SIN ID C-B WIRE

3P CONNECTOR

4P CONNECTOR

SI DIODE

LED

LED

LED

LED

LED

LED

Block No. 02

Remarks Area

4.7MF 20% 50V

1.5MF

4.7MF 20% 50V

4.7MF 20% 50V

100MF 20% 6.3V

10MF 20% 16V

100MF 20% 10V

100MF 20% 10V

(LEFT)

(RIGHT)

(FM/AM)

(USB)

(TAPE)

(CDR)

(PHONE)

(CD)

(TV/DBS)

(VIDEO)

(VCR2)

(VCR1)

(DVD MULTI)

(DVD)

(SURROUND)

(DSP)

(STANDBY)

(DIRECT)

(BASS) u-h--

A

Item

R 408

R 409

R 410

R 411

R 412

R 413

R 414

R 415

R 416

Q 410

Q 411

Q 412

Q 413

Q 414

R 400

R 401

R 402

R 403

R 404

R 405

R 406

R 407

IC410

IC411

J 400

J 401

JS400

K 451

K 452

K 453

K 454

K 455

K 456

Q 402

Q 403

Q 404

Q 407

Q 408

R 432

R 433

R 434

R 435

R 436

R 437

R 438

R 439

R 440

R 441

R 417

R 418

R 419

R 420

R 421

R 422

R 423

R 424

R 425

R 426

R 427

R 428

R 429

R 430

R 431

Parts number

DTA114YKA-X

DTA114YKA-X

DTA114YKA-X

DTA114YKA-X

DTA114YKA-X

NRSA63J-102X

NRSA63J-102X

NRSA63J-122X

NRSA63J-102X

NRSA63J-102X

NRSA63J-122X

NRSA63J-152X

NRSA63J-222X

NRSA63J-272X

NRSA63J-392X

NRSA63J-102X

NRSA63J-102X

NRSA63J-122X

NRSA63J-152X

NRSA63J-222X

NRSA63J-272X

NRSA63J-392X

PCM2702E-X

NJU7241F33-X

QND0026-001

QNZ0541-001

QSW0898-001

NQR0201-018X

NQR0201-018X

NQR0201-018X

NQR0201-018X

NQR0201-018X

NQR0201-018X

DTC114TKA-X

DTC144WKA-X

DTC114YKA-X

DTC114YKA-X

DTC114YKA-X

NRSA63J-102X

NRSA63J-102X

NRSA63J-122X

NRSA63J-152X

NRSA63J-222X

NRSA63J-272X

NRSA63J-392X

NRSA63J-102X

NRSA63J-102X

NRSA63J-122X

NRSA63J-152X

NRSA63J-222X

NRSA63J-272X

NRSA63J-392X

NRSA63J-102X

NRSA63J-102X

NRSA63J-122X

NRSA63J-152X

NRSA63J-222X

NRSA63J-102X

NRSA63J-102X

NRSA63J-122X

NRSA63J-152X

NRSA63J-222X

NRSA63J-272X

Parts name

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

IC

IC

S JACK

USB JACK

JOG VOLUME

INDUCTOR

INDUCTOR

INDUCTOR

INDUCTOR

INDUCTOR

INDUCTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

D TRANSISTOR

D TRANSIST

D TRANSIST

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

Remarks

(DIRECT)

(BASS)

(STANBY)

(SURROUND)

(DSP)

Area

3-6

RX-9010VBK

A

Electrical parts list (Front board)

Item Parts number Parts name

R 442

R 443

NRSA63J-392X

NRSA63J-102X

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

S 410

S 411

S 412

S 413

S 414

S 415

S 416

S 417

S 418

S 419

S 401

S 402

S 403

S 404

S 405

S 406

S 407

S 408

S 409

R 472

R 473

R 474

R 475

R 476

R 477

R 479

R 480

R 481

R 482

R 483

R 490

R 491

R 495

S 400

R 462

R 463

R 464

R 465

R 466

R 467

R 468

R 469

R 470

R 471

R 456

R 457

R 458

R 459

R 460

R 461

R 445

R 446

R 447

R 448

R 449

R 450

R 451

R 452

R 453

R 454

R 455

QSW0683-001Z

QSW0683-001Z

QSW0683-001Z

QSW0683-001Z

QSW0683-001Z

QSW0683-001Z

QSW0683-001Z

QSW0683-001Z

QSW0683-001Z

QSW0683-001Z

QSW0683-001Z

QSW0683-001Z

QSW0683-001Z

QSW0683-001Z

QSW0683-001Z

QSW0683-001Z

QSW0683-001Z

QSW0683-001Z

QSW0683-001Z

NRSA63J-750X

NRSA63J-152X

NRSA63J-105X

NRSA63J-220X

NRSA63J-220X

NRSA63J-220X

NRSA63J-181X

NRSA63J-152X

NRSA63J-222X

NRSA63J-272X

NRSA63J-392X

NRSA63J-272X

NRSA63J-392X

NRSA63J-102X

QSW0683-001Z

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63J-471X

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63J-221X

NRSA63J-221X

NRSA63J-221X

NRSA63J-221X

NRSA63J-221X

NRSA63J-221X

NRSA63J-331X

NRSA63J-331X

NRSA63J-221X

NRSA63J-221X

NRSA63J-221X

NRSA63J-750X

NRSA63J-750X

PUSH SWITCH

PUSH SWITCH

PUSH SWITCH

PUSH SWITCH

PUSH SWITCH

PUSH SWITCH

PUSH SWITCH

PUSH SWITCH

PUSH SWITCH

PUSH SWITCH

PUSH SWITCH

PUSH SWITCH

PUSH SWITCH

PUSH SWITCH

PUSH SWITCH

PUSH SWITCH

PUSH SWITCH

PUSH SWITCH

PUSH SWITCH

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

PUSH SWITCH

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

Block No. 02

Remarks Area

(SURROUND)

(DSP MODE)

(INPUT MODE)

(TUNING UP)

(PRESET UP)

(FM MODE)

(MEMORY)

(MIDNIGHT MODE)

(DVD)

(DVD MULTI)

(TUNING DOWN)

(PRESET DOWN)

(VCR1)

(VCR2)

(VIDEO)

(CD)

(TV/DBS)

(CDR)

(USB AUDIO)

(PHONE)

A

Item

S 428

S 429

S 430

S 431

S 480

S 481

S 482

S 483

S 420

S 421

S 422

S 423

S 424

S 425

S 426

S 427

S 490

S 491

X 400

X 410

Parts number

QSW0683-001Z

QSW0683-001Z

QSW0683-001Z

QSW0683-001Z

QSW0683-001Z

QSW0683-001Z

QSW0683-001Z

QSW0683-001Z

QSW0683-001Z

QSW0683-001Z

QSW0683-001Z

QSW0683-001Z

QSW0683-001Z

QSW0683-001Z

QSW0683-001Z

QSW0683-001Z

QSW0683-001Z

QSW0683-001Z

QAX0246-001Z

QAX0320-001Z

Parts name

PUSH SWITCH

PUSH SWITCH

PUSH SWITCH

PUSH SWITCH

PUSH SWITCH

PUSH SWITCH

PUSH SWITCH

PUSH SWITCH

PUSH SWITCH

PUSH SWITCH

PUSH SWITCH

PUSH SWITCH

PUSH SWITCH

PUSH SWITCH

PUSH SWITCH

PUSH SWITCH

PUSH SWITCH

PUSH SWITCH

RESONATOR

CRYSTAL

Remarks

(FM/AM)

(DIGITAL SEA)

(LEVEL ADJUST)

(TAPE/MD)

(DOWN)

(EFECT)

(SETTING)

(MAIN/EON)

(SUB/PTY)

(SUB CTL/TA)

(DIMMER/DISP)

(UP)

(POWER)

(SPK1)

(SPK2)

(SUBWFR)

(DIRECT)

(BASS)

Area

3-7

RX-9010VBK

A

Electrical parts list (Power board)

Item Parts number Parts name

C 701

C 702

QTE1V06-106Z

QTE1V06-106Z

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C1761

C1762

C1791

C1801

C1802

C1803

C1804

C1805

C1806

C1807

C1705

C1711

C1712

C1713

C1715

C1741

C1743

C1751

C1752

C 792

C 793

C 794

C 795

C 796

CN711

CN712

CN713

CN715

CN716

CN722

C1701

C1702

C1703

C1704

C 720

C 741

C 742

C 745

C 746

C 751

C 752

C 753

C 754

C 791

C 714

C 715

C 716

C 717

C 718

C 719

C 703

C 704

C 705

C 706

C 707

C 708

C 709

C 710

C 711

C 712

C 713

QCS31HJ-5R0Z

QCS32HJ-330Z

QFLC1HJ-103Z

QETN1HM-225Z

QETN1HM-476Z

QETN2AM-476Z

QETN2AM-476Z

QCS32HJ-470Z

QCS32HJ-470Z

QFLC1HJ-473Z

QFLC1HJ-473Z

QCF31HZ-223Z

QETN1HM-105Z

QETN1HM-105Z

QCS31HJ-181Z

QCS31HJ-181Z

QCS31HJ-101Z

QCS31HJ-101Z

QETN1CM-107Z

QFLC1HJ-473Z

QFLC1HJ-473Z

QFLC1HJ-473Z

QCF31HZ-223Z

QCF31HZ-223Z

QGB2510K1-14

QGB2510K1-14

QGB2510K1-10

QGB2510K1-12

QGB2510K1-12

QGA2501F1-02

QETN1HM-105Z

QCS31HJ-101Z

QCS31HJ-101Z

QETN1CM-107Z

QCS31HJ-101Z

QCS31HJ-101Z

QCS31HJ-101Z

QCS31HJ-101Z

QETN1CM-107Z

QETN1CM-107Z

QCS31HJ-100Z

QCS31HJ-100Z

QFLC1HJ-103Z

QFLC1HJ-103Z

QCS31HJ-680Z

QCS31HJ-680Z

QCS31HJ-680Z

QCS31HJ-680Z

QCS32HJ-220Z

QCS32HJ-220Z

QFLC1HJ-472Z

QFLC1HJ-472Z

QETN2AM-476Z

QETN2AM-476Z

QETN2AM-476Z

QETN2AM-476Z

QCS32HJ-470Z

QCS32HJ-470Z

QCS32HJ-470Z

QCS32HJ-470Z

QFLC1HJ-473Z

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

M CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

M CAPACITOR

M CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

M CAPACITOR

M CAPACITOR

M CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

CONNECTOR

CONNECTOR

CONNECTOR

CONNECTOR

CONNECTOR

CONNECTOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

M CAPACITOR

M CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

M CAPACITOR

M CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

M CAPACITOR

Block No. 03

Remarks Area

1.0MF 20% 50V

100PF 5% 50V

100PF 5% 50V

100MF 20% 16V

5.0PF 5% 50V

33PF 5% 500V

.010MF 5% 50V

2.2MF 20% 50V

47MF 20% 50V

47MF 20% 100V

47MF 20% 100V

47PF 5% 500V

47PF 5% 500V

.047MF 5% 50V

.047MF 5% 50V

.022MF +80:-20%

1.0MF 20% 50V

1.0MF 20% 50V

180PF 5% 50V

180PF 5% 50V

100PF 5% 50V

100PF 5% 50V

100MF 20% 16V

100PF 5% 50V

100PF 5% 50V

100PF 5% 50V

100PF 5% 50V

100MF 20% 16V

100MF 20% 16V

10PF 5% 50V

10PF 5% 50V

.010MF 5% 50V

.010MF 5% 50V

68PF 5% 50V

68PF 5% 50V

68PF 5% 50V

68PF 5% 50V

22PF 5% 500V

22PF 5% 500V

4700PF 5% 50V

4700PF 5% 50V

47MF 20% 100V

47MF 20% 100V

47MF 20% 100V

47MF 20% 100V

47PF 5% 500V

47PF 5% 500V

47PF 5% 500V

47PF 5% 500V

.047MF 5% 50V

.047MF 5% 50V

.047MF 5% 50V

.047MF 5% 50V

.022MF +80:-20%

.022MF +80:-20%

Parts name

SI DIODE

SI DIODE

SI DIODE

INDUCTOR

INDUCTOR

INDUCTOR

INDUCTOR

INDUCTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

SI DIODE

SI DIODE

SI DIODE

SI DIODE

SI DIODE

SI DIODE

SI DIODE

SI DIODE

SI DIODE

SI DIODE

SI DIODE

SI DIODE

SI DIODE

SI DIODE

SI DIODE

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

M CAPACITOR

M CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

M CAPACITOR

M CAPACITOR

M CAPACITOR

M CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

SI DIODE

SI DIODE

SI DIODE

SI DIODE

Parts number

1SS133-T2

1SS133-T2

1SS133-T2

1SS133-T2

1SS133-T2

1SS133-T2

1SS133-T2

1SS133-T2

1SS133-T2

1SS133-T2

1SS133-T2

1SS133-T2

1SS133-T2

1SS133-T2

1SS133-T2

1SS133-T2

1SS133-T2

1SS133-T2

QQLZ003-1R0

QQLZ003-1R0

QQLZ005-R45

QQLZ005-R45

QQLZ005-R45

2SC2240-BL/AB/T

2SC2240-BL/AB/T

2SC2240-BL/AB/T

2SC2240-BL/AB/T

KTA1268/GL/-T

KTA1268/GL/-T

KTA1268/GL/-T

KTA1268/GL/-T

KTA1268/GL/-T

KTA1268/GL/-T

KTC3200/GL/-T

QETN1CM-107Z

QCS31HJ-5R0Z

QCS31HJ-5R0Z

QCS32HJ-330Z

QCS32HJ-330Z

QFLC1HJ-103Z

QFLC1HJ-103Z

QETN1HM-225Z

QETN1HM-225Z

QETN1HM-476Z

QETN1HM-476Z

QETN2AM-476Z

QETN2AM-476Z

QETN2AM-476Z

QETN2AM-476Z

QCS32HJ-470Z

QCS32HJ-470Z

QCS32HJ-470Z

QCS32HJ-470Z

QFLC1HJ-473Z

QFLC1HJ-473Z

QFLC1HJ-473Z

QFLC1HJ-473Z

QCF31HZ-223Z

QCF31HZ-223Z

1SS133-T2

1SS133-T2

1SS133-T2

1SS133-T2

A

Item

Q 702

Q 703

Q 704

Q 705

Q 706

Q 707

Q 708

Q 709

Q 710

Q 711

D1874

D1891

D1892

L 791

L 792

L1761

L1861

L1862

Q 701

D 771

D 772

D 773

D 774

D 791

D 792

D1701

D1771

D1772

D1791

D1801

D1802

D1871

D1872

D1873

C1861

C1862

C1863

C1864

C1891

C1892

D 701

D 702

D 703

D 704

C1843

C1844

C1851

C1852

C1853

C1854

C1808

C1809

C1810

C1811

C1812

C1813

C1814

C1815

C1816

C1817

C1818

C1841

C1842

Remarks

100MF 20% 16V

5.0PF 5% 50V

5.0PF 5% 50V

33PF 5% 500V

33PF 5% 500V

.010MF 5% 50V

.010MF 5% 50V

2.2MF 20% 50V

2.2MF 20% 50V

47MF 20% 50V

47MF 20% 50V

47MF 20% 100V

47MF 20% 100V

47MF 20% 100V

47MF 20% 100V

47PF 5% 500V

47PF 5% 500V

47PF 5% 500V

47PF 5% 500V

.047MF 5% 50V

.047MF 5% 50V

.047MF 5% 50V

.047MF 5% 50V

.022MF +80:-20%

.022MF +80:-20%

Area

3-8

RX-9010VBK

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

Electrical parts list (Power board)

Item Parts number Parts name

Q 712

Q 761

Q 762

Q 763

Q 764

KTC3200/GL/-T

2SD2560/OPY/-F6

2SD2560/OPY/-F6

2SB1647/OPY/-F6

2SB1647/OPY/-F6

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

Q 771

Q 772

KTC3200/GL/-T

KTC3200/GL/-T

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

Q1832

Q1851

Q1852

Q1853

Q1854

Q1871

Q1872

Q1873

Q1874

Q1771

Q1772

Q1791

Q1801

Q1802

Q1803

Q1804

Q1805

Q1806

Q1831

Q1891

Q1892

R 701

R 702

R 703

R 704

Q 773

Q 774

Q 781

Q 782

Q 791

Q 792

Q1701

Q1702

Q1703

Q1731

Q1751

Q1752

R 716

R 717

R 718

R 719

R 720

R 721

R 722

R 723

R 724

R 725

R 705

R 706

R 707

R 708

R 709

R 710

R 711

R 712

R 715

KTA1268/GL/-T

KTA1268/GL/-T

2SD637/QR/

2SD637/QR/

KTA1268/GL/-T

KTA1268/GL/-T

2SC2240-BL/AB/T

2SC2240-BL/AB/T

KTA1268/GL/-T

2SD637/QR/

2SD2390/OPY/-F6

2SB1560/OPY/-F6

KTC3200/GL/-T

KTA1268/GL/-T

KTA1268/GL/-T

2SC2240-BL/AB/T

2SC2240-BL/AB/T

2SC2240-BL/AB/T

2SC2240-BL/AB/T

KTA1268/GL/-T

KTA1268/GL/-T

2SD637/QR/

2SD637/QR/

2SD2390/OPY/-F6

2SD2390/OPY/-F6

2SB1560/OPY/-F6

2SB1560/OPY/-F6

KTC3200/GL/-T

KTC3200/GL/-T

KTA1268/GL/-T

KTA1268/GL/-T

KTA1268/GL/-T

KTA1268/GL/-T

QRE141J-222Y

QRE141J-222Y

QRE141J-104Y

QRE141J-104Y

QRE141J-202Y

QRE141J-202Y

QRE141J-202Y

QRE141J-202Y

QRE141J-912Y

QRE141J-912Y

QRE141J-621Y

QRE141J-621Y

QRE141J-104Y

QRE141J-104Y

QRJ146J-562X

QRJ146J-562X

QRK126J-103X

QRK126J-103X

QRJ146J-151X

QRJ146J-151X

QRE141J-391Y

QRE141J-391Y

QRE141J-152Y

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

UNF C RESISTOR

UNF C RESISTOR

UNF C RESISTOR

UNF C RESISTOR

UNF C RESISTOR

UNF C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

Block No. 03

Remarks Area

2.2K 5% 1/4W

2.2K 5% 1/4W

100K 5% 1/4W

100K 5% 1/4W

2.0K 5% 1/4W

2.0K 5% 1/4W

2.0K 5% 1/4W

2.0K 5% 1/4W

9.1K 5% 1/4W

9.1K 5% 1/4W

620 5% 1/4W

620 5% 1/4W

100K 5% 1/4W

100K 5% 1/4W

5.6K 5% 1/4W

5.6K 5% 1/4W

10K 5% 1/2W

10K 5% 1/2W

150 5% 1/4W

150 5% 1/4W

390 5% 1/4W

390 5% 1/4W

1.5K 5% 1/4W

A

Item

R1751

R1752

R1753

R1761

R1762

R1771

R1772

R1773

R1774

R1791

R1712

R1721

R1722

R1723

R1724

R1725

R1731

R1732

R1741

R 789

R 790

R 791

R 792

R 793

R 794

R 795

R 796

R 797

R 798

R1701

R1702

R1703

R1705

R1711

R 777

R 778

R 779

R 780

R 781

R 782

R 783

R 784

R 787

R 788

R 771

R 772

R 773

R 774

R 775

R 776

R 726

R 727

R 728

R 729

R 730

R 731

R 732

R 733

R 734

R 761

R 762

R 763

R 764

Parts name Remarks

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

UNF C RESISTOR

UNF C RESISTOR

UNF C RESISTOR

UNF C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

EMIT RESISTOR

EMIT RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

UNF C RESISTOR

470 5% 1/4W

470 5% 1/4W

33 5% 1/2W

UNF C RESISTOR 33 5% 1/2W

UNF OMF RESISTOR 10 5% 1/2W

UNF OMF RESISTOR 10 5% 1/2W

C RESISTOR 1.0K 5% 1/4W

C RESISTOR 1.0K 5% 1/4W

C RESISTOR 15K 5% 1/4W

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

15K 5% 1/4W

2.2K 5% 1/4W

68K 5% 1/4W

2.0K 5% 1/4W

12K 5% 1/4W

330 5% 1/4W

C RESISTOR

UNF C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

UNF C RESISTOR

56K 5% 1/4W

220 5% 1/4W

3.3K 5% 1/4W

3.3K 5% 1/4W

3.3K 5% 1/4W

3.3K 5% 1/4W

1.0K 5% 1/4W

390 5% 1/4W

220 5% 1/4W

UNF C RESISTOR

UNF C RESISTOR

10 5% 1/4W

10 5% 1/4W

EMIT RESISTOR

UNF C RESISTOR

1/2W

33 5% 1/2W

UNF OMF RESISTOR 10 5% 1/2W

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

390 5% 1/4W

390 5% 1/4W

200 5% 1/4W

200 5% 1/4W

1.0K 5% 1/4W

390 5% 1/4W

390 5% 1/4W

390 5% 1/4W

390 5% 1/4W

200 5% 1/4W

200 5% 1/4W

200 5% 1/4W

200 5% 1/4W

1/2W

1/2W

390 5% 1/4W

390 5% 1/4W

620 5% 1/4W

620 5% 1/4W

47K 5% 1/4W

47K 5% 1/4W

1.5K 5% 1/4W

33K 5% 1/4W

33K 5% 1/4W

390 5% 1/4W

390 5% 1/4W

390 5% 1/4W

390 5% 1/4W

220 5% 1/4W

220 5% 1/4W

10 5% 1/4W

10 5% 1/4W

10 5% 1/4W

10 5% 1/4W

Parts number

QRE141J-563Y

QRJ146J-221X

QRE141J-332Y

QRE141J-332Y

QRE141J-332Y

QRE141J-332Y

QRE141J-102Y

QRE141J-391Y

QRJ146J-221X

QRJ146J-100X

QRJ146J-100X

QRZ0218-R22

QRJ125J-330

QRL022J-100

QRE141J-391Y

QRE141J-391Y

QRE141J-201Y

QRE141J-201Y

QRE141J-102Y

QRE141J-471Y

QRE141J-471Y

QRJ125J-330

QRJ125J-330

QRL022J-100

QRL022J-100

QRE141J-102Y

QRE141J-102Y

QRE141J-153Y

QRE141J-153Y

QRE141J-222Y

QRE141J-683Y

QRE141J-202Y

QRE141J-123Y

QRE141J-331Y

QRE141J-152Y

QRE141J-333Y

QRE141J-333Y

QRE141J-391Y

QRE141J-391Y

QRE141J-391Y

QRE141J-391Y

QRE141J-221Y

QRE141J-221Y

QRJ146J-100X

QRJ146J-100X

QRJ146J-100X

QRJ146J-100X

QRE141J-391Y

QRE141J-391Y

QRE141J-391Y

QRE141J-391Y

QRE141J-201Y

QRE141J-201Y

QRE141J-201Y

QRE141J-201Y

QRZ0218-R22

QRZ0218-R22

QRE141J-391Y

QRE141J-391Y

QRE141J-621Y

QRE141J-621Y

QRE141J-473Y

QRE141J-473Y

Area

3-9

RX-9010VBK

R1826

R1827

R1828

R1829

R1830

R1831

R1832

R1814

R1821

R1822

R1823

R1824

R1825

R1833

R1834

R1841

R1842

R1851

R1852

R1853

R1854

R1801

R1802

R1803

R1804

R1805

R1806

R1809

R1810

R1811

R1812

R1813

QRE141J-222Y

QRE141J-222Y

QRE141J-683Y

QRE141J-683Y

QRE141J-202Y

QRE141J-202Y

QRE141J-123Y

QRE141J-123Y

QRE141J-331Y

QRE141J-331Y

QRE141J-563Y

QRE141J-563Y

QRJ146J-221X

QRJ146J-221X

QRE141J-332Y

QRE141J-332Y

QRE141J-332Y

QRE141J-332Y

QRE141J-332Y

QRE141J-332Y

QRE141J-332Y

QRE141J-332Y

QRE141J-102Y

QRE141J-102Y

QRE141J-391Y

QRE141J-391Y

QRJ146J-221X

QRJ146J-221X

QRJ146J-100X

QRJ146J-100X

QRJ146J-100X

QRJ146J-100X

R1875

R1876

R1877

R1878

R1891

R1892

R1893

R1894

R1895

R1896

TH731

TH783

TH784

TH831

TH832

VR787

VR788

R1855

R1856

R1861

R1862

R1863

R1864

R1871

R1872

R1873

R1874

QRZ0218-R22

QRZ0218-R22

QRJ125J-330

QRJ125J-330

QRL022J-100

QRL022J-100

QRE141J-391Y

QRE141J-391Y

QRE141J-391Y

QRE141J-391Y

QRE141J-201Y

QRE141J-201Y

QRE141J-201Y

QRE141J-201Y

QRE141J-102Y

QRE141J-102Y

QRE141J-183Y

QRE141J-183Y

QRE141J-473Y

QRE141J-473Y

QAD0012-202

QAD0012-202

QAD0012-202

QAD0012-202

QAD0012-202

QVP0008-501Z

QVP0008-501Z

A

Electrical parts list (Power board)

Item Parts number Parts name

R1793

R1795

QRE141J-183Y

QRE141J-473Y

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

UNF C RESISTOR

UNF C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

UNF C RESISTOR

UNF C RESISTOR

UNF C RESISTOR

UNF C RESISTOR

UNF C RESISTOR

UNF C RESISTOR

Block No. 03

Remarks

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

THERMISTOR

THERMISTOR

THERMISTOR

THERMISTOR

THERMISTOR

SEMI V RESISTOR

SEMI V RESISTOR

EMIT RESISTOR

EMIT RESISTOR

UNF C RESISTOR

UNF C RESISTOR

1/2W

1/2W

33 5% 1/2W

33 5% 1/2W

UNF OMF RESISTOR 10 5% 1/2W

UNF OMF RESISTOR 10 5% 1/2W

C RESISTOR 390 5% 1/4W

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

390 5% 1/4W

390 5% 1/4W

390 5% 1/4W

200 5% 1/4W

200 5% 1/4W

200 5% 1/4W

200 5% 1/4W

1.0K 5% 1/4W

1.0K 5% 1/4W

18K 5% 1/4W

18K 5% 1/4W

47K 5% 1/4W

47K 5% 1/4W

56K 5% 1/4W

220 5% 1/4W

220 5% 1/4W

3.3K 5% 1/4W

3.3K 5% 1/4W

3.3K 5% 1/4W

3.3K 5% 1/4W

3.3K 5% 1/4W

3.3K 5% 1/4W

3.3K 5% 1/4W

3.3K 5% 1/4W

1.0K 5% 1/4W

1.0K 5% 1/4W

18K 5% 1/4W

47K 5% 1/4W

2.2K 5% 1/4W

2.2K 5% 1/4W

68K 5% 1/4W

68K 5% 1/4W

2.0K 5% 1/4W

2.0K 5% 1/4W

12K 5% 1/4W

12K 5% 1/4W

330 5% 1/4W

330 5% 1/4W

56K 5% 1/4W

390 5% 1/4W

390 5% 1/4W

220 5% 1/4W

220 5% 1/4W

10 5% 1/4W

10 5% 1/4W

10 5% 1/4W

10 5% 1/4W

Area

3-10

RX-9010VBK

A

Electrical parts list (Input board)

Item Parts number Parts name

C 201

C 202

QETN1HM-475Z

QETN1HM-475Z

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C 275

C 276

C 277

C 301

C 302

C 303

C 304

C 305

C 306

C 307

C 260

C 261

C 268

C 269

C 270

C 271

C 272

C 273

C 274

C 244

C 245

C 246

C 247

C 249

C 250

C 251

C 252

C 253

C 254

C 255

C 256

C 257

C 258

C 259

C 220

C 221

C 222

C 223

C 224

C 225

C 226

C 231

C 241

C 242

C 214

C 215

C 216

C 217

C 218

C 219

C 203

C 204

C 205

C 206

C 207

C 208

C 209

C 210

C 211

C 212

C 213

QDX31EM-473Z

QETN1HM-475Z

NCS31HJ-470X

NCS31HJ-470X

NCS31HJ-101X

NCS31HJ-101X

QDX31EM-473Z

QDX31EM-473Z

QETN0JM-477Z

NCS31HJ-470X

NCS31HJ-470X

QETN1HM-475Z

QETN1HM-475Z

QETN1HM-475Z

NCS31HJ-101X

NCS31HJ-101X

QFLC1HJ-182Z

QFLC1HJ-182Z

QFLC1HJ-682Z

QDX31EM-473Z

QETN1HM-475Z

QDX31EM-473Z

QETN0JM-477Z

QDX31EM-473Z

QETN1HM-475Z

QDX31EM-473Z

QETN0JM-477Z

NCS31HJ-100X

QDX31EM-473Z

QETN1HM-475Z

QCF31HZ-103Z

QETN1CM-476Z

QCF31HZ-103Z

QETN1CM-476Z

QETN0JM-477Z

QETN1HM-475Z

QETN0JM-477Z

QETN1HM-475Z

QETN0JM-477Z

QETN1CM-476Z

QCF31HZ-103Z

QETN1HM-475Z

QETN1HM-475Z

QETN1CM-476Z

QCF31HZ-103Z

QETN1HM-475Z

QETN1HM-475Z

QDX31EM-473Z

QETN1AM-477Z

QCZ0202-155Z

QDC31HJ-150Z

QDC31HJ-100Z

QDC31HJ-470Z

QDC31HJ-270Z

NCB31HK-102X

NCB31HK-271X

NCS31HJ-121X

NCS31HJ-470X

QETN1HM-475Z

QDX31EM-473Z

QETN1HM-475Z

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

M CAPACITOR

M CAPACITOR

M CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

ML C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

4.7MF 20% 50V

4.7MF 20% 50V

4.7MF 20% 50V

470MF 20% 6.3V

4.7MF 20% 50V

470MF 20% 6.3V

4.7MF 20% 50V

.010MF +80:-20%

47MF 20% 16V

.010MF +80:-20%

47MF 20% 16V

4.7MF 20% 50V

470MF 20% 6.3V

4.7MF 20% 50V

4.7MF 20% 50V

4.7MF 20% 50V

1800PF 5% 50V

1800PF 5% 50V

6800PF 5% 50V

Block No. 04

Remarks

4.7MF 20% 50V

4.7MF 20% 50V

470MF 20% 6.3V

4.7MF 20% 50V

470MF 20% 6.3V

4.7MF 20% 50V

470MF 20% 6.3V

47MF 20% 16V

.010MF +80:-20%

4.7MF 20% 50V

4.7MF 20% 50V

47MF 20% 16V

.010MF +80:-20%

4.7MF 20% 50V

4.7MF 20% 50V

Area

470MF 20% 10V

1.5MF

Parts name

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

CONNECTOR

CONNECTOR

CONNECTOR

CONNECTOR

CONNECTOR

CONNECTOR

CONNECTOR

CONNECTOR

CONNECTOR

CONNECTOR

CONNECTOR

CONNECTOR

CONNECTOR

CONNECTOR

CONNECTOR

SIN CR C-B WIR

CONNECTOR

SHI CR C-B WIRE

CONNECTOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

M CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

A

Item Parts number

C 393

C 394

C 395

C 396

C 397

NCB31HK-122X

NCB31HK-122X

NCS31HJ-121X

NCS31HJ-121X

QETN1HM-106Z

C 398 QETN1HM-106Z

CN200 QGB2510K1-11

CN204 QGB1214K1-08S

CN205 QGB1214J1-08S

CN206 QGA2501F1-02

CN240 QGB2510K1-12

CN242 QGB1214K1-10S

CN243

CN244

QGB1214J1-10S

QGA2501F1-04

CN311 QGB2510K1-14

CN732

C1201

C1202

C1209

C1211

C1212

C1219

C1221

C1222

C1223

CN313 QGB2510K1-13

CN351 QGB1214K1-16S

CN361 QGB1214J1-16S

CN371 QGB1214K1-14S

CN381 QGB1214J1-14S

CN416

CN480

CN501

CN731

QGA2501F1-06

QJK017-031301

QGB1214J1-12S

QJP001-032301

WJP0026-001A

QETN1EM-226Z

QETN1EM-226Z

NCB31HK-561X

QETN1EM-226Z

QETN1EM-226Z

NCB31HK-561X

QETN1HM-106Z

QETN1HM-106Z

QETN1HM-106Z

C 344

C 361

C 362

C 363

C 364

C 385

C 386

C 389

C 391

C 392

C 335

C 336

C 339

C 341

C 342

C 343

C 308

C 309

C 310

C 311

C 312

C 313

C 314

C 315

C 316

C 321

C 322

C 333

C 334

QFLC1HJ-682Z

NCS31HJ-101X

NCS31HJ-101X

QETN1HM-475Z

QETN1HM-475Z

QETN1AM-107Z

QETN1AM-107Z

QETN1CM-476Z

QETN1CM-476Z

NCB31HK-221X

NCB31HK-221X

NCB31HK-391X

NCB31HK-391X

QETN1EM-226Z

QETN1EM-226Z

NCB31HK-561X

QETN1HM-106Z

QETN1HM-106Z

QETN1HM-106Z

QETN1HM-106Z

QETN1HM-475Z

QETN1HM-475Z

QETN1HM-475Z

QETN1HM-475Z

QETN1EM-226Z

QETN1EM-226Z

NCB31HK-561X

QETN1HM-106Z

QETN1HM-106Z

Remarks

6800PF 5% 50V

4.7MF 20% 50V

4.7MF 20% 50V

100MF 20% 10V

100MF 20% 10V

47MF 20% 16V

47MF 20% 16V

10MF 20% 50V

10MF 20% 50V

22MF 20% 25V

22MF 20% 25V

22MF 20% 25V

22MF 20% 25V

10MF 20% 50V

10MF 20% 50V

10MF 20% 50V

22MF 20% 25V

22MF 20% 25V

10MF 20% 50V

10MF 20% 50V

10MF 20% 50V

10MF 20% 50V

4.7MF 20% 50V

4.7MF 20% 50V

4.7MF 20% 50V

4.7MF 20% 50V

22MF 20% 25V

22MF 20% 25V

10MF 20% 50V

10MF 20% 50V

Area

3-11

RX-9010VBK

A

Electrical parts list (Input board)

Item Parts number Parts name

C1224

C1225

QETN1HM-106Z

QETN1EM-476Z

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C1342

C1343

C1344

C1345

C1351

C1352

C1353

C1354

C1361

C1362

C1332

C1333

C1334

C1335

C1336

C1337

C1338

C1339

C1341

C1311

C1312

C1313

C1314

C1315

C1316

C1319

C1321

C1322

C1323

C1324

C1325

C1326

C1329

C1331

C1283

C1284

C1285

C1286

C1301

C1302

C1303

C1305

C1306

C1307

C1244

C1245

C1261

C1262

C1281

C1282

C1226

C1227

C1228

C1229

C1230

C1231

C1232

C1233

C1241

C1242

C1243

QETN1HM-475Z

QETN1HM-475Z

QETN1HM-475Z

QETN1HM-106Z

QETN1HM-106Z

QETN1HM-106Z

QETN1HM-106Z

NCB31HK-221X

QETN1HM-475Z

QETN1HM-475Z

QETN1EM-476Z

QETN1EM-476Z

NCB31HK-391X

NCB31HK-102X

QETN1AM-107Z

QFLC1HJ-104Z

QETN1AM-107Z

NCB31HK-391X

NCB31HK-391X

QETN1HM-475Z

QETN1HM-475Z

QETN1HM-475Z

QETN1HM-475Z

QER61HM-224Z

QER61HM-224Z

NCB31HK-221X

QETN1HM-475Z

QETN1HM-475Z

QETN1HM-475Z

QETN1HM-475Z

QER61HM-224Z

QER61HM-224Z

NCB31HK-221X

QETN1HM-475Z

QETN1EM-476Z

QETN1HM-475Z

QETN1HM-475Z

QETN1HM-475Z

QETN1HM-475Z

NCB31HK-221X

QETN1HM-226Z

QETN1HM-106Z

QETN1HM-475Z

QETN1HM-475Z

QETN1HM-475Z

QETN1HM-475Z

QETN1HM-226Z

NCB31HK-221X

NCB31HK-221X

QETN1AM-107Z

QETN1AM-477Z

QETN1EM-476Z

QETN1AM-107Z

QETN1EM-476Z

QETN1AM-107Z

QETN1EM-476Z

QETN1EM-476Z

NCB31HK-221X

QETN1EM-476Z

QETN1EM-476Z

QETN1CM-476Z

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

M CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

100MF 20% 10V

.10MF 5% 50V

100MF 20% 10V

100MF 20% 10V

470MF 20% 10V

47MF 20% 25V

100MF 20% 10V

47MF 20% 25V

100MF 20% 10V

47MF 20% 25V

47MF 20% 25V

47MF 20% 25V

47MF 20% 25V

47MF 20% 16V

4.7MF 20% 50V

4.7MF 20% 50V

4.7MF 20% 50V

4.7MF 20% 50V

.22MF 20% 50V

.22MF 20% 50V

4.7MF 20% 50V

4.7MF 20% 50V

4.7MF 20% 50V

4.7MF 20% 50V

.22MF 20% 50V

.22MF 20% 50V

4.7MF 20% 50V

4.7MF 20% 50V

4.7MF 20% 50V

4.7MF 20% 50V

10MF 20% 50V

10MF 20% 50V

10MF 20% 50V

10MF 20% 50V

4.7MF 20% 50V

4.7MF 20% 50V

47MF 20% 25V

47MF 20% 25V

Block No. 04

Remarks

10MF 20% 50V

47MF 20% 25V

47MF 20% 25V

4.7MF 20% 50V

4.7MF 20% 50V

4.7MF 20% 50V

4.7MF 20% 50V

Area

22MF 20% 50V

10MF 20% 50V

4.7MF 20% 50V

4.7MF 20% 50V

4.7MF 20% 50V

4.7MF 20% 50V

22MF 20% 50V

Parts name

IC

IC

IC

IC

IC

IC

IC

IC

IC

IC

IC

IC

IC

IC

IC

IC

IC

IC

IC

E CAPACITOR

SI DIODE

SI DIODE

SI DIODE

SI DIODE

Z DIODE

SI DIODE

SI DIODE

PARA RIBON WIRE

IC

IC

IC

IC HOLDER

IC

IC

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

A

Item Parts number

IC383

IC384

IC385

IC386

IC387

IC388

IC389

IC390

IC391

IC392

IC301

IC302

IC303

IC304

IC371

IC372

IC380

IC381

IC382

HL203

IC201

IC202

IC203

IC241

IC242

C1398

D 200

D 201

D 240

D 241

QETN1AM-107Z

1SS133-T1

1SS133-T1

1SS133-T1

1SS133-T1

D1370

D1391

D1392

MA3062/H/-X

1SS133-T1

1SS133-T1

FW481 QUM134-10DGZ4

VYH7653-005

BA7625

NJM2285V-W

MB90088PF-131

BA7626

BA7625

NJM4580D-D

TC9164AF-X

BA15218F-XE

BA15218F-XE

TC9163AF-X

BA15218F-XE

TC9162AN

TC9459F-X

TC9459F-X

TC9459F-X

BA15218F-XE

BA15218F-XE

BA15218F-XE

NJM2406F-X

TC74HC4053AF-X

TC74HC4053AF-X

MAX4018ESD-X

TC9164AF-X

TC9163AF-X

C1388

C1389

C1390

C1391

C1392

C1393

C1394

C1395

C1396

C1397

C1382

C1383

C1384

C1385

C1386

C1387

C1363

C1364

C1365

C1366

C1370

C1371

C1372

C1375

C1376

C1377

C1378

C1380

C1381

QETN1HM-475Z

QETN1HM-475Z

QETN1HM-475Z

QETN1HM-475Z

NCB31HK-221X

NCB31HK-221X

NCB31HK-221X

QCF31HZ-103Z

QETN1EM-476Z

QCF31HZ-103Z

QETN1EM-476Z

QETN1EM-476Z

NCS31HJ-470X

NCS31HJ-470X

NCS31HJ-470X

QETN1EM-476Z

QETN1HM-475Z

QETN1HM-475Z

NCS31HJ-470X

NCS31HJ-470X

NCS31HJ-470X

QETN1EM-476Z

QETN1HM-475Z

QETN1HM-475Z

NCS31HJ-101X

NCS31HJ-101X

NCS31HJ-101X

QETN0JM-477Z

QETN1AM-107Z

Remarks

4.7MF 20% 50V

4.7MF 20% 50V

4.7MF 20% 50V

4.7MF 20% 50V

.010MF +80:-20%

47MF 20% 25V

.010MF +80:-20%

47MF 20% 25V

47MF 20% 25V

47MF 20% 25V

4.7MF 20% 50V

4.7MF 20% 50V

47MF 20% 25V

4.7MF 20% 50V

4.7MF 20% 50V

470MF 20% 6.3V

100MF 20% 10V

100MF 20% 10V

Area

3-12

A

Electrical parts list (Input board)

Item Parts number Parts name

IC393

IC394

TC9459F-X

BA15218F-XE

IC

IC

Q1334

Q1341

Q1342

Q1343

Q1391

Q1392

R 200

R 201

R 202

R 203

Q1247

Q1248

Q1249

Q1250

Q1307

Q1313

Q1314

Q1323

Q1333

Q 206

Q 207

Q 208

Q 240

Q 241

Q 242

Q 243

Q 244

Q 245

Q 246

Q 247

Q1231

Q1233

Q1234

Q1245

J1372

J1380

J1390

L 200

Q 200

Q 201

Q 202

Q 203

Q 204

Q 205

J 372

J 373

J1340

J1360

J1370

J1371

IC395

J 201

J 202

J 203

J 241

J 242

J 243

J 301

J 302

J 303

J 371

2SC3576-JVC-T

2SC3576-JVC-T

2SC3576-JVC-T

2SC3576-JVC-T

KRA104M-T

2SC3576-JVC-T

2SC3576-JVC-T

2SC3576-JVC-T

2SC3576-JVC-T

2SC3576-JVC-T

2SC3576-JVC-T

2SC3576-JVC-T

KRA104M-T

KRA107M-T

KTA1273/Y/-T

NRSA63J-750X

NRSA63J-750X

NRSA63J-750X

NRSA63J-750X

KTA1267/YG/-T

KTA1267/YG/-T

DTC123YSA-T

KTA1267/YG/-T

KTA1267/YG/-T

KTA1267/YG/-T

KTA1267/YG/-T

KRC110M-T

KRC110M-T

KRC107M-T

KRC107M-T

KRA104M-T

2SC3576-JVC-T

2SC3576-JVC-T

KRA104M-T

BA15218F-XE

QNN0078-001

QNN0011-001

QNN0011-001

QND0002-001

QND0028-001

QND0088-001

QNN0056-001

QNN0056-001

QNN0058-001

QNN0056-001

QNN0056-001

QNN0058-001

QNN0060-001

QNN0390-001

QNS0083-001

QNS0077-001

QNS0083-001

QNN0391-001

QNS0001-001

NQL085J-220X

KTA1267/YG/-T

KTA1267/YG/-T

KRC110M-T

KRC107M-T

KTA1267/YG/-T

KTA1267/YG/-T

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

D TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

D TRANSISITOR

D TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

D TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

D TRANSISTOR

D TRANSISTOR

D TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

D TRANSISTOR

IC

PIN JACK

PIN JACK

PIN JACK

S-CONNECTOR

DIN CONNECTOR

S JACK

PIN JACK

PIN JACK

PIN JACK

PIN JACK

PIN JACK

PIN JACK

PIN JACK

PIN JACK

3.5 JACK

3.5 JACK

3.5 JACK

PIN JACK

3.5 JACK(JES)

INDUCTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

D TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

RX-9010VBK

Block No. 04

Remarks Area Parts number

NRSA63J-750X

NRSA63J-473X

NRSA63J-750X

NRSA63J-750X

NRSA63J-750X

NRSA63J-301X

NRSA63J-301X

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63J-301X

NRSA63J-301X

NRSA63J-222X

NRSA63J-222X

NRSA63J-473X

NRSA63J-473X

NRSA63J-621X

NRSA63J-621X

NRSA63J-393X

NRSA63J-393X

NRSA63J-750X

NRSA63J-750X

NRSA63J-750X

NRSA63J-151X

NRSA63J-151X

NRSA63J-151X

NRSA63J-151X

NRSA63J-153X

NRSA63J-153X

NRSA63J-153X

NRSA63J-750X

NRSA63J-473X

NRSA63J-750X

NRSA63J-473X

QRJ146J-3R3X

NRSA63J-750X

NRSA63J-750X

NRSA63J-750X

NRSA63J-331X

NRSA63J-331X

NRSA63J-473X

NRSA63J-331X

NRSA63J-473X

NRSA63J-331X

NRSA63J-473X

NRSA63J-151X

NRSA63J-151X

NRSA63J-301X

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63J-331X

NRSA63J-101X

NRSA63J-151X

NRSA63J-151X

NRSA63J-561X

NRSA63J-561X

NRSA63J-561X

QRJ146J-2R2X

NRSA63J-222X

NRSA63J-470X

NRSA63J-750X

NRSA63J-750X

NRSA63J-750X

NRSA63J-750X

NRSA63J-750X

A

A

A

Item

R 284

R 285

R 301

R 302

R 303

R 304

R 305

R 306

R 307

R 308

R 272

R 273

R 274

R 275

R 276

R 280

R 281

R 282

R 283

R 245

R 246

R 247

R 248

R 249

R 250

R 251

R 253

R 254

R 255

R 266

R 267

R 268

R 269

R 271

R 223

R 224

R 225

R 231

R 232

R 240

R 241

R 242

R 243

R 244

R 217

R 218

R 219

R 220

R 221

R 222

R 204

R 205

R 206

R 207

R 208

R 209

R 210

R 211

R 212

R 213

R 214

R 215

R 216

Parts name

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

UNF C RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

UNF C RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

Remarks

2.2 5% 1/4W

3.3 5% 1/4W

Area

3-13

RX-9010VBK

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

Electrical parts list (Input board)

Item Parts number Parts name

R 309

R 310

NRSA63J-474X

NRSA63J-474X

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

R 394

R 395

R 396

R 397

R 398

R1201

R1202

R1211

R1212

R1221

R 385

R 386

R 387

R 388

R 389

R 390

R 391

R 392

R 393

R 364

R 365

R 366

R 371

R 372

R 373

R 374

R 375

R 376

R 377

R 378

R 379

R 380

R 381

R 382

R 336

R 341

R 342

R 343

R 344

R 345

R 346

R 361

R 362

R 363

R 330

R 331

R 332

R 333

R 334

R 335

R 311

R 312

R 315

R 316

R 323

R 324

R 325

R 326

R 327

R 328

R 329

QRZ9005-680X

QRZ9005-680X

NRSA63J-471X

NRSA63J-471X

NRSA63J-471X

NRSA63J-471X

NRSA63J-512X

NRSA63J-512X

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63J-512X

NRSA63J-512X

NRSA63J-104X

NRSA63J-104X

QRZ9005-680X

QRZ9005-680X

QRZ9005-680X

QRZ9005-680X

NRSA63J-104X

NRSA63J-104X

NRSA63J-104X

NRSA63J-104X

NRSA63J-471X

NRSA63J-471X

NRSA63J-471X

NRSA63J-471X

NRSA63J-471X

NRSA63J-471X

NRSA63J-471X

NRSA63J-471X

NRSA63J-471X

NRSA63J-471X

NRSA63J-471X

NRSA63J-471X

NRSA63J-104X

NRSA63J-104X

QRJ146J-331X

QRJ146J-331X

NRSA63J-471X

NRSA63J-471X

NRSA63J-471X

NRSA63J-471X

NRSA63J-471X

NRSA63J-471X

NRSA63J-471X

NRSA63J-471X

NRSA63J-471X

NRSA63J-471X

NRSA63J-471X

NRSA63J-471X

QRZ9005-680X

QRZ9005-680X

NRSA63J-104X

NRSA63J-104X

NRSA63J-104X

NRSA63J-104X

NRSA63J-104X

NRSA63J-104X

NRSA63J-104X

NRSA63J-104X

NRSA63J-104X

F RESISTOR

F RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

F RESISTOR

F RESISTOR

F RESISTOR

F RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

UNF C RESISTOR

UNF C RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

F RESISTOR

F RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

Block No. 04

Remarks Area

330 5% 1/4W

330 5% 1/4W

68 1/0W

68 1/0W

68 1/0W

68 1/0W

68 1/0W

68 1/0W

68 1/0W

68 1/0W

Parts name

F RESISTOR

F RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

F RESISTOR

F RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

F RESISTOR

F RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

Parts number

QRZ9005-680X

QRZ9005-680X

NRSA63J-122X

NRSA63J-122X

QRZ9005-680X

QRZ9005-680X

NRSA63J-102X

NRSA63J-104X

NRSA63J-104X

NRSA63J-102X

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63J-102X

NRSA63J-104X

NRSA63J-104X

NRSA63J-102X

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63J-0R0X

NRSA63J-104X

NRSA63J-471X

NRSA63J-472X

NRSA63J-472X

NRSA63J-102X

NRSA63J-112X

NRSA63J-472X

NRSA63J-472X

NRSA63J-102X

NRSA63J-112X

NRSA63J-472X

NRSA63J-472X

NRSA63J-102X

NRSA63J-112X

NRSA63J-162X

NRSA63J-472X

NRSA63J-104X

NRSA63J-104X

NRSA63J-104X

NRSA63J-104X

NRSA63J-104X

QRZ9005-680X

QRZ9005-680X

NRSA63J-104X

NRSA63J-104X

NRSA63J-102X

NRSA63J-474X

NRSA63J-102X

NRSA63J-102X

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63J-104X

NRSA63J-104X

NRSA63J-104X

NRSA63J-104X

NRSA63J-102X

NRSA63J-102X

NRSA63J-102X

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63J-102X

NRSA63J-102X

NRSA63J-471X

A

Item

A

A

A

A

A

A

R1313

R1314

R1315

R1316

R1321

R1322

R1323

R1324

R1328

R1331

R1301

R1302

R1303

R1304

R1305

R1306

R1307

R1311

R1312

R1262

R1281

R1282

R1283

R1284

R1285

R1286

R1287

R1288

R1289

R1290

R1291

R1292

R1293

R1294

R1245

R1247

R1248

R1249

R1250

R1251

R1252

R1253

R1254

R1261

R1235

R1236

R1241

R1242

R1243

R1244

R1222

R1223

R1224

R1225

R1226

R1227

R1228

R1229

R1230

R1231

R1232

R1233

R1234

Remarks

68 1/0W

68 1/0W

68 1/0W

68 1/0W

68 1/0W

68 1/0W

Area

3-14

A

A

A

Electrical parts list (Input board)

Item Parts number Parts name

R1332

R1333

NRSA63J-104X

NRSA63J-102X

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

R1394

R1395

R1396

R1397

R1398

R1399

X 200

R1385

R1386

R1387

R1388

R1389

R1390

R1391

R1392

R1393

R1366

R1367

R1368

R1370

R1371

R1372

R1373

R1374

R1375

R1379

R1380

R1381

R1382

R1383

R1384

R1351

R1355

R1356

R1357

R1358

R1361

R1362

R1363

R1364

R1365

R1345

R1346

R1347

R1348

R1349

R1350

R1334

R1335

R1336

R1337

R1338

R1339

R1340

R1341

R1342

R1343

R1344

NRSA63J-750X

NRSA63J-750X

NRSA63J-750X

NRSA63J-473X

NRSA63J-473X

NRSA63J-473X

NRSA63J-393X

NRSA63J-393X

NRSA63J-104X

NRSA63J-273X

NRSA63J-104X

NRSA63J-103X

QRJ146J-5R6X

NRSA63J-102X

NRSA63J-152X

QAX0260-001Z

NRSA63J-104X

NRSA63J-104X

NRSA63J-104X

NRSA63J-471X

NRSA63J-221X

NRSA63J-101X

NRSA63J-221X

NRSA63J-221X

NRSA63J-221X

NRSA63J-750X

NRSA63J-750X

NRSA63J-750X

NRSA63J-750X

NRSA63J-750X

NRSA63J-750X

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63J-102X

NRSA63J-104X

NRSA63J-104X

NRSA63J-104X

NRSA63J-104X

NRSA63J-104X

NRSA63J-102X

NRSA63J-183X

NRSA63J-104X

NRSA63J-471X

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63J-471X

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63J-474X

QRZ9005-680X

QRZ9005-680X

NRSA63J-222X

NRSA63J-222X

NRSA63J-392X

NRSA63J-392X

NRSA63J-561X

NRSA63J-561X

NRSA63J-104X

NRSA63J-104X

NRSA63J-104X

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

UNF C RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

CRYSTAL

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

F RESISTOR

F RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

Block No. 04

Remarks Area

68 1/0W

68 1/0W

5.6 5% 1/4W

NTSC ONLY

RX-9010VBK

3-15

RX-9010VBK

A

Electrical parts list (DSP board)

Item Parts number Parts name

C 571

C 573

NCB31HK-103X

NCF31CZ-104X

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C2256

C2257

C2258

C2261

C2262

C2283

C2284

C2301

C2302

C2307

C2208

C2230

C2237

C2238

C2251

C2252

C2253

C2254

C2255

C2101

C2107

C2133

C2134

C2135

C2136

C2137

C2138

C2157

C2158

C2187

C2189

C2201

C2202

C2207

C2006

C2007

C2008

C2009

C2010

C2013

C2014

C2018

C2019

C2020

CN587

C2001

C2002

C2003

C2004

C2005

C 577

C 579

C 581

C 582

C 583

C 584

C 587

C 588

C 589

C 590

CN581

NEA71HM-225X

NEA71EM-475X

NCS31HJ-330X

NCS31HJ-330X

NCF31CZ-104X

NCF31CZ-104X

NCF31CZ-104X

NCF31CZ-104X

NCF31CZ-104X

NCF31CZ-104X

NEA71HM-225X

NEA71HM-225X

NEA71EM-475X

NEA71EM-475X

NCS31HJ-330X

NCS31HJ-330X

NCB31HK-102X

NCB31HK-102X

NEA71EM-475X

NCB31HK-103X

NEA71EM-475X

NCB31EK-223X

NCB31EK-223X

NEA71CM-106X

NEA71CM-106X

NEA71EM-475X

NEA71EM-475X

NEA71HM-225X

NCS31HJ-330X

NEA71HM-225X

NCS31HJ-330X

NCB31HK-102X

NCB31HK-102X

NEA71HM-225X

NCS31HJ-101X

NCS31HJ-101X

NEA71CM-106X

NEA71CM-106X

NEA70JM-476X

NCB31CK-104X

NCF31CZ-104X

NEA70JM-476X

NCF31CZ-104X

NEA70GM-107X

QGB1214K3-12W

QGB2510K1-07

NEA71EM-475X

NEA71EM-475X

NCB31HK-122X

NCB31HK-122X

NCS31HJ-121X

NCS31HJ-121X

NCS31HJ-391X

NCS31HJ-391X

NCF31CZ-104X

NCF31CZ-104X

NCS31HJ-330X

NCS31HJ-330X

NEA70JM-476X

NCF31CZ-104X

NCF31CZ-104X

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

CONNECTOR

CONNECTOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

Block No. 05

Remarks Area Parts name

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

Parts number

NCF31CZ-104X

NEA70GM-107X

NEA70GM-107X

NCF31CZ-104X

NCF31CZ-104X

NEA70GM-107X

NCF31CZ-104X

NCS31HJ-270X

NCS31HJ-270X

NEA70GM-107X

NCF31CZ-104X

NCF31CZ-104X

NCS31HJ-330X

NCF31CZ-104X

NCF31CZ-104X

NCF31CZ-104X

NCF31CZ-104X

NCS31HJ-101X

NEA71HM-105X

NCB31HK-103X

NCB31HK-103X

NCB31HK-103X

NCB31HK-103X

NCB31HK-103X

NCB31HK-103X

NCB31HK-103X

NCB31HK-103X

NCB31HK-103X

NCB31HK-103X

NCB31HK-103X

NCB31HK-103X

NCB31HK-103X

NCB31HK-103X

NCB31HK-103X

NEA71EM-475X

NCS31HJ-330X

NCS31HJ-330X

NCF31CZ-104X

NCF31CZ-104X

NEA71HM-105X

NEA71HM-105X

NCS31HJ-330X

NCS31HJ-330X

NCF31CZ-104X

NCF31CZ-104X

NEA71EM-475X

NEA71EM-475X

NCB31HK-102X

NEA71EM-475X

NEA71HM-225X

NCS31HJ-330X

NCF31CZ-104X

NCF31CZ-104X

NCF31CZ-104X

NCF31CZ-104X

NEA70JM-476X

NCB31HK-103X

NCB31HK-103X

NCB31HK-103X

NCB31HK-103X

NCB31HK-103X

NCB31HK-103X

NCB31HK-103X

A

Item

C2553

C2555

C2556

C2557

C2560

C2561

C2562

C2563

C2564

C2568

C2523

C2529

C2532

C2533

C2534

C2535

C2536

C2551

C2552

C2508

C2509

C2510

C2511

C2512

C2513

C2514

C2515

C2516

C2517

C2518

C2519

C2520

C2521

C2522

C2441

C2442

C2481

C2501

C2502

C2503

C2504

C2505

C2506

C2507

C2401

C2407

C2427

C2433

C2439

C2440

C2308

C2347

C2348

C2349

C2350

C2351

C2352

C2353

C2354

C2355

C2356

C2357

C2358

Remarks Area

3-16

RX-9010VBK

A

Electrical parts list (DSP board)

Item Parts number Parts name

C2601

C2605

NCB31CK-104X

NCB31CK-104X

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

Q2273

Q2274

Q2301

Q2302

Q2363

Q2364

Q2401

Q2431

R 570

R 573

Q2154

Q2155

Q2156

Q2157

Q2163

Q2164

Q2165

Q2201

Q2202

IC582

IC583

J 564

K2606

K2607

LC501

LC502

LC503

LC551

Q 570

Q 572

Q2101

Q2151

Q2152

Q2153

IC523

IC524

IC525

IC526

IC527

IC528

IC529

IC551

IC571

IC581

IC502

IC503

IC505

IC511

IC521

IC522

C2701

C2702

C2703

C2704

C2705

C2706

C2707

C2710

C2712

EP561

IC501

DTA114YE-X

DTA114YE-X

DTA114YE-X

DTA114YE-X

2SD1328/ST/-X

2SD1328/ST/-X

2SD1328/ST/-X

2SD1328/ST/-X

2SD1328/ST/-X

2SD1328/ST/-X

2SD1328/ST/-X

2SD1328/ST/-X

2SD1328/ST/-X

2SD1328/ST/-X

2SD1328/ST/-X

2SD1328/ST/-X

2SD1328/ST/-X

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63J-432X

TC7SET32FU-X

PQ3DZ53-X

QNN0347-001

NQR0269-004X

NQR0269-004X

NQR0322-001X

NQR0322-001X

NQR0322-001X

NQR0322-001X

DTC114YE-X

DTC114YE-X

2SD1328/ST/-X

DTA114YE-X

DTA114YE-X

DTA114YE-X

NCB31HK-221X

NCB31HK-221X

NEA70JM-476X

NEA70JM-476X

NCF31CZ-104X

NCF31CZ-104X

NCB31CK-104X

NEA70JM-476X

NCF31CZ-104X

E409182-001SM

XCA56367PV150

TC7S04FU-X

TC7S04FU-X

PQ070XZ1HZ-X

W24L010AJ-12-X

BA15218F-XE

BA15218F-XE

BA15218F-XE

BA15218F-XE

BA15218F-XE

BA15218F-XE

BA15218F-XE

BA15218F-XE

BA15218F-XE

AK4112AVF-X

AK4527BVQ

IC

IC

UPD784215AGC152 IC

IC

IC

IC

IC

IC

IC

IC

IC

IC

IC

IC

IC

IC

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

GRAND TERMINAL

IC

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

IC

IC

PIN JACK

FERRITE BEADS

FERRITE BEADS

EMI FILTER

EMI FILTER

EMI FILTER

EMI FILTER

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

Block No. 05

Remarks Area Parts number

NRSA63J-105X

NRSA63J-104X

NRSA63J-303X

NRSA63J-113X

NRSA63J-105X

NRSA63J-105X

NRSA63J-105X

NRSA63J-105X

NRSA63J-105X

NRSA63J-105X

NRSA63J-105X

NRSA63J-104X

NRSA63J-223X

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63J-102X

NRSA63J-102X

NRSA63J-104X

NRSA63J-104X

NRSA63J-102X

NRSA63J-104X

NRSA63J-223X

NRSA63J-223X

NRSA63J-223X

NRSA63J-104X

NRSA63J-104X

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63J-102X

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63J-222X

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63J-223X

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63J-432X

NRSA63J-432X

NRSA63J-432X

NRSA63J-822X

NRSA63J-822X

NRSA63J-822X

NRSA63J-822X

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63J-104X

NRSA63J-104X

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63J-223X

NRSA63J-223X

NRSA63J-223X

NRSA63J-223X

NRSA63J-472X

NRSA63J-472X

NRSA63J-331X

NRSA63J-331X

NRSA63J-331X

NRSA63J-331X

NRSA63J-103X

A

Item

R2184

R2186

R2187

R2189

R2201

R2202

R2205

R2206

R2207

R2208

R2140

R2157

R2158

R2159

R2171

R2172

R2181

R2182

R2183

R2105

R2107

R2127

R2128

R2129

R2130

R2131

R2132

R2133

R2134

R2135

R2136

R2137

R2138

R2139

R2012

R2013

R2014

R2017

R2018

R2021

R2022

R2023

R2024

R2101

R2006

R2007

R2008

R2009

R2010

R2011

R 574

R 575

R 576

R 577

R 578

R 579

R 580

R 582

R2001

R2002

R2003

R2004

R2005

Parts name

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

Remarks Area

3-17

RX-9010VBK

A

Electrical parts list (DSP board)

Item Parts number Parts name

R2221

R2222

NRSA63J-333X

NRSA63J-333X

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

R2427

R2429

R2431

R2433

R2485

R2501

R2502

R2503

R2504

R2505

R2358

R2359

R2360

R2363

R2364

R2401

R2405

R2407

R2425

R2301

R2302

R2305

R2306

R2307

R2308

R2349

R2350

R2351

R2352

R2353

R2354

R2355

R2356

R2357

R2273

R2274

R2275

R2276

R2277

R2278

R2283

R2284

R2285

R2286

R2257

R2258

R2261

R2262

R2263

R2264

R2225

R2226

R2227

R2231

R2232

R2233

R2234

R2235

R2236

R2237

R2238

NRSA63J-223X

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63J-104X

NRSA63J-104X

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63J-102X

NRSA63J-104X

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63J-104X

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63J-113X

NRSA63J-823X

NRSA63J-102X

NRSA63J-105X

NRSA63J-473X

NRSA63J-473X

NRSA63J-473X

NRSA63J-473X

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63J-102X

NRSA63J-102X

NRSA63J-104X

NRSA63J-104X

NRSA63J-303X

NRSA63J-303X

NRSA63J-113X

NRSA63J-113X

NRSA63J-222X

NRSA63J-222X

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63J-223X

NRSA63J-104X

NRSA63J-104X

NRSA63J-104X

NRSA63J-333X

NRSA63J-333X

NRSA63J-333X

NRSA63J-333X

NRSA63J-333X

NRSA63J-333X

NRSA63J-683X

NRSA63J-683X

NRSA63J-104X

NRSA63J-104X

NRSA63J-104X

NRSA63J-104X

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63J-682X

NRSA63J-682X

NRSA63J-105X

NRSA63J-105X

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63J-113X

NRSA63J-113X

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

Block No. 05

Remarks Area Parts name

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

OPT TRANSMITTER

OPT RECEIVER

OPT RECEIVER

OPT RECEIVER

1COSCIALLATOR

RESONATOR

CRYSTAL

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

Parts number

NRSA63J-473X

NRSA63J-473X

NRSA63J-473X

NRSA63J-473X

NRSA63J-221X

NRSA63J-432X

NRSA63J-221X

NRSA63J-221X

NRSA63J-221X

GP1FA550TZ

GP1FA550RZ

GP1FA550RZ

GP1FA550RZ

NAX0275-001X

NAX0308-001X

NAX0213-001X

NRSA63J-112X

NRSA63J-750X

NRSA63J-221X

NRSA63J-512X

NRSA63J-512X

NRSA63J-512X

NRSA63J-221X

NRSA63J-221X

NRSA63J-221X

NRSA63J-221X

NRSA63J-221X

NRSA63J-221X

NRSA63J-221X

NRSA63J-221X

NRSA63J-221X

NRSA63J-221X

NRSA63J-221X

NRSA63J-221X

NRSA63J-221X

NRSA63J-102X

NRSA63J-473X

NRSA63J-473X

NRSA63J-473X

NRSA63J-473X

NRSA63J-473X

NRSA63J-473X

NRSA63J-473X

NRSA63J-473X

NRSA63J-221X

NRSA63J-221X

NRSA63J-221X

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63J-221X

NRSA63J-221X

NRSA63J-221X

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63J-103X

NRSA63F-511X

NRSA63F-102X

NRSA63J-183X

NRSA63J-221X

NRSA63J-221X

NRSA63J-221X

NRSA63J-221X

NRSA63J-221X

NRSA63J-221X

NRSA63J-221X

NRSA63J-112X

NRSA63J-112X

A

Item

R2616

R2701

R2702

R2703

R2709

R2715

R2716

R2717

R2718

UN560

UN561

UN562

UN563

X 581

X2501

X2551

R2584

R2585

R2586

R2587

R2589

R2591

R2593

R2594

R2595

R2596

R2563

R2564

R2568

R2571

R2572

R2573

R2581

R2582

R2583

R2597

R2611

R2612

R2613

R2614

R2615

R2552

R2553

R2554

R2555

R2557

R2559

R2560

R2561

R2562

R2518

R2519

R2520

R2521

R2522

R2523

R2531

R2532

R2551

R2506

R2507

R2508

R2511

R2512

R2513

R2514

R2515

R2516

R2517

Remarks Area

3-18

RX-9010VBK

A

A

Electrical parts list (Micon board)

Item

C 1

C 44

Parts number

QCZ9104-472

QETN1CM-477Z

Parts name

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

A

CN301

CN303

CN400

CN402

CN601

CN811

CN931

CN932

D 46

D 51

C 993

C 994

CN 55

CN 56

CN 71

CN 81

CN101

CN201

CN241

C 942

C 951

C 952

C 961

C 962

C 971

C 972

C 975

C 981

C 982

C 983

C 984

C 985

C 991

C 992

C 901

C 902

C 903

C 904

C 905

C 921

C 922

C 931

C 932

C 941

C 69

C 70

C 71

C 72

C 73

C 74

C 45

C 51

C 52

C 54

C 55

C 61

C 62

C 63

C 65

C 66

C 68

QCF31HZ-472Z

QETN1EM-107Z

QCF31HZ-472Z

QETN1EM-107Z

QCF31HZ-472Z

QETN1EM-107Z

QCF31HZ-472Z

QETN0JM-477Z

QCBB1HK-331Y

QCBB1HK-331Y

QCBB1HK-331Y

QCBB1HK-331Y

QCBB1HK-103Y

QFLC1HJ-562Z

QFLC1HJ-562Z

QCBB1HK-101Y

QCBB1HK-271Y

QGD2501C1-03Z

QGD2501C1-04Z

QGB2510J1-11

QGB2510J1-09

QGB2501J1-12

QGB2510J1-11

QGB2510J1-12

QGB2510J1-14

QGB2510J1-13

QGF1205C1-10

QGF1205C1-08

QGB2510J1-07

QGA3901F2-03

QGD2501C1-04Z

QGD2501C1-03Z

MTZJ6.2A-T2

1SR35-400A-T5

QCF31HZ-472Z

QFLC2AJ-472Z

QETM1EM-108

QETN1CM-477Z

QCF31HZ-472Z

QFLC2AJ-104Z

QFLC2AJ-104Z

QFLC2AJ-104Z

QETM1VM-338

QETM1VM-108

QFLC1HJ-473Z

QFLC1HJ-473Z

QETN1HM-227Z

QETN1JM-107Z

QETN1HM-226Z

QETN1HM-226Z

QETN1HM-105Z

QETN0JM-107Z

QCZ0205-155Z

QETN0JM-228Z

QETN1HM-225Z

QDVB1EZ-223Y

QETN1EM-107Z

QCF31HZ-472Z

QETN1EM-107Z

QCF31HZ-472Z

QETN1EM-107Z

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

SOCKET

SOCKET

CONNECTOR

CONNECTOR

CONNECTOR

CONNECTOR

CONNECTOR

CONNECTOR

CONNECTOR

CONNECTOR

CONNECTOR

CONNECTOR

CONNECTOR

SOCKET

SOCKET

Z DIODE

DIODE

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

M CAPACITOR

M CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

M CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

M CAPACITOR

M CAPACITOR

M CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

M CAPACITOR

M CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

ML C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

100MF 20% 25V

4700PF +80:-20%

100MF 20% 25V

4700PF +80:-20%

100MF 20% 25V

4700PF +80:-20%

100MF 20% 25V

4700PF +80:-20%

100MF 20% 25V

4700PF +80:-20%

100MF 20% 25V

4700PF +80:-20%

470MF 20% 6.3V

330PF 10% 50V

330PF 10% 50V

330PF 10% 50V

330PF 10% 50V

.010MF 10% 50V

5600PF 5% 50V

5600PF 5% 50V

100PF 10% 50V

270PF 10% 50V

Block No. 06

Remarks

4700PF

470MF 20% 16V

4700PF +80:-20%

4700PF 5% 100V

1000MF 20% 25V

470MF 20% 16V

4700PF +80:-20%

.10MF 5% 100V

.10MF 5% 100V

.10MF 5% 100V

3300MF 20% 35V

1000MF 20% 35V

.047MF 5% 50V

.047MF 5% 50V

220MF 20% 50V

100MF 20% 63V

22MF 20% 50V

22MF 20% 50V

1.0MF 20% 50V

100MF 20% 6.3V

1.5MF

2200MF 20% 6.3V

2.2MF 20% 50V

Area Parts name

SI DIODE

SI DIODE

SI DIODE

GRAND TERMINAL

EARTH PLATE

GND BKT

EARTH PLATE

FUSE CLIP

FUSE CLIP

FUSE CLIP

FUSE CLIP

FUSE CLIP

FUSE CLIP

FILTER

FILTER

PARA RIBON WIRE

PARA RIBON WIRE

PARA RIBON WIRE

IC HOLDER

HEAT SINK

HEAT SINK

HEAT SINK

HEAT SINK

HEAT SINK

HEAT SINK

IC

IC

JACK

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

D TRANSISTOR

D TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

DIODE

DIODE

DIODE

Z DIODE

SI DIODE

DIODE

DIODE

DIODE

DIODE

SI DIODE

DIODE

DIODE

DIODE

Z DIODE

Z DIODE

DIODE

DIODE

DIODE

DIODE

SI DIODE

ZENER DIODE

Z DIODE

Z DIODE

Z DIODE

Z DIODE

Z DIODE

SI DIODE

SI DIODE

SI DIODE

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

Item Parts number

D 978

D 979

D 993

EP 1

EP 51

EP 91

EP901

FC 1

FC 2

FC 61

FC 62

FC 63

FC 64

FL991

FL992

1SS133-T2

1SS133-T2

1SS133-T2

E409182-001SM

QNZ0136-001Z

E406523-001SM

QNZ0136-001Z

QNG0020-001Z

QNG0020-001Z

QNG0020-001Z

QNG0020-001Z

QNG0020-001Z

QNG0020-001Z

QQR0590-001

QQR0590-001

HS971

IC901

IC903

J 91

Q 42

Q 52

Q 53

Q 61

Q 71

Q 74

FW 51 QUM137-10DGZ4

FW831 QUM134-08DGZ4

FW881 QUM133-44DGZ4

HL901

HS921

VYH7237-002

E70945-H40B

HS931

HS941

HS951

HS961

E70945-H40B

E70945-H40B

E70306-001

E70306-001

E70306-001

MN101C49GHM

IC-PST9139-T

QNS0022-001

KTD863/Y/-T

KTD863/Y/-T

KRC105M-T

KRC105M-T

KTA1046/Y/

KTC3200/GL/-T

D 904

D 921

D 931

D 941

D 951

D 961

D 971

D 975

D 976

D 977

D 74

D 75

D 900

D 901

D 902

D 903

D 52

D 53

D 54

D 56

D 57

D 61

D 62

D 63

D 64

D 67

D 71

D 72

D 73

1SR35-400A-T5

1SR35-400A-T5

1SR35-400A-T5

MTZJ6.2B-T2

1SS133-T2

10E2-FD

1SR35-400A-T5

10E2-FD

1SR35-400A-T5

1SS133-T2

1SR35-400A-T5

1SR35-400A-T5

1SR35-400A-T5

MTZJ33C-T2

MTZJ8.2C-T2

1SR35-400A-T5

1SR35-400A-T5

1SR35-400A-T5

1SR35-400A-T5

1SS133-T2

MTZJ5.6C-T2

MTZJ6.2C-T2

MTZJ5.6C-T2

MTZJ13C-T2

MTZJ13C-T2

MTZJ10C-T2

1SS133-T2

1SS133-T2

1SS133-T2

F001

F001

F061

F061

F062

F062 u-h--

Remarks Area

3-19

RX-9010VBK

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

Electrical parts list (Micon board)

Item Parts number Parts name

Q 901

Q 903

KRC107M-T

KRC105M-T

D TRANSISTOR

D TRANSISTOR

A

A

A

R 946

R 947

R 948

R 949

R 951

R 953

R 954

R 955

R 956

R 961

R 937

R 938

R 939

R 940

R 941

R 942

R 943

R 944

R 945

R 916

R 917

R 921

R 922

R 923

R 924

R 925

R 926

R 927

R 928

R 929

R 930

R 931

R 932

R 933

R 72

R 73

R 74

R 91

R 92

R 903

R 908

R 910

R 911

R 915

R 1

R 44

R 53

R 54

R 61

R 67

Q 904

Q 905

Q 906

Q 907

Q 908

Q 921

Q 931

Q 941

Q 951

Q 961

Q 971

QRE141J-221Y

QRE141J-221Y

QRE141J-221Y

QRJ146J-4R7X

QRK126J-330X

QRK126J-330X

QRJ146J-272X

QRE141J-221Y

QRE141J-221Y

QRE141J-221Y

QRE141J-221Y

QRE141J-221Y

QRE141J-221Y

QRK126J-120X

QRJ146J-222X

QRE141J-221Y

QRE141J-221Y

QRE141J-221Y

QRK126J-120X

QRT022J-8R2

QRL012J-100

QRK126J-330X

QRK126J-330X

QRJ146J-272X

QRE141J-103Y

QRE141J-221Y

QRE141J-221Y

QRE141J-221Y

QRE141J-221Y

QRE141J-221Y

QRE141J-103Y

QRL017J-390

QRL017J-390

QRJ146J-272X

KRC105M-T

KRC105M-T

KRC105M-T

KRC105M-T

KRC105M-T

2SD2395/EF/

2SD2395/EF/

2SD2395/EF/

2SD2395/EF/

KTA1046/Y/

2SD2395/EF/

QRZ9044-335

QRE141J-821Y

QRJ146J-6R8X

QRE141J-821Y

QRJ146J-3R3X

QRJ146J-120X

QRJ146J-332X

QRE141J-223Y

QRE141J-104Y

QRL022J-471

QRL022J-471

QRE141J-331Y

QRE141J-223Y

QRE141J-223Y

QRE141J-472Y

QRT022J-8R2

Block No. 06

Remarks

UNF MF RESISTOR

UNF OMF RESISTOR

UNF C RESISTOR

UNF C RESISTOR

UNF C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

UNF OMF RESISTOR

UNF OMF RESISTOR

UNF C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

UNF C RESISTOR

UNF C RESISTOR

UNF C RESISTOR

UNF C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

UNF C RESISTOR

UNF C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

UNF C RESISTOR

D TRANSISTOR

D TRANSISTOR

D TRANSISTOR

D TRANSISTOR

D TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

COMP RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

UNF C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

UNF C RESISTOR

UNF C RESISTOR

3.3M 1/0W

820 5% 1/4W

6.8 5% 1/4W

820 5% 1/4W

3.3 5% 1/4W

12 5% 1/4W

UNF C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

3.3K 5% 1/4W

22K 5% 1/4W

C RESISTOR 100K 5% 1/4W

UNF OMF RESISTOR 470 5% 1/2W

UNF OMF RESISTOR 470 5% 1/2W

C RESISTOR 330 5% 1/4W

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

UNF MF RESISTOR

22K 5% 1/4W

22K 5% 1/4W

4.7K 5% 1/4W

8.2 5% 1/2W

220 5% 1/4W

220 5% 1/4W

220 5% 1/4W

4.7 5% 1/4W

33 5% 1/2W

33 5% 1/2W

2.7K 5% 1/4W

220 5% 1/4W

220 5% 1/4W

220 5% 1/4W

220 5% 1/4W

220 5% 1/4W

220 5% 1/4W

12 5% 1/2W

2.2K 5% 1/4W

220 5% 1/4W

220 5% 1/4W

220 5% 1/4W

12 5% 1/2W

8.2 5% 1/2W

10 5% 1/1W

33 5% 1/2W

33 5% 1/2W

2.7K 5% 1/4W

10K 5% 1/4W

220 5% 1/4W

220 5% 1/4W

220 5% 1/4W

220 5% 1/4W

220 5% 1/4W

10K 5% 1/4W

39 5% 1/1W

39 5% 1/1W

2.7K 5% 1/4W

Area

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

Item

R 986

R 987

R 991

R 992

R 993

R 994

R 995

R 996

R 997

R 998

R 980

R 981

R 982

R 983

R 984

R 985

R 999

RY 1

RY 62

RY 63

T 2

TA 1

TA 2

TH 71

X 901

R 963

R 965

R 966

R 967

R 968

R 969

R 971

R 973

R 975

R 976

R 977

R 978

R 979

Parts name

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

UNF C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

UNF C RESISTOR

UNF C RESISTOR

UNF C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

C RESISTOR

RELAY

RELAY

RELAY

POWER TRANSF

TAB

TAB

POSISTOR

RESONATOR

Parts number

QRJ146J-222X

QRE141J-103Y

QRE141J-103Y

QRE141J-103Y

QRE141J-103Y

QRE141J-103Y

QRJ146J-120X

QRJ146J-332X

QRJ146J-220X

QRE141J-472Y

QRE141J-472Y

QRE141J-472Y

QRE141J-472Y

QRE141J-221Y

QRE141J-221Y

QRE141J-221Y

QRE141J-221Y

QRE141J-221Y

QRE141J-221Y

QRE141J-221Y

QRE141J-221Y

QRE141J-472Y

QRE141J-472Y

QRE141J-622Y

QRE141J-512Y

QRE141J-133Y

QRE141J-332Y

QRE141J-153Y

QRE141J-562Y

QRE141J-103Y

QSK0098-001

QSK0088-001

QSK0088-001

QQT0317-001

QNZ0079-001Z

QNZ0079-001Z

QAD0095-4R7Z

QAX0246-001Z

Remarks

220 5% 1/4W

220 5% 1/4W

220 5% 1/4W

220 5% 1/4W

220 5% 1/4W

220 5% 1/4W

220 5% 1/4W

220 5% 1/4W

4.7K 5% 1/4W

4.7K 5% 1/4W

6.2K 5% 1/4W

5.1K 5% 1/4W

13K 5% 1/4W

3.3K 5% 1/4W

15K 5% 1/4W

5.6K 5% 1/4W

10K 5% 1/4W

2.2K 5% 1/4W

10K 5% 1/4W

10K 5% 1/4W

10K 5% 1/4W

10K 5% 1/4W

10K 5% 1/4W

12 5% 1/4W

3.3K 5% 1/4W

22 5% 1/4W

4.7K 5% 1/4W

4.7K 5% 1/4W

4.7K 5% 1/4W

4.7K 5% 1/4W

Area

3-20

RX-9010VBK

A

Electrical parts list (Tuner board)

Item Parts number Parts name

AT101

BK 1

QNB0014-001

LV31618-001A

ANT TERMINAL

SHIELD BKT

Q 102

Q 103

Q 121

R 103

R 104

R 105

R 106

R 107

R 108

R 109

CF103

CN111

D 121

D 123

D 124

D 125

D 129

IC102

IC121

C 149

C 150

C 156

C 157

C 158

C 161

C 162

C 163

C 164

C 168

C 184

C 185

C 186

CF101

CF102

C 137

C 138

C 139

C 140

C 141

C 143

C 144

C 146

C 147

C 148

C 129

C 130

C 133

C 134

C 135

C 136

C 101

C 103

C 105

C 107

C 111

C 112

C 121

C 122

C 123

C 126

C 128

QAX0519-001Z

QGB2501K2-12

1SS133-T2

1SS133-T2

1SS133-T2

1SS133-T2

1SS133-T2

LA1838

LC72136N

2SC535/BC/-T

2SC461/BC/-T

KRA103M-T

NRSA02J-221X

NRSA02J-272X

NRSA02J-391X

NRSA02J-102X

NRSA02J-391X

NRSA02J-332X

NRSA02J-221X

QEKC1HM-105Z

QEKC1CM-226Z

QDGB1HK-102Y

NCB21HK-473X

QEKC1CM-226Z

QEKC1CM-106Z

QEKC1CM-106Z

NCB21HK-223X

NCB21HK-473X

QEKC1HM-105Z

QEKC1CM-107Z

QEKC1CM-106Z

QEKC1CM-106Z

QAX0419-001Z

QAX0604-001Z

NCB21HK-103X

NCB21HK-223X

NCB21HK-223X

QEKC1CM-226Z

NCB21HK-473X

NDC21HJ-120X

NDC21HJ-120X

NDC21HJ-120X

NCB21HK-473X

NCS21HJ-101X

QENC1HM-474Z

NCB21HK-102X

QEKC1AM-107Z

QEKC1CM-226Z

NCB21HK-222X

NCB21HK-223X

QEKC1HM-105Z

NCB21HK-331X

NCB21HK-473X

NCB21HK-333X

NCB21HK-333X

NCB21HK-473X

NCB21HK-223X

NCB21HK-473X

QEKC1HM-105Z

QEKC1HM-105Z

QEKC1HM-224Z

C FILTER

CONECTOR

SI DIODE

SI DIODE

SI DIODE

SI DIODE

SI DIODE

IC

IC

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

TRANSISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C FILTER

C FILTER

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

NP E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

C CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

E CAPACITOR

Block No. 07

Remarks Area

22MF 20% 16V

.47MF 20% 50V

100MF 20% 10V

22MF 20% 16V

1.0MF 20% 50V

1.0MF 20% 50V

1.0MF 20% 50V

.22MF 20% 50V

1.0MF 20% 50V

22MF 20% 16V

22MF 20% 16V

10MF 20% 16V

10MF 20% 16V

1.0MF 20% 50V

100MF 20% 16V

10MF 20% 16V

10MF 20% 16V

FM+B

A

Item

A

R 141

R 142

R 143

R 144

R 145

R 146

R 147

R 150

R 157

R 158

R 161

R 162

R 182

R 183

R 184

RF101

T 111

T 142

X 121

R 115

R 119

R 122

R 124

R 126

R 127

R 128

R 129

R 130

R 132

R 133

R 134

R 140

Parts number

NRSA02J-104X

NRSA02J-103X

NRSA02J-472X

NRSA02J-222X

NRSA02J-562X

NRSA02J-822X

NRSA02J-472X

NRSA02J-222X

QRZ9005-680X

NRSA02J-393X

NRSA02J-392X

NRSA02J-102X

NRSA02J-183X

NRSA02J-102X

NRSA02J-470X

NRSA02J-562X

NRSA02J-332X

NRSA02J-103X

NRSA02J-392X

NRSA02J-332X

NRSA02J-331X

NRSA02J-682X

NRSA02J-682X

NRSA02J-102X

NRSA02J-102X

NRSA02J-103X

NRSA02J-103X

NRSA02J-103X

QAU0124-002

QQR0796-001

QQR0973-001

QAX0402-001

Parts name

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

F RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

MG RESISTOR

FRONT END

COIL BLOCK

IFT

CRYSTAL

Remarks

68 1/0W

Area

3-21

RX-9010VBK

Packing materials and accessories parts list

Block No.

M

Block No.

M

2 M M

3 M M

A1

1/2

P4

P1

A2~A10

2/2

P4

P3

P5

1/2

P6

P3

2/2

P5

P2

3-22

A

Parts list (Packing)

Item Parts number

P 1 QPA02503505P

P 2

P 3

P 4

LV20989-018A

LV32034-003A

LV20947-001A

P 5

P 6

LV20948-001A

QPC06507015P

Parts name

POLY BAG

CARTON BOX

SHEET

PACKING PAD

PACKING PAD

POLY BAG

A

Parts list

Item

A 1

(Accessories)

Parts number

RM-SRX9010J

A 2

A 3

LV42570-001A

-----------

A 4

A 5

A 6

A 7

A 8

A 9

A 10

LVT0620-001B

QAL0236-001

QAL0219-001

EWP503-001C

QAL0204-001

BT-51020-2

YU20333

Parts name

REMOCON

SHEET

BATTERY

INST BOOK

ANTENNA

LED CABLE ASSY

ANT.WIRE

AM LOOP ANT

J=REGIST CARD

SAFETY INST.

RX-9010VBK

Q'ty Description

1 FOR INST

1

2

1

1

1 FOR SET

Block No. M2MM

Area

Q'ty

1

1

2

1

1

1

1

1

1 ENG

1

Block No. M3MM

Description Area

3-23

RX-9010VBK

VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED

AUDIO & COMMUNICATION BUSINESS DIVISION

PERSONAL & MOBILE NETWORK BUSINESS UNIT. 10-1,1chome,Ohwatari-machi,Maebashi-city,371-8543,Japan

(No.20921)

Printed in Japan

200103(V)

AUDIO/VIDEO CONTROL RECEIVER

RX-9010VBK

MAIN ROOM

MAIN ROOM

SUB ROOM

SUB ROOM

ON/OFF ON/OFF

STANDBY

TV/CATV/DBS

POWER

ON

VCR1

POWER

DVD DVD MULTI PHONO CD

VCR 1

TV/DBS

VCR 2

VIDEO

TAPE/MD CDR

FM/AM USB AUDIO

ANALOG/DIGITAL

INPUT

SOUND

L—BALANCE—R

1

CENTER

2

SUBWFR

LEVEL+

4

REAR·L

7

DIGITAL EQ LEVEL–

10

RETURN

SURROUND TEST

ON/OFF

LINE DIRECT

5

REAR·R

8

0

FM MODE

DSP

MODE

EFFECT

3

ROOM SIZE

6

LIVENESS

9

CENTER TONE

+ 10

100+

BASS BOOST

MIDNIGHT MODE

SLEEP CONTROL DIMMER

TV

CATV/

DBS

/REW

DOWN

REC

PLAY

TUNING

STOP

FF/

UP

PAUSE

TV VOL

TV/VIDEO

CHANNEL

MUTING

VOLUME

MENU

TEXT

DISPLAY

SET

DVD

MENU

EXIT

RM-SRX9010J REMOTE CONTROL

A/V CONTROL RECEIVER

STANDBY

POWER

SPEAKERS ON/OFF

1

MAIN ROOM

2

SUB ROOM

SUBWOOFER OUT ON/OFF

RX-9010V AUDIO/VIDEO CONTROL RECEIVER

FM/AM TUNING FM/AM PRESET FM MODE

MEMORY

D I G I T A L

S U R R O U N D

D I G I T A L

SURROUND ON/OFF

USB AUDIO

DSP MODE

S-VIDEO

INPUT

ANALOG/DIGITAL MIDNIGHT MODE

INPUT ATT

VIDEO

VIDEO

L—AUDIO—R

DVD MULTI DVD VCR 1 VCR 2 VIDEO TV SOUND/DBS

DIGITAL

EQ

LEVEL

ADJUST

PHONO CD CDR

SOURCE NAME

TAPE / MD USB AUDIO FM / AM

EFFECT SETTING

CONTROL

DOWN UP

SOURCE NAME

MAIN ROOM ON/OFF SUB ROOM ON/OFF SUB ROOM CONTROL DIMMER

MASTER VOLUME

PHONES

LINE DIRECT

BASS BOOST

D I G I T A L

INSTRUCTIONS

01.2.15, 0:19 PM

For Customer Use:

Enter below the Model No. and Serial

No. which are located either on the rear, bottom or side of the cabinet. Retain this information for future reference.

Model No.

Serial No.

LVT0620-001A

[J]

RX-9010VBK[J]cover_f 1

Warnings, Cautions and Others/

Mises en garde, précautions et indications diverses

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK.

DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK)

NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.

REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated

"dangerous voltage" within the product's enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance.

WARNING: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE

OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE

THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

For the main unit:

Declaration of Conformity

Model Number:

Trade Name:

Responsible Party:

Address:

Telephone Number:

RX-9010VBK

JVC

JVC Americas Corp.

1700 Valley Road, Wayne

New Jersey 07470

973-315-5000

This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Pour l’appareil principal:

Déclaration de conformité

Numéro de modèle: RX-9010VBK

Nom de marque: JVC

Personne responsable: US JVC CORP.

Adresse: 1700 Valley Road

Wayne, N.J. 07470

Numéro de téléphone: (973) 315-5000

Cet ensemble se conforme à la partie 15 des règles de la FCC

(Federal Communications Commission), Le fonctionnement est sujet aux deux conditions suivantes:

(1) Cet appareil ne peut pas causer d’interférences nuisibles, et (2) cet appareil doit accepter toute interférence reçue, comprenant des interférences qui peuvent causer un mauvais fonctionnement.

CAUTION

To reduce the risk of electrical shocks, fire, etc.:

1.

Do not remove screws, covers or cabinet.

2.

Do not expose this appliance to rain or moisture.

ATTENTION

Afin d’éviter tout risque d’électrocution, d’incendie, etc.:

1.

Ne pas enlever les vis ni les panneaux et ne pas ouvrir le coffret de l’appareil.

2.

Ne pas exposer l’appareil à la pluie ni à l’humidité.

Note to CATV system installer:

This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s attention to Section 820-40 of the NEC which provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical.

Caution –– POWER switch!

Disconnect the mains plug to shut the power off completely. The

POWER switch in any position does not disconnect the mains line. The power can be remote controlled.

Attention –– Commutateur POWER!

Déconnecter la fiche de secteur pour couper complètement le courant. Le commutateur POWER ne coupe jamais complètement la ligne de secteur, quelle que soit sa position. Le courant peut être télécommandé.

For the main unit:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.

These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation.

This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

Caution –– SPEAKER LOAD SELECTOR switch!

Match the position of SPEAKER LOAD SELECTOR switch on the back panel to the impedance of the speaker connected, to protect from overheating.

For the remote control:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

G-1

RX-9010VBK[J,C]safety_f 1 01.2.15, 0:19 PM

For Canada/pour Le Canada

For the main unit / Pour l’appareil principal

THIS DIGITAL APPARATUS DOES NOT EXCEED THE CLASS

B LIMITS FOR RADIO NOISE EMISSIONS FROM DIGITAL

APPARATUS AS SET OUT IN THE INTERFERENCE-CAUSING

EQUIPMENT STANDARD ENTITLED “DIGITAL APPARATUS,”

ICES-003 OF THE DEPARTMENT OF COMMUNICATIONS.

CET APPAREIL NUMERIQUE RESPECTE LES LIMITES DE

BRUITS RADIOELECTRIQUES APPLICABLES AUX APPAREILS

NUMERIQUES DE CLASSE B PRESCRITES DANS LA NORME

SUR LE MATERIEL BROUILLEUR; “APPAREILS

NUMERIQUES”, NMB-003 EDICTEE PAR LE MINISTRE DES

COMMUNICATIONS.

For Canada/pour le Canada

CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE

BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT

ATTENTION: POUR EVITER LES CHOCS ELECTRIQUES,

INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA

BORNE CORRESPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER

JUSQUAU FOND

For the remote control / Pour la télécommande

This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Cet appareil est conforme au règlement CNR-210 de l’industrie du

Canada. L’utilisation de ce dispositif est autorisée seulement aux conditions suivantes: (1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage et (2) l’utilisateur du dispositif doit être prêt à accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique reçu, même si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif.

Caution: Proper Ventilation

To avoide risk of electric shock and fire and to protect from damage.

Locate the apparatus as follows:

Attention: Ventilation Correcte

Pour éviter les chocs électriques, l’incendie et tout autre dégât.

Disposer l’appareil en tenant compte des impératifs suivants

Avant: Rien ne doit gêner le dégagement

Front:

Sides:

Top:

Back:

No obstructions open spacing.

No obstructions in 10 cm from the sides.

No obstructions in 10 cm from the top.

No obstructions in 15 cm from the back

Flancs:

Dessus:

Laisser 10 cm de dégagement latéral

Laisser 10 cm de dégagement supérieur

Arrière: Laisser 15 cm de dégagement arrière

Dessous: Rien ne doit obstruer par dessous; poser l’appareil

Bottom: No obstructions, place on the level surface.

In addition, maintain the best possible air circulation as illustrated.

sur une surface plate.

Veiller également à ce que l’air circule le mieux possible comme illustré.

Spacing 15 cm or more

Dégagement de 15 cm ou plus

RX-9010VBK

Wall or obstructions

Mur, ou obstruction

Front

Avant

Stand height 15 cm or more

Hauteur du socle: 15 cm ou plus

Floor

Plancher

G-2

RX-9010VBK[J,C]safety_f 2 01.2.15, 0:19 PM

Table of Contents

Introduction ................................................ 2

Features ...................................................................................... 2

Precautions ................................................................................. 2

Parts Identification ...................................... 3

Getting Started ........................................... 5

Before Installation ...................................................................... 5

Checking the Supplied Accessories ........................................... 5

Connecting the FM and AM Antennas ....................................... 5

Connecting the Speakers ............................................................ 6

Connecting Audio/Video Components ....................................... 7

7

Analog Connections ............................................................... 7

7

Digital Connections .............................................................. 10

7

USB Connection ................................................................... 11

Setting Up the RF Rod Antenna ............................................... 12

Setting Up the IR Signal Transmitter ....................................... 12

Connecting the Power Cord ..................................................... 13

Putting Batteries in the Remote Control .................................. 13

Multi-room Operations ............................... 14

Basic Operating Procedure for Main Room ............................. 15

Basic Operating Procedure for Sub-Room ............................... 16

Main Room Basic Operations ...................... 17

Turning the Power On and Off (Standby) ................................ 17

Canceling the Main Room Operations ..................................... 18

Selecting the Main Room Source to Play ................................ 18

Adjusting the Main Room Volume ........................................... 19

Activating the Main Room Front Speakers .............................. 19

Adjusting the Equalization Patterns ......................................... 20

Listening at Night — Midnight Mode ..................................... 21

Activating the Subwoofer Sound ............................................. 21

Reinforcing the Bass ................................................................ 21

Muting the Main Room Sound ................................................. 21

Attenuating the Input Signal .................................................... 21

Selecting the Line Direct Function .......................................... 22

Changing the Display Brightness ............................................. 22

Using the Sleep Timer .............................................................. 22

Recording a Source .................................................................. 22

Sub-Room Operations ................................. 23

Turning the Power On and Off (Standby) and Selecting the Sub-room Operations ................................................... 23

Canceling the Sub-room Operations ........................................ 24

Selecting the Sub-room Source to Play .................................... 25

Adjusting the Sub-room Volume .............................................. 25

Activating the Sub-room Front Speakers ................................. 26

Muting the Sub-room Sound .................................................... 26

Operating the Playback Source for the Sub-room .................... 26

Basic Settings ........................................... 27

Setting the Front Speakers Either for the Main Room or Sub-room ....................................................................... 27

Adjusting the Front Speaker Output Balance ........................... 27

Setting the Subwoofer Information .......................................... 28

Adjusting the Subwoofer Output Level .................................... 28

Setting the Speakers for a Surround Field ................................ 29

Digital Input (DIGITAL IN) Terminal Setting ......................... 30

Selecting the Analog or Digital Input Mode ............................ 31

Selecting the Video Input Terminal .......................................... 32

Changing the Source Name ...................................................... 33

1

Showing the Text Information on the Display ......................... 33

Basic Setting and Adjustment — Auto Memory ...................... 34

Receiving Radio Broadcasts ........................ 35

Tuning in Stations Manually .................................................... 35

Using Preset Tuning ................................................................. 35

Selecting the FM Reception Mode ........................................... 36

Creating a Surround Field in the Main Room........ 37

Reproducing the Sound Field ................................................... 38

Available DSP Modes According to the Speaker Arrangement ....... 39

Adjusting the Surround Modes ................................................ 40

Adjusting the DAP Modes ....................................................... 41

Adjusting the Surround Modes with the DAP Modes .............. 43

Adjusting the 5 CH/4 CH Stereo Mode ................................... 46

Adjusting the 3D-PHONIC Modes .......................................... 47

Using the DVD MULTI Playback Mode .......... 49

Activating the DVD MULTI Playback Mode .......................... 49

Using the On-Screen Menus ........................ 50

7 Showing the MENU on the TV Screen ................................ 50

7 Activating the Surround Modes ............................................ 50

7 Activating the DAP Modes ................................................... 50

7 Selecting the Analog or Digital Input Mode ........................... 50

7 Adjusting the Equalization Patterns ..................................... 51

7 Adjusting the Surround and DSP Modes .............................. 51

7 Adjusting the DVD MULTI Playback Mode ........................ 52

7 Listening at Night — Midnight Mode .................................. 52

7 Attenuating the Input Signal ................................................. 52

7 Selecting the Line Direct Function ....................................... 53

7 Selecting the Bass Boost Function ....................................... 53

7 Activating the Subwoofer Sound .......................................... 53

7 Operating the Tuner .............................................................. 53

7 Storing the Preset Stations .................................................... 54

7 Setting the Basic Setting Items ............................................. 54

COMPU LINK Remote Control System ......... 55

TEXT COMPU LINK Remote Control System .. 57

7

Showing the Disc Information on the TV Screen ................. 58

7

Searching for a Disc (Only for the CD player) ..................... 59

7

Entering the Disc Information .............................................. 60

AV COMPU LINK Remote Control System .... 62

Operating JVC’s Audio/Video Components ... 65

Operating Audio Components .................................................. 65

Operating Video Components .................................................. 67

Operating Other Manufacturers’ Equipment ... 68

Troubleshooting ......................................... 72

Specifications ............................................ 74

You can use “On-screen Menu” for most of the main room operations. For details, see page 50.

Indicates the functions YOU CAN ALSO USE when the receiver is ready for the sub-room operations.

EN01-13.RX-9010VBK[J]f 1 01.2.15, 0:14 PM

Introduction

We would like to thank you for purchasing one of our JVC products.

Before operating this unit, read this manual carefully and thoroughly to obtain the best possible performance from your unit, and retain this manual for future reference.

Features

Dolby Digital Decoder Incorporated

You can enjoy Dolby Digital, one of the most advanced home theater sound systems available. Dolby Digital, with five fullrange channels and a LFE (subwoofer) channel, lets you enjoy the most spectacular theater sound at home when you view movies on

DVD.

Compatible with DTS Digital Surround

The RX-9010VBK is compatible with DTS Digital Surround as well. DTS Digital Surround is the digital movie soundtrack format that delivers 5.1-channel audio like Dolby Digital. Using a low audio-data compression rate, it features natural, solid and clear sound.

Multi-room Operations

You can connect two pairs of the front speakers to the

RX-9010VBK, and use them to listen to different sources in the different rooms (Main room and Sub-room) at the same time.

RF/IR Multi-brand Remote Control

The remote control sends out not only IR (infrared) signals but also RF (radio frequency) signals as coded commands to control the receiver. The RF rod antenna can receive the RF (Radio

Frequency) signals sent from the remote control to operate the receiver. In addition, the supplied RF signal transmitter can transmit IR signals which could control other video components.

• The remote control provided for this receiver can transmit control signals for many manufacturers’ components.

COMPU LINK Remote Control System

The COMPU LINK remote control system allows you to operate other JVC audio components from this receiver.

TEXT COMPU LINK Remote Control System

The TEXT COMPU LINK remote control system has been developed to deal with the disc information recorded on the CD

Text and MDs. Using this information on the discs, you can operate the CD player or MD recorder through the receiver.

AV COMPU LINK Remote Control System

The AV COMPU LINK remote control system allows you to operate other JVC video components from this receiver.

Precautions

Power sources

• When unplugging the receiver from the wall outlet, always pull the plug, not the AC power cord.

• Do not handle the AC power cord with wet hands.

• If you are not going to operate the receiver for an extended period of time, unplug the AC power cord from the wall outlet.

Multi-room operations

• Do not use the remote control outdoors or install the speakers outdoors.

• When operating the receiver from the place where you cannot see the receiver (for example, when controlling the receiver installed in the living room from the kitchen), pay attention to the following not to surprise other people:

– Be careful not to turn up the volume so high when controlling the receiver without listening to the playback sound.

– Be careful not to surprise other people with a sudden sound coming out of the receiver when turning it on. (A sudden stop of the sound may also surprise other people.)

• If the receiver operates by itself or malfunctions, the following causes will be considered:

– Interference to RF communication between the receiver and the remote control from outside.

– The remote control is operated unintentionally. For example, a book is placed on the remote control, possibly, depressing some buttons on the remote control.

• If your neighbour uses the same or similar RF remote control system, the receiver may happen to receive the RF signals sent from such an RF remote control system, which could cause your receiver to be operated unintentionally. If this happen, stop using the RF rod antenna and the remote control, and consult your JVC dealer or the nearest JVC Service Center.

Others

• Should any metallic object or liquid fall into the unit, unplug the unit and consult your dealer before operating any further.

• Do not disassemble the unit since there are no user serviceable parts inside.

If anything goes wrong, unplug the AC power cord and consult your

JVC dealer.

01.2.15, 0:14 PM

2

EN01-13.RX-9010VBK[J]f 2

Parts Identification

Refer to the pages in parentheses for details.

Front Panel

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 p q w e r t y

STANDBY

POWER

SPEAKERS ON/OFF

1

MAIN ROOM

2

SUB ROOM

SUBWOOFER OUT ON/OFF

RX-9010V AUDIO/VIDEO CONTROL RECEIVER

FM/AM TUNING FM/AM PRESET

MEMORY

D I G I T A L

S U R R O U N D

D I G I T A L

SURROUND ON/OFF DSP MODE

USB AUDIO

S-VIDEO

INPUT

ANALOG/DIGITAL MIDNIGHT MODE

INPUT ATT

VIDEO

VIDEO

L—AUDIO—R

ANALOG L C R

LINEAR PCM

SUBWFR

DIGITAL

LS S

LFE

RS

SPEAKERS

1 2 SUBROOM

DGTL AUTO DVD MULTI PRO LOGIC

DSP

AUTO MUTING TUNED STEREO

3D–PHONIC MIDNIGHT MODE

HEADPHONE DIGITAL EQ INPUT ATT ONE TOUCH OPERATION

MAIN ROOM

SUB ROOM

SLEEP VOLUME

DVD MULTI

PHONO

DVD

CD

VCR 1

CDR

VCR 2 VIDEO TV SOUND/DBS

SOURCE NAME

TAPE / MD USB AUDIO FM / AM

DIGITAL

EQ

LEVEL

ADJUST

EFFECT SETTING

CONTROL

DOWN UP

MAIN ROOM ON/OFF SUB ROOM ON/OFF SUB ROOM CONTROL DIMMER

MASTER VOLUME

SOURCE NAME

PHONES

LINE DIRECT

BASS BOOST u i o ; a s d f g h j k l

1 POWER button and STANDBY lamp (15 – 17, 23)

2 • SPEAKERS ON/OFF 1 (MAIN ROOM) buttons (15, 20)

• SPEAKERS ON/OFF 2 (SUB ROOM) buttons (15, 20, 26)

3 FM/AM TUNING

5

/

∞

buttons (35)

4 DSP MODE button and lamp (42, 45, 46)

5 FM/AM PRESET

5

/

∞

buttons (35, 36)

6 • INPUT ANALOG/DIGITAL button (31)

• INPUT ATT button (21)

7 FM MODE button (36)

8 MEMORY button (35, 36)

9 Display (17, 18, 23, 25) p DIGITAL EQ button (20) q LEVEL ADJUST button (27, 28, 41, 45, 46, 48, 49) w Remote sensor (13) e MAIN ROOM ON/OFF button (18) r SUB ROOM ON/OFF button (16, 23, 24) t SUB ROOM CONTROL button (16, 23, 24) y DIMMER button (22) u PHONES jack (20) i SUBWOOFER OUT ON/OFF button (21) o SURROUND ON/OFF button and lamp (41, 45)

; USB AUDIO terminal (11) a VIDEO input terminals (9) s MIDNIGHT MODE button (21) d Source selecting buttons and lamps (18, 25)

DVD MULTI, DVD, VCR 1, VCR 2, VIDEO,

TV SOUND/DBS, PHONO, CD, CDR, TAPE/MD, USB

AUDIO, FM/AM f SOURCE NAME buttons (33) g EFFECT button (41, 42, 45 – 48) h CONTROL UP

5

/DOWN

∞

buttons

(20, 27 – 34, 41, 42, 45 – 49) j SETTING button (27 – 34) k MASTER VOLUME control (15, 16, 19, 25) l BASS BOOST button and lamp (21)

/ LINE DIRECT button and lamp (22)

/

3

EN01-13.RX-9010VBK[J]f 3 01.2.15, 0:14 PM

Remote Control

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

-

1

2

3 a b

STANDBY

MAIN ROOM

MAIN ROOM

SUB ROOM

SUB ROOM

ON/OFF ON/OFF

TV/CATV/DBS

POWER

ON

VCR1

POWER

MAIN ROOM SUB ROOM

=

~

!

DVD DVD MULTI PHONO CD

CDR

VCR 1 VCR 2 TAPE/MD

TV/DBS VIDEO FM/AM USB AUDIO

ANALOG/DIGITAL L—BALANCE—R

INPUT

SOUND

1

CENTER

4

LEVEL+ REAR•L

7

/P

LEVEL–

DIGITAL EQ

10

RETURN

SURROUND TEST

ON/OFF

LINE DIRECT

EFFECT

2

SUBWFR

5

REAR•R

8

3

ROOM SIZE

6

LIVENESS

9

CENTER TONE

0

FM MODE

DSP

+ 10

100+

BASS BOOST

MODE

MIDNIGHT MODE

/ REW

DOWN

REC

SLEEP

PLAY

TUNING

STOP

DIMMER

TV

CATV/

DBS

FF/

UP

PAUSE

TV VOL CHANNEL

TV/VIDEO

MUTING

VOLUME

MENU

TEXT

DISPLAY

SET

DVD

MENU

EXIT

RM-SRX9010J

REMOTE CONTROL

A/V CONTROL RECEIVER

@

# c

$

%

^

&

*

(

)

_

+

1 MAIN ROOM/SUB ROOM selector (15 – 17, 23, 24)

2 MAIN ROOM ON/OFF button (18)

SUB ROOM ON/OFF button (24)

3 Display window (17, 23, 27, 40, 49, 50, 58, 65, 67, 68) a. MAIN ROOM/SUB ROOM indicators b. Remote control mode operation indicator c. Signal transmission indicator

Lights up when transmitting the remote control signals.

4 Source selecting buttons (18, 25)

DVD, DVD MULTI, PHONO, CD, VCR 1, VCR 2,

TAPE/MD, CDR, TV/DBS, VIDEO, FM/AM, USB AUDIO

5 ANALOG/DIGITAL INPUT button (32)

6 SOUND button (20, 28, 40, 43, 44, 46 – 49, 65)

7 LEVEL +/LEVEL – buttons (20, 28, 40, 43, 44, 47 – 49)

8 TEST button (40, 44)

9 SURROUND ON/OFF button (39, 40, 44)

0 LINE DIRECT button (22)

SLEEP button (22)

= Operating buttons for audio/video components (35, 65 – 70)

~ On-screen operation buttons

MENU, SET, EXIT,

%

, fi

,

@

,

#

(50, 58, 67, 70)

!

DVD MENU button (67, 70)

@ AUDIO POWER buttons

STANDBY, ON (15 – 17, 24)

# AUDIO POWER buttons

TV/CATV/DBS POWER, VCR 1 POWER (67 – 70)

$ • 10 keys for selecting preset channels (36)

• 10 keys for adjusting sound

(20, 28, 36, 40, 41, 43 – 45, 47 – 49, 65)

• 10 keys for operating audio/video components

(65 – 70)

% BASS BOOST button (21)

^ DSP MODE button (43, 44, 47, 48)

& MIDNIGHT MODE button (21)

* TV/CATV/DBS selector (67, 68)

( DIMMER button (22)

) VOLUME +/– button (15, 16, 19, 25)

_ MUTING button (21, 26)

+ TEXT DISPLAY button (58)

01.2.15, 0:14 PM

4

EN01-13.RX-9010VBK[J]f 4

Getting Started

This section explains how to connect audio/video components and speakers to the receiver, and how to connect the power supply.

Before Installation

General

• Be sure your hands are dry.

• Turn the power off to all components.

• Read the manuals supplied with the components you are going to connect.

Locations

• Install the receiver in a location that is level and protected from moisture.

• The temperature around the receiver must be between –5˚C and

35˚C (23˚F and 95˚F).

• Make sure there is good ventilation around the receiver. Poor ventilation could cause overheating and damage the receiver.

Handling the receiver

• Do not insert any metal object into the receiver.

• Do not disassemble the receiver or remove screws, covers, or cabinet.

• Do not expose the receiver to rain or moisture.

Connecting the FM and AM Antennas

FM Antenna Connections

A

ANTENNA

FM 75

COAXIAL

AM

LOOP

AM

EXT

B

ANTENNA

FM 75

COAXIAL

AM

LOOP

AM

EXT

FM Antenna

ANTENNA

FM 75

COAXIAL

Extend the supplied FM antenna horizontally.

AM

LOOP

Checking the Supplied Accessories

Check to be sure you have all of the following items, which are supplied with the receiver.

The number in the parentheses indicates quantity of the pieces supplied.

• Remote Control (1)

• Batteries (2)

• AM Loop Antenna (1)

• FM Antenna (1)

• RF Rod Antenna (1)

• IR Signal Transmitter (1)

If anything is missing, contact your dealer immediately.

AM

EXT

Outdoor FM Antenna Cable

(not supplied)

A. Using the Supplied FM Antenna

The FM antenna provided can be connected to the FM 75

Ω

COAXIAL terminal as a temporary measure.

B. Using the Standard Type Connector with Outdoor FM

Antenna (Not Supplied)

A standard type connector should be connected to the FM 75

Ω

COAXIAL terminal.

Note:

If reception is poor, connect the outdoor antenna.

Before attaching a 75

Ω coaxial cable (the kind with a round wire going to an outdoor antenna), disconnect the supplied FM antenna.

5

EN01-13.RX-9010VBK[J]f 5 01.2.15, 0:14 PM

AM Antenna Connections

ANTENNA

FM 75

COAXIAL

Snap the tabs on the loop into the slots of the base to assemble the

AM loop.

Basic connecting procedure

1 2 3

RIGHT RIGHT

LEFT LEFT

4

RIGHT

LEFT

1

AM

LOOP

AM

EXT

AM Loop Antenna

2 3

1 Cut, twist and remove the insulation at the end of each speaker signal cable (not supplied).

2 Turn the knob counterclockwise.

3 Insert the speaker signal cable.

4 Turn the knob clockwise.

Outdoor single vinyl-covered wire (not supplied)

Turn the loop until you have the best reception.

Notes:

• If the AM loop antenna wire is covered with vinyl, remove the vinyl by twisting it as shown in the diagram.

• Make sure the antenna conductors do not touch any other terminals, connecting cords and power cord. This could cause poor reception.

• If reception is poor, connect an outdoor single vinyl-covered wire to the AM EXT terminal. (Keep the AM loop antenna connected.)

Connecting the front speakers

You can connect two pairs of front speakers — one pair to the

FRONT 1 SPEAKERS terminals, and the other pair to the FRONT

2 / SUB ROOM SPEAKERS terminals.

The speakers connected to the FRONT 2 / SUB ROOM SPEAKERS terminals can be used as follows:

• As the second front speakers in the main listening room

• As the main speakers in the sub listening room when using the

Multi-room function.

Right speaker FRONT 1 SPEAKERS Left speaker

Connecting the Speakers

You can connect the following speakers:

• Two pairs of front speakers to produce normal stereo sound.

• One pair of rear speakers to enjoy the surround effect.

• One center speaker to produce more effective surround effect (to emphasize human voices).

• One powered subwoofer to enhance the bass.

IMPORTANT:

After connecting the speakers listed above, set the speaker setting information properly:

• To obtain the best possible Surround and DSP effect in the main room, see page 29.

• To use the Multi-room function, see “Setting the Front

Speakers Either for the Main Room or Sub-room” on page

27.

For each speaker (except for a subwoofer), connect the (+) and (–) terminals on the rear panel to the (+) and (–) terminals marked on the speakers. For connecting a subwoofer, see page 7.

CAUTION:

Use speakers with the SPEAKER IMPEDANCE indicated by the speaker terminals.

+

FRONT 1 SPEAKERS

+

RIGHT LEFT RIGHT LEFT

CAUTION :

SPEAKER IMPEDANCE

4 6 LOW

8 16 HIGH

–

CAUTION : SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 8

FRONT 2 SUB ROOM SPEAKERS

16

–

SPEAKER LOAD SELECTOR

Right speaker FRONT 2 / SUB ROOM

SPEAKERS

Left speaker

IMPORTANT for FRONT 1 SPEAKERS connection:

To obtain the best possible output power from the receiver, and to prevent the receiver from being overheated, the receiver has the

SPEAKER LOAD SELECTOR which has to be set as follows:

• Set it to the “HIGH” position when the impedance of the front speakers connected is within the range of 8

Ω

to 16

Ω

.

• Set it to the “LOW” position when the impedance of the front speakers connected is within the range of 4

Ω

to 6

Ω

.

6

EN01-13.RX-9010VBK[J]f 6 01.2.15, 0:14 PM

Connecting the rear and center speakers

Connect rear speakers to the REAR SPEAKERS terminals and a center speaker to the CENTER SPEAKER terminals.

Center speaker

+

CENTER

SPEAKER REAR SPEAKERS

+

Right rear speaker

–

RIGHT

CAUTION : SPEAKER IMPEDANCE

LEFT

8 16

–

Left rear speaker

Analog Connections

Audio component connections

Use the cables with RCA pin plugs (not supplied).

Connect the white plug to the audio left jack, and the red plug to the audio right jack.

CAUTION:

If you connect a sound-enhancing device such as a graphic equalizer between the source components and this receiver, the sound output through this receiver may be distorted.

Turntable

RIGHT LEFT

AUDIO

REAR

PHONO

Connecting the subwoofer speaker

You can enhance the bass by connecting a subwoofer.

Connect the input jack of a powered subwoofer to the

SUBWOOFER OUT jack on the rear panel, using a cable with RCA pin plugs (not supplied).

Turntable

To audio output

SUBWOOFER

OUT

If an earth cable is provided for your turntable, connect the cable to the screw marked ( H ) on the rear panel.

Powered subwoofer

Connecting Audio/Video Components

You can connect the following audio/video components to this receiver. Refer also to the manuals supplied with your components.

Audio Components

• Turntable

• CD player *

• Cassette deck or MD recorder *

• CD recorder *

• Personal Computer (PC)

Video Components

• DVD player *

• TV *

• DBS tuner *

• VCR(s)

• Video camera

* You can connect these components using the methods described in

“Analog connections” (to the right) or in “Digital connections” (see page 10).

Ex. This connection is for the turntable with an MM

(moving-magnet) type cartridge.

Note:

Any turntables incorporating a small-output cartridge such as an MC

(moving-coil) type must be connected to this receiver through a commercial head amplifier or step-up transformer. Direct connection may result in insufficient volume.

CD player

CD player

To audio output

RIGHT LEFT

AUDIO

REAR

PHONO

CD

OUT

(REC)

TAPE

MD

IN

(PLAY)

OUT

(REC)

CDR

IN

(PLAY)

CD

OUT

(REC)

TAPE

MD

IN

(PLAY)

OUT

(REC)

CDR

IN

(PLAY)

7

EN01-13.RX-9010VBK[J]f 7 01.2.15, 0:14 PM

Cassette deck or MD recorder

To audio input

Cassette deck

RIGHT LEFT

AUDIO

REAR

PHONO

CD

OUT

(REC)

TAPE

MD

IN

(PLAY)

To audio output

Video component connections

Use the cables with RCA pin plugs (not supplied).

Connect the white plug to the audio left jack, the red plug to the audio right jack, and the yellow plug to the video jack.

• If your video components have S-video (Y/C-separation) and/or component video (Y, P

B/

C

B

, P

R/

C

R

) jacks, connect them using an

S-video cable (not supplied) and/or component video cable (not supplied). By using these jacks, you can get a better picture quality — in the order : Component video > S-video > Composite video.

IMPORTANT:

This receiver is equipped with the following video jacks — composite video, S-video and component video jacks. You can use any of the three to connect a video component.

However, remember that the video signals from one type of these input jacks are output only through the video output jacks of the same type.

Therefore, if a recording video component and a playing video component are connected to the receiver through the different video jacks, you cannot record the picture from the playing component on the recording component. In addition, if the TV and a playing video component are connected to the receiver through the different video jacks, you cannot view the playback picture from the playing component on the TV.

To audio input To audio output

MD recorder

Note:

You can connect either a cassette deck or an MD recorder to the

TAPE/MD jacks. When connecting an MD recorder to the TAPE/MD jacks, change the source name, which will be shown on the display when selected as the source, to “MD.” See page 33 for details.

VCR(s)

A

S-VHS (or VHS) VCR

C D

CD recorder

To audio input

CD recorder

RIGHT LEFT

AUDIO

REAR

PHONO

CD

OUT

(REC)

TAPE

MD

IN

(PLAY)

OUT

(REC)

CDR

IN

(PLAY)

To audio output

B

AUDIO

RIGHT LEFT

DVD

FRONT

TV SOUND

DBS

OUT

(REC)

VCR1

IN

(PLAY)

OUT

(REC)

VCR2

IN

(PLAY)

MONITOR

OUT

VIDEO

VIDEO S-VIDEO

E F

A

C D

If your audio components have a COMPU LINK or TEXT

COMPU LINK jack

• See page 55 for detailed information about the connection and the

COMPU LINK remote control system.

• See page 57 for detailed information about the connection and the

TEXT COMPU LINK remote control system.

B

S-VHS (or VHS) VCR

Å To left/right channel audio output ı To left/right channel audio input

Ç To S-video output

Î To composite video output

‰ To composite video input

Ï To S-video input

E F

8

EN01-13.RX-9010VBK[J]f 8 01.2.15, 0:14 PM

C

D

TV and/or DBS tuner

When connecting the TV to the AUDIO jacks (TV

SOUND/DBS), DO NOT connect the TV’s video output to these video input jacks.

A

AUDIO

RIGHT LEFT

DVD

FRONT

TV SOUND

DBS

OUT

(REC)

VCR1

IN

(PLAY)

OUT

(REC)

VCR2

IN

(PLAY)

MONITOR

OUT

VIDEO

VIDEO S-VIDEO

DBS

MONITOR

OUT

DVD COMPONENT VIDEO

Y P

B

/C

B

P

R

/C

R

B

TV

Connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT jack to view the playback picture from the other connected video components.

Å To audio output ı To composite video input

Ç To S-video input

Î To component video input

Video camera

The VIDEO input jacks on the front panel are convenient when connecting and disconnecting the equipment frequently.

S-VIDEO

VIDEO

VIDEO L—AUDIO—R

To audio output

To S-video output

To composite video output

DVD player

• When you connect the DVD player with stereo output jacks:

Å To front left/right channel audio output (or to audio mixed output if necessary) ı To composite video output

Ç To S-video output

Î To component video output

DBS

DVD COMPONENT VIDEO

A DVD player

D

C

DVD

AUDIO

RIGHT LEFT

B

VIDEO

VIDEO S-VIDEO

DVD

FRONT

A

AUDIO

RIGHT LEFT

D

DBS tuner

DBS

C B

DVD

FRONT

TV SOUND

DBS

VIDEO

VIDEO S-VIDEO

DBS

MONITOR

OUT

DVD COMPONENT VIDEO

Y P

B

/C

B

P

R

/C

R

• When you connect the DVD player with its analog discrete output

(5.1 CH reproduction) jacks:

Å To subwoofer output ı To center channel audio output

Ç To rear left/right channel audio output

Î To front left/right channel audio output

‰ To composite video output

Ï To S-video output

Ì To component video output

DBS

DVD player

G

DVD COMPONENT VIDEO

DVD

Å To audio output ı To composite video output

Ç To S-video output

Î To component video output

A B C D E F

Notes:

• When connecting the DBS tuner to the TV SOUND/DBS jacks, change the source name, which will be shown on the display when selected as the source, to “DBS.” See page 33 for details.

• When operating the DBS tuner by using the AV COMPU LINK remote control system, change the video input terminal setting correctly. See page 32 for details.

DVD

SUB

WOOFER

CENTER RIGHT LEFT

AUDIO

RIGHT LEFT

REAR

DVD

FRONT

VIDEO

VIDEO S-VIDEO

Note:

When operating the DVD player by using the AV COMPU LINK remote control system, change the video input terminal setting correctly. See page 32 for details.

9

EN01-13.RX-9010VBK[J]f 9 01.2.15, 0:14 PM

Digital Connections

This receiver is equipped with four DIGITAL IN terminals — one digital coaxial terminal and three digital optical terminals — and one DIGITAL OUT terminal.

IMPORTANT:

• When connecting the DVD player, digital TV broadcast tuner or

DBS tuner using the digital terminals, you also need to connect it to the video terminal on the rear. Without connecting it to the video terminal, you can view no playback picture.

• After connecting the components using the DIGITAL IN terminals, set the following correctly if necessary.

– Set the digital input (DIGITAL IN) terminal setting correctly. For details, see “Digital Input (DIGITAL IN) Terminal Setting” on page

30.

– Select the digital input mode correctly. For details, see “Selecting the Analog or Digital Input Mode” on page 31.

Notes:

• When shipped from the factory, the DIGITAL IN terminals have been set for use with the following components:

– DIGITAL 1 (coaxial): For DVD player

– DIGITAL 2 (optical): For CD player

– DIGITAL 3 (optical): For digital TV broadcast tuner

– DIGITAL 4 (optical): For CD recorder

• When you want to operate the CD player, CD recorder, or MD recorder using the COMPU LINK remote control system, connect the target component also as described in “Analog connections”

(see pages 7 and 8).

• When you want to operate the DVD player using the AV COMPU

LINK remote control system, connect the DVD player also as described in “Analog connections” (see page 9).

• To use the digital source components as the sub-room source, you need to connect them using analog connection methods as well.

Digital output terminal

Digital input terminals

You can connect any digital equipment as follows:

Digital TV

DBS tuner

DBS

CD recorder MD recorder

Digital optical cable (not supplied) between digital optical terminals

CD player DVD player

DVD

CD recorder MD recorder

When the digital recording equipment such as an MD recorder and a CD recorder has a digital optical input terminal, connecting it to the DIGITAL OUT terminal enables you to perform digital-todigital recording.

Digital coaxial cable (not supplied) between digital coaxial terminals

Digital optical cable (not supplied) between digital optical terminals

PCM/DOLBY DIGITAL

/DTS

DIGITAL OUT

Note:

The digital signal format output through the DIGITAL OUT terminal is the same as that of the input signal. This means that when the DTS

Digital Surround signals are input, the DTS Digital Surround signals are output.

When the component has a digital coaxial output terminal, connect it to the

DIGITAL 1 (DVD) terminal, using the digital coaxial cable (not supplied).

When the component has a digital optical output terminal, connect it to the

DIGITAL 2 (CD), DIGITAL 3 (TV) or

DIGITAL 4 (CDR) terminal, using the digital optical cable (not supplied).

Before connecting a digital optical cable, unplug the protective plug.

DIGITAL IN

DIGITAL 1 (DVD)

DIGITAL 2 (CD)

DIGITAL 3 (TV)

DIGITAL 4 (CDR)

10

EN01-13.RX-9010VBK[J]f 10 01.2.15, 0:14 PM

USB Connection

This receiver is equipped with a USB terminal on the front panel.

You can connect your PC to this terminal and enjoy sound reproduced through your PC.

When you connect your PC for the first time, follow the procedure below.

• Remember you cannot send any signal or data to your PC from this receiver.

IMPORTANT

• Check if your PC equipped with the CD-ROM drive is running on

Windows R 98 * , Windows R Me * , or Windows R 2000 * and prepare its CD-ROM.

• Check your PC’s BIOS setting — whether USB is available, and whether USB IRQ is set to “AUTO” or to available IRQ number.

5. Check if the drivers are correctly installed.

1. Open the Control Panel on your PC: Select [Start] =

[Settings]

=

[Control Panel]

2. Click [System] = [Device Manager] = [Sound, video and game controllers] and [Universal Serial Bus controllers]

The following window appears, and you can check whether the drivers are installed.

How to install the USB drivers

The following procedure is described using the English version of

Windows R 98. If your PC is running on a different version of

Windows, the screens shown on your PC’s monitor will differ from the ones used in the following procedure.

1. Turn on your PC and start running Windows R 98, Windows R

Me or Windows

R

2000.

If the PC has been turned on, quit all the applications now running.

2. Turn on the receiver, and press USB AUDIO on the front panel or USB on the remote control.

The lamp on the USB AUDIO button lights up.

3. Connect the receiver to the PC using a USB cable (not supplied).

Your PC automatically recognizes this connection, and shows the following screen on the monitor.

USB AUDIO

S-VIDEO

VIDEO

VIDEO L—AUDIO—R

USB cable

PC

Note:

The items shown on the PC’s monitor differs depending on your PC settings.

6. Change the PC audio setting.

1. If you have closed Control Panel, open it again: Select [Start]

= [Setting] = [Control Panel]

2. Click [Multimedia Properties], then select “USB Audio

Device [1]” for “Playback” of “Audio,” and close the window.

To play back a CD from CD-ROM drive on PC, click

[Multimedia], [CD Music], then check [Enable digital CD audio for this CD-ROM device].

Now PC is ready for playback through the USB connection.

After installation is completed, you can use your PC as the playback source. The PC automatically recognizes the receiver whenever a

USB cable is connected to the PC and the receiver while the receiver is turned on.

• When not using the PC as the playback source, disconnect the

USB cable.

To play back sounds on the PC, refer to the manuals supplied with the sound reproduction application installed in the PC.

4. Install the USB drivers following the instructions on the PC’s monitor.

Notes:

• DO NOT turn off the receiver or disconnect the USB cable while installing the drivers and for a several seconds each time your PC is recognizing the receiver.

• Use a full speed USB cable (revision 1.0).

• If your PC does not recognize the receiver, disconnect the USB cable and connect it again. If this does not work, restart Windows.

• The drivers installed can be recognized only when the USB cable is connected between the receiver and your PC.

• The sound may not be played back correctly — interrupted or degraded — due to your PC settings and PC specifications.

* Microsoft R , Windows R 98, Windows R Me and Windows R 2000 are registered trademarks of Microsoft corporation.

11

EN01-13.RX-9010VBK[J]f 11 01.2.15, 0:14 PM

Setting Up the RF Rod Antenna

The remote control supplied for this receiver can transmit RF (Radio

Frequency) signal. The RF rod antenna can receive the RF signals emitted from the remote control. So, with the RF rod antenna connected, you can operate the receiver at a distance of up to 50 feet

(15 m) using the remote control. However, if the antenna cannot receive signals stably, you cannot operate the receiver correctly.

• The signal-reachable distance may differ depending on the operating conditions and circumstances. To improve transmitting conditions, change the distance to the receiver and the direction to transmit while operating the remote control.

• Without the RF rod antenna connected, you can operate the receiver with the remote control, aiming the remote control directly toward the remote sensor on the receiver.

Setting Up the IR Signal Transmitter

The IR signal transmitter can transmit the IR signals.

It allows you to use the AV COMPULINK system, and to operate other manufacturers’ components without aiming the remote control directly toward the remote sensor on the target components. In addition, the IR signal transmitter reduces the possibility of malfunction.

• The IR signal transmitter may not operate the target components depending on the operating conditions and circumstances — including the aiming angle and direction of the IR signal transmitter toward the remote sensors of the target components.

If this occurs, changing its aiming angle and direction toward the remote sensors may solve the problem.

To set up the IR signal transmitter

To set up the RF rod antenna

1. Insert the RF rod antenna to the RF REMOTE

ANTENNA terminal.

RF REMOTE

IR OUT

ANTENNA

1. Find the place where you attach the IR signal transmitter.

• Place it where the signal can reach the remote sensor of the target components directly (in the line-of-sight).

• If the cord length of the IR signal transmitter is not long enough, use an extension cord (not supplied).

2. Attach the double-sided adhesive tape

(supplied) to the IR signal transmitter.

IR signal transmitter

2. Rotate the fixing nut to attach the RF rod antenna firmly.

RF REMOTE

IR OUT

ANTENNA

The RF rod antenna and IR signal Transmitter

The combination of the RF rod antenna and the IR signal transmitter

(see to the right) allows you to use the Multi-room function more conveniently.

The remote control supplied for this receiver can transmit both RF

(Radio Frequency) signal and IR (infrared) signal at the same time.

This receiver catches the RF signals emitted from the remote control, and converts them into IR signals, then transmits the converted signals to the remote sensor on the other components through IR signal transmitter.

This means that you can control not only this receiver but the other components from the sub-room.

Double-sided adhesive tape

3. Connect the plug of the transmitter to the IR

OUT jack of the receiver and place the transmitter.

RF REMOTE

ANTENNA

IR OUT

Less than 10 f

At an angle of approx. 60°

Note:

To avoid a failure in the reception from the remote control, keep the connecting cables and the IR signal transmitter’ s cable away from the

RF rod antenna.

Signal-emitting angle of the transmitter

Horizontally: 60˚ Vertically: 60˚

15°

45°

30°

30°

(3 m) eet

12

EN01-13.RX-9010VBK[J]f 12 01.2.15, 0:14 PM

Connecting the Power Cord

Before plugging the receiver into an AC outlet, make sure that all connections have been made.

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet.

Putting Batteries in the Remote Control

Before using the remote control, put two supplied batteries first.

1. On the back of the remote control, remove the battery cover.

Keep the power cord away from the connecting cables and the antenna. The power cord may cause noise or screen interference. We recommend that you use a coaxial cable to connect the antenna, since it is well-shielded against interference.

Note:

The preset settings such as preset channels and sound adjustment may be erased in a few days in the following cases:

– When you unplug the power cord.

– When a power failure occurs.

CAUTIONS:

• Do not touch the power cord with wet hands.

• Do not pull on the power cord to unplug the cord. When unplugging the cord, always grasp the plug so as not to damage the cord.

2. Insert batteries. Make sure to match the polarity:

(+) to (+).

R6P(SUM3)/AA(15F)

3. Replace the cover.

13

EN01-13.RX-9010VBK[J]f 13

If the remote control cannot transmit signals and operate the receiver correctly, replace the batteries. Use two R6P(SUM3)/

AA(15F) type dry-cell batteries.

Notes:

• When you can aim the remote control directly at the remote sensor on the receiver, you can operate the receiver at a distance of up to

23 feet (7 m).

• After replacing the batteries, set the manufacturers’ codes again

(see page 68).

CAUTIONS:

Follow these precautions to avoid leaking or cracking cells:

• Place batteries in the remote control so they match the polarity: (+) to (+) and (–) to (–).

• Use the correct type of batteries. Batteries that look similar may differ in voltage.

• Always replace both batteries at the same time.

• Do not expose batteries to heat or flame.

01.2.15, 0:14 PM

Multi-room Operations

Before operating this receiver any further, be familiar with this Multi-room function.

This function enables you to listen to different sources in two different places (we call these two places “main room” and “sub-room”) by using this receiver only.

This section explains only required speaker connections, the concept, and basic operations of the Multi-room function.

For more detailed operations, see the respective pages in this manual.

Required Speaker Connections for the Sub-room

Connection Å

See also “Connecting the front speakers” on page 6.

Right speaker MAIN ROOM SPEAKERS Left speaker

Connection ı

Connect the input jacks of another amplifier to the SUB ROOM

PRE OUT jacks on the rear panel, using a cable with RCA pin plugs (not supplied).

+

FRONT 1 SPEAKERS

+

–

RIGHT LEFT RIGHT LEFT

CAUTION :

SPEAKER IMPEDANCE

4 6 LOW

8 16 HIGH

–

SPEAKER LOAD SELECTOR

CAUTION : SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 8

FRONT 2 SUB ROOM SPEAKERS

16

Another amplifier

SUB ROOM PRE OUT

( r i g h t ) ( l e f t )

Right speaker

Merits:

SUB ROOM SPEAKERS Left speaker

• This connection DOES NOT require a power amplifier.

Demerits:

• When the sub-room speakers are activated, this connection

DOES NOT allow you to use the Surround/DSP modes using the center/rear speakers (see page 37) and the DVD MULTI playback mode (see page 49) for the main room sources.

Right speaker SUB ROOM SPEAKERS Left speaker

Merits:

• This connection DOES allow you to use the Surround/DSP mode using the center/rear speakers (see page 37) and the

DVD MULTI playback mode (see page 49) for the main room sources.

Demerits:

• This connection DOES require another amplifier.

To use the front speakers connected to the FRONT 2/SUB

ROOM SPEAKERS terminals for the sub-room

See “Setting the Front Speakers Either for the Main Room or

Sub-room” on page 27, and “Activating the Sub-room Front

Speakers” on page 26.

Note:

Using long speaker signal cables will deteriorate the signals, and will result in poor sound quality.

To use the front speakers in the sub-room

• No settings are required on this receiver.

• Turn on and operate the other amplifier connected to the SUB

ROOM PRE OUT jacks correctly.

Note:

Using long cables will deteriorate the signals, and will result in poor sound quality.

14

EN14-26.RX-9010VBK[J]f 14 01.2.15, 0:14 PM

Basic Operating Procedure for Main Room

On the front panel:

1. Press POWER.

The STANDBY lamp on the front panel goes off, and the MAIN

ROOM indicator lights on the display.

• For more details, “Turning the Power On and Off (Standby)” on page 17.

STANDBY

POWER

From the remote control:

1. Set MAIN ROOM/SUB ROOM selector to

“MAIN ROOM.”

MAIN ROOM SUB ROOM

Now the buttons and controls on the remote control work for the main room operations.

2. Press AUDIO POWER ON.

The STANDBY lamp on the front panel goes off, and the

MAIN ROOM indicator lights on the display.

• See also “Turning the Power On and Off (Standby)” on page

17.

The sound comes out of the speakers in the main room, and the buttons and controls on the front panel work for the main room operations.

2. If no sounds come out of the front speakers, press

SPEAKERS ON/OFF 1 and/or

SPEAKERS ON/OFF 2 which you want to use.

STANDBY ON

1

2

The sound comes out of the speakers in the main room.

• If no sounds come out of the front speakers, press

SPEAKERS ON/OFF 1 and/or SPEAKERS ON/OFF 2 on the front panel. The SPEAKERS 1 and/or 2 indicator(s) light(s) on the display.

For more details, see “Activating the Main Room Front

Speakers” on page 19.

The selected indicator(s) light(s) on the display.

• For more details, see “Activating the Main Room Front

Speakers” on page 19.

3. Select and play a source.

3. Select and play a source.

DVD MULTI DVD VCR 1 VCR 2 VIDEO TV SOUND/DBS

DVD

VCR 1

TV/DBS

DVD MULTI

VCR 2

VIDEO

PHONO CD

CDR TAPE/MD

FM/AM USB AUDIO

PHONO CD CDR

SOURCE NAME

TAPE / MD USB AUDIO FM / AM

SOURCE NAME

4. Press VOLUME +/– to adjust the volume level of the sound from the speakers in the main room.

4. Turn MASTER VOLUME to adjust the volume level of the sound from the speakers in the main room.

MASTER VOLUME

VOLUME

15

EN14-26.RX-9010VBK[J]f 15 01.2.15, 0:14 PM

Basic Operating Procedure for Sub-Room

The sources and functions available for the sub-room operations are limited.

For more details on the sub-room operations, see “Sub-Room

Operations” on pages 23 to 26.

5. Turn MASTER VOLUME to adjust the volume level of the sound from the front speakers in the sub-room.

MASTER VOLUME

On the front panel:

1. Press POWER.

STANDBY

The STANDBY lamp on the front panel goes off, and the MAIN ROOM indicator

POWER lights on the display.

• For more details, see “Turning the Power On and Off

(Standby) and Selecting the Sub-room Operations” on page

23.

The sound comes out of the speakers in the main room, and the buttons and controls on the front panel work for the main room operations.

SUB ROOM ON /OFF

2. Press SUB ROOM ON/OFF so that the SUB ROOM indicator lights on the display.

The sound comes out of the front speakers in the sub-room.

If no sounds come out of the front speakers, press

SPEAKERS ON/OFF SUB ROOM so that the SPEAKERS

SUB ROOM indicator lights on the display.

• See also “Setting the Front Speakers Either for the Main

Room or Sub-room” on page 27, and “Activating the Subroom Front Speakers” on page 26.

Note:

If the center speaker or rear speakers are used for the Surround/

DSP modes (see page 37) for the main room operations, the SPEAKERS ON/OFF SUB ROOM button does not work.

3. Press SUB ROOM CONTROL so

SUB ROOM CONTROL

that “SUB” and the previously selected source name for the sub-room appear on the display.

Now the buttons and controls on the front panel work for the sub-room operations.

4. Select and play a source.

DVD MULTI DVD VCR 1 VCR 2 VIDEO TV SOUND/ DBS

PHONO CD CDR

SOURCE NAME

TAPE / MD USB AUDIO FM / AM

SOURCE NAME

Notes:

• You cannot select DVD MULTI as a source for the sub-room.

• When the source name of TV SOUND/DBS is assigned to “TV

SOUND,” TV SOUND/DBS buttons does not work. To change the source name, see “Changing the Source Name” on page 33.

From the remote control:

1. Set MAIN ROOM/SUB ROOM selector to “SUB

ROOM.”

MAIN ROOM SUB ROOM

Now the buttons and controls on the remote control work for the sub-room operations.

2. Press AUDIO POWER ON.

The STANDBY lamp on the front panel goes off, and the SUB

ROOM indicator lights on the display.

• See also “Turning the Power On and Off (Standby) and

Selecting the Sub-room Operations” on page 23.

STANDBY ON

The sound comes out of the front speakers in the sub-room.

If no sounds come out of the front speakers, press

SPEAKERS ON/OFF SUB ROOM on the front panel so that the

SPEAKERS SUB ROOM indicator lights on the display.

• See also “Activating the Sub-room Front Speakers” on page

26.

Note:

If the center speaker or rear speakers are used for the Surround/

DSP mode (see page 37) for the main room operations, the SPEAKERS ON/OFF SUB ROOM button does not work.

3. Select and play a source.

DVD DVD MULTI PHONO CD

CDR

VCR 1 VCR 2 TAPE/MD

TV/ DBS VIDEO FM/AM USB AUDIO

Notes:

• You cannot select DVD MULTI as a source for the sub-room.

• When the source name of TV SOUND/DBS is assigned to “TV

SOUND,” TV SOUND/DBS buttons does not work. o change the source name, see “Changing the Source Name” on page 33.

• See also “Operating the Playback Source for the Sub-room” on page 26.

4. Press VOLUME +/– to adjust the volume level of the sound from the front speakers in the subroom.

VOLUME

16

EN14-26.RX-9010VBK[J]f 16 01.2.15, 0:14 PM

Main Room Basic Operations

This section explains only the operations commonly used when you play any sound source in the main room.

See pages 23 for the sub-room operations.

You can use "On-screen Menu" for most of the main room operations. For details, see page 50.

IMPORTANT:

Check to see if the proper indicator(s) and information appear on the display on the front panel before/while using the buttons and controls.

For the main room operations:

• The MAIN ROOM indicator is lit.

• The source name for the sub-room is not lit on the display.

• When using the remote control:

– Set MAIN ROOM/SUB ROOM selector to

“MAIN ROOM.”

– Check to see if the following informations

MAIN ROOM appear on the display window on the remote control:

SUB ROOM

MAIN ROOM/

SUB ROOM selector

MAIN ROOM

SUB ROOM

Indications

MAIN ROOM

SUB ROOM

*

*

Buttons

FM/AM

CD

PHONO

TAPE/MD

DVD or DVD MULTI

CDR

USB AUDIO

TV/DBS

VCR 1

VCR 2

VIDEO

SOUND

After pressing SOUND:

DIGITAL EQ

Indications

TUNER

CD

PHONO

TAPE

DVD

CDR

USB

TV**

VCR 1

VCR 2

VIDEO

SOUND

EQ

Notes:

STANDBY

MAIN ROOM

MAIN ROOM

ON/OFF

SUB ROOM

SUB ROOM

ON/OFF

TV/CATV/DBS

POWER

ON

VCR1

POWER

Ex. When you press CD with

MAIN ROOM/SUB ROOM selector set to “MAIN

ROOM.”

MAIN ROOM SUB ROOM

When you set MAIN ROOM/SUB ROOM selector * and press the buttons listed above, the corresponding indication appears for 10 seconds for your confirmation.

* MAIN ROOM or SUB ROOM indicator does not appear when no indicators appear on the display window.

** When you set TV/CATV/DBS selector to “CATV/DBS,” “CATV” appears as the indication. (See page 68.)

Turning the Power On and Off (Standby)

On the front panel:

To turn on the power, press POWER.

The STANDBY lamp on the front panel goes off, and the MAIN ROOM indicator lights up on the display. The name of the current main room source and Surround/DSP mode appear on the display.

STANDBY

POWER

Current source name and Surround/DSP modes for the main room appear

ANALOG L R

1

SPEAKERS

MAIN ROOM

VOLUME

Current volume level for the main room is shown here

The currently selected SPEAKERS 1 and/or 2 indicator(s) also light up on the display.

• If the SPEAKERS 1 and/or 2 indicator(s) are not lit on the display, see “Activating the Main Room Front Speakers” on page 19.

To turn off the power (into standby mode), press POWER again.

The STANDBY lamp lights up. A small amount of power is consumed in standby mode. To turn the power off completely, unplug the AC power cord.

STANDBY

POWER

From the remote control:

To turn on the power, press

AUDIO POWER ON.

The STANDBY lamp on the front panel goes off, and the MAIN ROOM indicator lights up on the display. The name of the

STANDBY ON current main room source and Surround/DSP mode appear on the display.

The currently selected SPEAKERS 1 and/or 2 indicator(s) also light up on the display.

• If the SPEAKERS 1 and/or 2 indicator(s) are not lit on the display, see “Activating the Main Room Front Speakers” on page 19.

To turn off the power (into standby mode), press AUDIO POWER STANDBY.

The STANDBY lamp lights red.*

STANDBY ON

Notes:

• When you turn off the receiver in the main room, make sure if other people are listening to any source in the sub-room (the SUB ROOM and SPEAKERS SUB ROOM indicators are lit on the display).

• If you have turned off the receiver with the volume level set at more than level “40,” the volume level will be automatically set at level

“40” next time you turn on the receiver.

• If “TURN ON MAIN OR SUB ROOM” appears on the display, press

MAIN ROOM ON/OFF or SUB ROOM ON/OFF to listen to the sound in the main room or in the sub-room; otherwise, the receiver will turn off after about 1 minute. In this case, the receiver is turned on with the main room operations activated by pressing POWER

(AUDIO POWER ON on the remote control).

17

EN14-26.RX-9010VBK[J]f 17 01.2.15, 0:14 PM

Canceling the Main Room Operations

To stop the main room operations and sounds from the main

room speakers, press MAIN ROOM ON/OFF.

MAIN ROOM ON /OFF

MAIN ROOM SUB ROOM

ON/OFF ON/OFF

Selected source name and current

Surround/DSP mode appear

ANALOG L C R

LINEAR PCM

SUBWFR

LS S

DIGITAL

LFE

RS

SPEAKERS

1 2

DGTL AUTO DVD MULTI PRO LOGIC AUTO MUTING TUNED STEREO

DSP 3D–PHONIC MIDNIGHT MODE

HEADPHONE DIGITAL EQ INPUT ATT ONE TOUCH OPERATION

SLEEP VOLUME

On the front panel From the remote control

The MAIN ROOM indicator on the display goes off, and the currently selected front speaker indicators also goes off (no sound will be heard in the main room).

• You cannot use this receiver for the main room operations any more.

To use this receiver for the main room operations again, press

MAIN ROOM ON/OFF again.

The MAIN ROOM indicator lights on the display, and the front speaker indicators previously selected also light.

Now the buttons and controls on the front panel work for the main room operations.

Notes:

• If you have turned off the receiver with the volume level set at more than level “40,” the volume level will be automatically set at level

“40” next time you turn on the receiver.

• If “TURN ON MAIN OR SUB ROOM” appears on the display, press

MAIN ROOM ON/OFF or SUB ROOM ON/OFF to listen to the sound in the main room or in the sub-room; otherwise, the receiver will turn off after about 1 minute.

DVD

DVD MULTI

Select the DVD player.

Select the DVD player for viewing the digital video disc using the analog discrete output mode (5.1CH reproduction).

CD *

TAPE/MD *

To enjoy the DVD MULTI playback, see page 49.

Select the CD player.

Select the cassette deck (or the MD recorder).

TV (SOUND)/DBS Select TV sounds (or the DBS tuner).

VIDEO Select video component connected to the

VIDEO jacks.

PHONO *

FM/AM *

Select the turntable.

Select an FM or AM broadcast.

VCR 1

VCR 2

CDR *

USB AUDIO *

• Each time you press the button, the band alternates between FM and AM.

Select the video component connected to the

VCR 1 jacks.

Select the video component connected to the

VCR 2 jacks.

Select the CD recorder.

Select the personal computer (PC) connected to the USB terminal.

Notes:

• When connecting an MD recorder (to the TAPE/MD jacks), and a

DBS tuner (to the TV SOUND/DBS jacks), change the source names shown on the display. For details, see page 33.

• When you press one of the source selecting buttons on the remote control marked with an asterisk ( * ), the receiver automatically turns on.

Selecting the Main Room Source to Play

Press one of the source selecting buttons.

The lamp on the front panel button for selected source lights up.

• The selected source name and Surround/DSP mode also appear on the display.

On the front panel:

DVD MULTI DVD

PHONO CD

VCR 1 VCR 2 VIDEO TV SOUND/DBS

CDR

SOURCE NAME

TAPE / MD USB AUDIO FM / AM

Selecting different sources for picture and sound

You can watch picture from a video component while listening to sound from another component.

Press one of the audio source selecting buttons — PHONO, CD,

CDR, TAPE/MD, USB(AUDIO), FM/AM — while viewing the picture from a video component such as the VCR or DVD player, etc.

The lamp on the front panel button for selected source lights up.

SOURCE NAME

On the front panel:

DVD MULTI DVD VCR 1 VCR 2 VIDEO TV SOUND/DBS

From the remote control:

DVD

VCR 1

TV/DBS

DVD MULTI

VCR 2

VIDEO

PHONO CD

CDR TAPE/MD

FM/AM USB AUDIO

PHONO CD CDR

SOURCE NAME

TAPE / MD USB AUDIO FM / AM

SOURCE NAME

Continued to the next page.

18

EN14-26.RX-9010VBK[J]f 18 01.2.15, 0:14 PM

From the remote control:

DVD

VCR 1

TV/DBS

DVD MULTI

VCR 2

VIDEO

PHONO CD

CDR TAPE/MD

FM/AM USB AUDIO

Notes:

• “S” is the monaural rear signal. It is automatically mixed down to

“LS” and “RS.”

• “LFE” signals are automatically mixed down to the other signals when you select the digital input mode. However, when you select

“DVD MULTI,” this receiver reproduces the LFE signals only through subwoofer channel.

* When you do not press SUBWOOFER OUT ON/OFF to deactivate the subwoofer.

Note:

Once you have selected a video source, pictures of the selected source are sent to the TV until you select another video source.

Speaker and signal indicators on the display

By checking the following indicators, you can easily confirm which speakers you are activating and which signals are coming into this receiver from the source.

Speaker indicators (white) Signal indicators (red)

L C R

SUBWFR

LS RS

L C R

LS S

LFE

RS

Adjusting the Main Room Volume

On the front panel:

To increase the volume, turn MASTER VOLUME clockwise.

To decrease the volume, turn it

MASTER VOLUME counterclockwise.

• When you turn MASTER VOLUME rapidly, the volume level also changes rapidly.

• When you turn MASTER VOLUME slowly, the volume level also changes slowly.

From the remote control:

To increase the volume, press VOLUME +.

To decrease the volume, press VOLUME –.

VOLUME

The speaker indicators

The indicators correspond to the speakers as follows:

Frame

L

R

C

LS

RS

Speaker

Left front

Right front

Center

Left rear

Right rear

It always lights while the main room is activated.

It lights when you set the corresponding speaker correctly.

(For details, see page 29.)

SUBWFR Subwoofer

It always lights when

“SUBWOOFER” is set to “YES.”*

(For details, see page 28.)

CAUTIONS:

• Always set the volume to the minimum before starting any source. If the volume is set at its high level, the sudden blast of sound energy can permanently damage your hearing and/or ruin your speakers.

• Be careful not to turn up the volume so high when controlling the receiver without listening to the playback sound. For example, when adjusting the volume level in the sub-room from the main room.

Notes:

• The volume level can be adjusted within the range of “0” (minimum) to “90” (maximum).

• If you set One Touch Operation to “ON” (see page 34), you do not have to adjust the volume level each time you change the source. It is automatically set to the stored level for the previous setting.

The signal indicators

The signal indicators light in the following cases:

• When the DIGITAL input mode (see page 31) is selected, only the indicators for the incoming signals light.

• When the ANALOG input mode (see page 31) is selected, the indicators light as follows:

- When selecting “DVD MULTI” (see pages 9 and 49), all the signal indicators except “S” always light on the display.

- When selecting the sources other than “DVD MULTI,” only “L” and “R” always light on the display.

To bring out the best performance of this receiver, check the speaker and signal indicators on the display carefully and set the speakers correctly.

L

LS

C R

LFE

RS

Ex.The center signals are coming from the source, but the center speaker is not prepared.

Activating the Main Room Front Speakers

When shipped from the factory, both pairs of the front speakers have been set to be used in the main room.

• To use the front speakers connected to the FRONT 2/SUB ROOM

SPEAKERS terminals for the sub-room, see “Setting the Front

Speakers Either for the Main Room or Sub-room” on page 27, and

“Activating the Sub-room Front Speakers” on page 26.

IMPORTANT:

You can activate two pairs of the front speakers at the same time only when the SPEAKER LOAD SELECTOR switch on the rear panel is set to the “HIGH” position and when no signals are sent to the center and rear speakers. Otherwise, activating one pair of the speakers deactivates the other.

19

EN14-26.RX-9010VBK[J]f 19 01.2.15, 0:14 PM

On the front panel ONLY:

When you have connected two pairs of the front speakers and set them to the main room, you can select which to use in the main room.

To use the speakers connected to the FRONT 1 SPEAKERS

terminals, press SPEAKERS ON/OFF 1 so that SPEAKERS 1 indicator lights up on the

1 display. (Make sure that the SPEAKERS 2 is not on the display.)

To use the speakers connected to the

2

FRONT 2/SUB ROOM SPEAKERS

terminals, press SPEAKERS ON/OFF 2 so that SPEAKERS 2 indicator lights up on the display. (Make sure that the SPEAKERS 1 is not on the display.)

To use both sets of the speakers, press SPEAKERS ON/OFF 1 and

SPEAKERS ON/OFF 2 so that the SPEAKERS 1 and SPEAKERS

2 indicators light up on the display.

To use neither sets of the speakers, press SPEAKERS ON/OFF 1 and SPEAKERS ON/OFF 2 so that the SPEAKERS 1 and

SPEAKERS 2 indicators disappear from the display.

The HEADPHONE indicator lights up and “HEADPHONE”* appears on the display.

• Activating the speaker turns on the Surround and DSP modes previously selected.

• Listening only with headphones:

You can listen with the headphones without deactivating both pairs of speakers by connecting a pair of headphones to the

PHONES jack on the front panel. If you want to use a pair of headphones without outputting sounds from the front speakers, you must turn off both pairs of the front speakers as mentioned above.

Notes:

• If you select any of the Surround/DSP modes with the center and/or rear speaker(s) or “DVD MULTI” when both front speakers are activated, the speakers connected to the FRONT 2/SUB ROOM

SPEAKERS terminals are deactivated.

* If you use a Surround with DAP mode or a DSP mode,

“HEADPHONE DSP” appears on the display. You can enjoy spacious stereo effect with this mode.

CAUTION:

Be sure to turn down the volume before connecting or putting on headphones, as high volume can damage both the headphones and your hearing.

Adjusting the Equalization Patterns

You can adjust equalization patterns to your preference.

• You can do this setting for each source.

Before you start, remember....

• There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is canceled before you finish, start from step 1 again.

On the front panel:

1. Press DIGITAL EQ (Equalization) repeatedly to select the frequency.

The display changes to show the current setting.

• Each time you press the button, the frequency and its level change as follows:

DIGITAL

EQ

EQ 63Hz and its level

EQ250Hz and its level

EQ16kHz and its level

EQ 1kHz and its level

EQ 4kHz and its level

2. Press CONTROL UP

5

/DOWN

∞

repeatedly to adjust the frequency level.

The frequency level changes by 2 dB from – 8 dB to +8 dB.

The DIGITAL EQ indicator lights on the display.

CONTROL

DOWN UP

3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to adjust the other frequencies.

To flat the frequency patterns for digital equalization

Set all the frequency levels to “0” in step 2. The DIGITAL EQ indicator goes off from the display.

From the remote control:

1. Press SOUND.

The 10 keys are activated for sound adjustments.

SOUND

2. Press DIGITAL EQ repeatedly to select the frequency you want.

The display changes to show the current setting.

• Each time you press the button, the frequency and its level change as follows:

DIGITAL EQ

10

RETURN

EQ 63Hz and its level

EQ250Hz and its level

EQ16kHz and its level

EQ 1kHz and its level

EQ 4kHz and its level

3. Press LEVEL + or LEVEL – repeatedly to adjust the frequency level.

LEVEL+

LEVEL–

The frequency level changes by 2 dB from – 8 dB to +8 dB.

The DIGITAL EQ indicator lights on the display.

• Each time you press the button, “EQ” appears on the display window on the remote control.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust the other frequencies.

To flat the frequency patterns for digital equalization

Set all the frequency levels to “0” in step 3. The DIGITAL EQ indicator goes off from the display.

Notes:

• This function is applied only to the main room sources.

• When the Line Direct function is turned on, the Digital Equalization cannot be adjusted. (See page 22.)

• The Digital Equalization affects the front speaker sounds only.

20

EN14-26.RX-9010VBK[J]f 20 01.2.15, 0:14 PM

Listening at Night — Midnight Mode

Using the midnight mode, you can enjoy a powerful sound at night even at a low volume level.

• You can do this setting for each source.

Press MIDNIGHT MODE.

MIDNIGHT MODE

MIDNIGHT MODE

Reinforcing the Bass

You can boost the bass level.

• You can do this setting for each source.

Press BASS BOOST.

BASS BOOST

BASS BOOST

On the front panel From the remote control

On the front panel From the remote control

• Each time you press the button, the midnight mode changes as follows:

MIDNIGHT 1 MIDNIGHT 2

NORMAL

MIDNIGHT 1: Select this when you want to compress the dynamic range a little.

The MIDNIGHT MODE indicator lights on the display.

MIDNIGHT 2: Select this when you want to compress the dynamic range fully. (useful at midnight)

The MIDNIGHT MODE indicator lights on the display.

NORMAL: Select this when you want to enjoy surround with its full dynamic range. (no effect applied)

The MIDNIGHT MODE indicator goes off from the display.

Notes:

• This function is applied only to the main room sources.

• When the Line Direct function is turned on, the midnight mode is canceled. (See page 22.)

• The midnight mode is not valid for the DVD MULTI playback mode.

The BASS BOOST lamp on the front panel button lights up.

• Each time you press the button, the bass boost function turns on (“BOOST ON”) and off

(“BOOST OFF”).

– Select “BOOST ON” to activate the bass boost function.

The BASS BOOST lamp on the front panel button lights up.

– Select “BOOST OFF” to cancel it.

The BASS BOOST lamp on the front panel button goes off.

Notes:

• This function is applied only to the main room sources.

• This function does not affect the sound outputting from the rear speakers.

Muting the Main Room Sound

From the remote control ONLY:

Press MUTING to mute the sound through all speakers in the main room and headphones connected.

“MUTING” appears on the display and the volume turns off (the volume level indicator goes off).

MUTING

To restore the sound, press MUTING again so that “MUTING

OFF” appears on the display.

• Turning MASTER VOLUME on the front panel or pressing

VOLUME +/– on the remote control also restores the sound.

Activating the Subwoofer Sound

You can cancel the subwoofer sound even though you have connected a subwoofer and have set “SUBWOOFER” to “YES”

(see page 28). This is useful when enjoying surround sound at night.

On the front panel ONLY:

Press SUBWOOFER OUT ON/OFF to cancel the subwoofer sound output.

SUBWOOFER OUT ON/OFF

Each time you press the button, the subwoofer sound output is deactivated (“SUBWFR OFF”) or activated (“SUBWFR ON”).

– Select “SUBWFR OFF” to deactivate the subwoofer sound output.

– Select “SUBWFR ON” to activate it.

Note:

You cannot select “SUBWFR OFF” when you have set “FRONT SPK” to “SMALL.” See page 29.

Attenuating the Input Signal

When the input level of the playing source is too high, the sounds will be distorted. If this happens, you need to attenuate the input signal level to prevent the sound distortion.

• You can do this setting for each source.

On the front panel ONLY:

Press and hold INPUT ATT so that the INPUT ATT indicator lights up on the display.

• Each time you press and hold the button, the

INPUT

ANALOG/DIGITAL

INPUT ATT input attenuator mode turns on (“ATT ON”) or off (“NORMAL”).

Notes:

• This effect is applied to only the main room sources connected to the analog terminals.

• This function is not valid for the DVD MULTI playback mode.

21

EN14-26.RX-9010VBK[J]f 21 01.2.15, 0:14 PM

Selecting the Line Direct Function Using the Sleep Timer

You can enjoy the sound closer to original source by skipping the sound adjustments such as Digital Equalization and Midnight Mode.

Only the volume level and Bass Boost are adjustable when the Line

Direct function is turned on.

• You can do this setting for each source.

Press LINE DIRECT.

The LINE DIRECT lamp on the front panel button lights up.

LINE DIRECT

LINE DIRECT

Using the Sleep Timer, you can fall asleep to music and know the receiver will turn off by itself rather than play all night.

From the remote control ONLY:

Press SLEEP repeatedly.

The SLEEP indicator lights up on the display, and the shut-off time changes as follows (in minutes):

SLEEP

On the front panel From the remote control

• Each time you press the button, the Line Direct function turns on

(“DIRECT ON”) and off (“DIRECT OFF”).

– Select “DIRECT ON” to activate the Line Direct function.

The LINE DIRECT lamp on the front panel button lights up.

– Select “DIRECT OFF” to cancel it.

The LINE DIRECT lamp on the front panel button goes off.

Notes:

• This function is applied only to the main room sources.

• If you turn on the Line Direct function while using the Surround and

DSP modes, the effect changes as follows:

Input

Analog

Digital

Mode

Surround

Not valid

Valid

DSP

Not valid

Not valid

• Turning off the Line Direct function activates the sound adjustments previously selected such as the Digital Equalization and Midnight

Mode.

Changing the Display Brightness

Press DIMMER.

• Each time you press the button, the display dims and brightens alternately.

DIMMER

DIMMER

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90

0 (Canceled)

When the shut-off time comes

The receiver turns off automatically.

• If the sub-room source is still played (the SUB ROOM and

SPEAKERS SUB ROOM indicators are lit on the display) when the shut-off time comes, the receiver will not turn off, but only the main room sound will shut off.

To check or change the time remaining until the shut-off time

Press SLEEP once.

The remaining time until the shut-off time appears in minutes.

• To change the shut-off time, press SLEEP repeatedly.

To cancel the Sleep Timer

Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP 0min” appears on the display.

(The SLEEP indicator goes off.)

• Turning off the power also cancels the Sleep Timer.

Recording a Source

You can dim the display.

On the front panel From the remote control

Note:

Even though you have made the display dimmer, it brightens for a while when you operate the receiver (except SURROUND ON/OFF, source selecting buttons, MAIN ROOM ON/OFF, SUBROOM ON/OFF, and SUB ROOM CONTROL).

For analog-to-analog recording

You can record any analog source through the receiver to —

• the cassette deck (or MD recorder) connected to the TAPE/MD jacks,

• the VCRs connected to the VCR 1 and VCR 2 jacks, and

• the CD recorder connected to the CDR jacks

— at the same time.

For digital-to-digital recording

You can record the currently selected digital input source through the receiver to a digital recording device connected to the DIGITAL

OUT terminal.

Notes:

• Analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog recordings are not possible.

• The output volume level, Midnight Mode (see page 21), Bass Boost

(see page 21), Digital Equalization (see page 20), Surround/DSP modes (see page 37) cannot affect the recording.

• The test tone signal (see pages 40) does not come out through the

DIGITAL OUT terminal.

IMPORTANT:

• While recording, do not turn off the receiver or main room source; otherwise, recording will stop.

• If the same source is selected both for the main room and the sub-room, operating the sub-room source will affect the recording.

22

EN14-26.RX-9010VBK[J]f 22 01.2.15, 0:14 PM

Sub-Room Operations

This section explains only the operations used when you play any sound source in the sub-room.

See pages 17 for the main room operations.

IMPORTANT:

Check to see if the proper indicator(s) and information appear on the display on the front panel before/while using the buttons and controls.

For the sub-room operations:

• The SUB ROOM indicator is lit.

• The source name for the sub-room is lit on the display.

• When using the remote control:

– Set MAIN ROOM/SUB ROOM selector to

“SUB ROOM.”

– Check to see if the following information

MAIN ROOM appear on the display window on the remote control:

SUB ROOM

Indications MAIN ROOM/

SUB ROOM selector

MAIN ROOM

SUB ROOM

Buttons

FM/AM

CD

PHONO

TAPE/MD

DVD

CDR

USB AUDIO

TV/DBS

VCR 1

VCR 2

VIDEO

MAIN ROOM

SUB ROOM

Indications

TUNER

CD

PHONO

TAPE

DVD

CDR

USB

TV**

VCR 1

VCR 2

VIDEO

*

*

Ex. When you press CD with

MAIN ROOM/SUB ROOM selector set to “SUB ROOM.”

MAIN ROOM

MAIN ROOM

ON/OFF

STANDBY

SUB ROOM

SUB ROOM

ON/OFF

TV/CATV/DBS

POWER

ON

VCR1

POWER

SUB ROOM

When you set MAIN ROOM/SUB ROOM selector * and press the buttons listed above, the corresponding indication appears for 10 seconds for your confirmation.

Notes:

• You can only select the analog input as the sub-room source.

* MAIN ROOM or SUB ROOM indicator does not appear when no indicators appear on the display window.

** When you set TV/CATV/DBS selector to “CATV/DBS,” “CATV” appears as the indication. (See page 68.)

Turning the Power On and Off (Standby) and Selecting the Sub-room Operations

On the front panel:

1. Press POWER.

The STANDBY lamp on the front panel

STANDBY

POWER goes off, and the MAIN ROOM indicator lights up on the display. The name of the current main room source (or station frequency) appears on the display.

Current source name and Surround/DSP modes for the main room appear

ANALOG L R

1

SPEAKERS

MAIN ROOM

VOLUME

Current volume level for the main room is shown here

The currently selected SPEAKERS 1 and/or 2 indicator(s) light(s) up on the display.

2. Press SUB ROOM ON/OFF.

SUB ROOM ON /OFF

The SUB ROOM indicator lights up on the display (and the SPEAKERS SUB ROOM indicator lights up on the display if it has been activated).

• If the SPEAKERS SUB ROOM indicator is not lit on the display, see also “Setting the Front Speakers Either for the

Main Room or Sub-room” on page 27, and “Activating the

Sub-room Front Speakers” on page 26.

3. Press SUB ROOM CONTROL.

The current source name for the sub-room appears on the display.

SUB ROOM CONTROL

“SUB” and the source name for the sub-room appear

ANALOG

LINEAR PCM

L C R

SUBWFR LFE

DIGITAL

LS S RS

1 1

SPEAKERS

2 SUB ROOM

DGTL AUTO DVD MULTI PRO LOGIC

DSP

AUTO MUTING TUNED STEREO

3D–PHONIC MIDNIGHT MODE

RDS EON

TA NEWS INFO

HEADPHONE DIGITAL EQ INPUT ATT ONE TOUCH OPERATION

MAIN ROOM

SUB ROOM

SLEEP VOLUME

Current volume level for the sub-room is shown here

Now the buttons and controls on the front panel work for the sub-room operations.

• Each time you press the button, the buttons and controls on the front panel alternate between for the main room and for the sub-room.

STANDBY

To turn off the power (into standby mode), press POWER again.

The STANDBY lamp lights red. A small amount of power is consumed in standby

POWER mode. To turn the power off completely, unplug the AC power cord.

23

EN14-26.RX-9010VBK[J]f 23 01.2.15, 0:15 PM

From the remote control:

1. Set MAIN ROOM/SUB ROOM selector to “SUB

ROOM.”

MAIN ROOM SUB ROOM

Now the buttons on the remote control work for the sub-room operations.

2. Press AUDIO POWER ON.

STANDBY

The STANDBY lamp on the front panel goes off, and the SUB

ROOM indicator lights up on the display (and the SPEAKERS

SUB ROOM indicator also lights up on the display if it has been activated).

• The display does not show the indication for the sub-room operations, but you can operate the sub-room.

• If the SPEAKERS SUB ROOM indicator is not lit on the display, see “Activating the Sub-room Front Speakers” on page 26.

To turn off the power (into standby mode), press

AUDIO POWER STANDBY.

STANDBY

ON

ON

Canceling the Sub-room Operations

On the front panel:

To stop the sub-room operations and sounds

from the sub-room speakers, press

SUB ROOM ON/OFF.

The SUB ROOM indicator on the display goes

SUB ROOM ON /OFF off, and the SPEAKERS SUB ROOM indicator on the display also goes off (no sound will be heard in the sub-room).

• You cannot use this receiver for the sub-room operations any more.

To use this receiver for the sub-room operations again

1. Press SUB ROOM ON/OFF.

SUB ROOM ON /OFF

The SUB ROOM indicator lights up on the display, and the SPEAKERS SUB ROOM indicator also lights up on the display if it has been activated.

2. Press SUB ROOM CONTROL.

The name of the current source for the subroom appears on the display.

SUB ROOM CONTROL

From the remote control:

To stop the sub-room operations and sounds from the sub-room

speakers, press SUB ROOM ON/OFF.

MAIN ROOM SUB ROOM

The SUB ROOM indicator on the display

ON/OFF ON/OFF goes off, and the SPEAKERS SUB ROOM indicator on the display also goes off (no sound will be heard in the sub-room).

The STANDBY lamp lights red.

Note:

If you have turned off the receiver with the volume level set at more than level “40,” the volume level will be automatically set at level “40” next time you turn on the receiver.

To use this receiver for the sub-room operations again, press

SUB ROOM ON/OFF again.

The SUB ROOM indicator lights up on the display, and the

SPEAKERS SUB ROOM indicator also lights up on the display if it has been activated.

Notes:

• If you have turned off the sub-room sound with the volume level set at more than level “40, the volume level will be automatically set at level “40” next time you turn on the sub-room sound.

• If “TURN ON MAIN OR SUB ROOM” appears on the display, press

MAIN ROOM ON/OFF or SUB ROOM ON/OFF to listen to the sound in the main room or in the sub-room; otherwise, the receiver will turn off after about 1 minute.

EN14-26.RX-9010VBK[J]f 24 01.2.15, 0:15 PM

24

Selecting the Sub-room Source to Play

Press one of the source selecting buttons.

The lamp on the front panel button for selected source lights up.

• The selected source name also appears on the display.

• When the source name of TV SOUND/DBS is assigned to “TV

SOUND,” TV SOUND/DBS buttons does not work. To change the source name, see “Changing the Source Name” on page 33.

On the front panel:

DVD MULTI DVD VCR 1 VCR 2 VIDEO TV SOUND/ DBS

PHONO CD CDR

SOURCE NAME

TAPE / MD USB AUDIO FM / AM

Notes:

• When connecting an MD recorder (to the TAPE/MD jacks), and a

DBS tuner (to the TV SOUND/DBS jacks), change the source names shown on the display. For details, see page 33.

• When you press one of the source selecting buttons on the remote control marked with an asterisk ( * ), the receiver automatically turns on. If you turn on the receiver with MAIN ROOM/SUB ROOM selector set to “SUB ROOM”, press MAIN ROOM ON/OFF to activate the main room operations.

• The source lamp does not light up for the sub-room source.

• You cannot select the following as the sub-room source:

– “TV SOUND”

– “DVD MULTI”

– Any digital input

You can only select the analog input as the sub-room source.

• You can select the video components as the sub-room source; however, you can see no pictures.

From the remote control:

SOURCE NAME

DVD

VCR 1

TV/ DBS

DVD MULTI

VCR 2

VIDEO

PHONO CD

CDR TAPE/MD

FM/AM USB AUDIO

Adjusting the Sub-room Volume

On the front panel:

To increase the volume, turn MASTER

VOLUME clockwise.

To decrease the volume, turn it counterclockwise.

• When you turn MASTER VOLUME rapidly, the volume level also changes rapidly.

• When you turn MASTER VOLUME slowly, the volume level also changes slowly.

From the remote control:

To increase the volume, press VOLUME +.

To decrease the volume, press VOLUME –.

VOLUME

MASTER VOLUME

Selected source name for the sub-room appears

ANALOG L C R

LINEAR PCM

SUBWFR

LS S

DIGITAL

LFE

RS

1 1

SPEAKERS

2 SUB ROOM

DGTL AUTO DVD MULTI PRO LOGIC

DSP

AUTO MUTING TUNED STEREO

3D–PHONIC MIDNIGHT MODE

RDS EON

TA NEWS INFO

HEADPHONE DIGITAL EQ INPUT ATT ONE TOUCH OPERATION

MAIN ROOM

SUB ROOM

SLEEP VOLUME

Current volume level for the sub-room is shown here

DVD

CD *

TAPE/MD *

Select the DVD player.

Select the CD player.

Select the cassette deck (or the MD recorder).

TV (SOUND)/DBS Select DBS tuner.

• Does not work for selecting TV.

VIDEO Select video component connected to the

VIDEO jacks.

PHONO *

FM/AM *

Select the turntable.

Select an FM or AM broadcast.

VCR 1

• Each time you press the button, the band alternates between FM and AM.

Select the video component connected to the

VCR 1 jacks.

VCR 2

CDR *

USB AUDIO *

Select the video component connected to the

VCR 2 jacks.

Select the CD recorder.

Select the personal computer (PC) connected to the USB terminal.

CAUTIONS:

• Always set the volume to the minimum before starting any source. If the volume is set at its high level, the sudden blast of sound energy can permanently damage your hearing and/or ruin your speakers.

• Be careful not to turn up the volume so high when controlling the receiver without listening to the playback sound. For example, when adjusting the volume level in the sub-room from the main room.

Note:

The volume level can be adjusted within the range of “0” (minimum) to

“90” (maximum).

25

EN14-26.RX-9010VBK[J]f 25 01.2.15, 0:15 PM

Activating the Sub-room Front Speakers

This section is not for the persons who connect the sub-room front speakers to the SUB ROOM PRE OUT jacks using another amplifier (see page 14).

Before you start, remember...

• When shipped from the factory, both pairs of the front speakers have been set to be used in the main room. To use the front speakers connected to the FRONT 2/SUB ROOM SPEAKERS terminals for the sub-room, see “Setting the Front Speakers Either for the Main Room or Sub-room” on page 27.

On the front panel ONLY:

Press SPEAKERS ON/OFF SUB ROOM to activate the front speakers in the sub-room.

The SPEAKERS SUB ROOM indicator lights up on the display.

1

• Each time you press the button, the lamp on the button turns on and off.

2

To deactivate the front speakers in the sub-

room, press

SPEAKERS ON/OFF SUB ROOM again.

Note:

If the center speaker or rear speakers are used for the Surround/DSP mode (see page 37) for the main room operations, the SPEAKERS ON/OFF SUB ROOM button does not work.

Muting the Sub-room Sound

From the remote control ONLY:

Press MUTING to mute the sound through the front speaker in the subroom.

The volume level indicator goes off.

MUTING

To restore the sound, press MUTING again so that the volume level indicator appears on the display.

• Turning MASTER VOLUME on the front panel or pressing

VOLUME +/– on the remote control also restores the sound.

Operating the Playback Source for the

Sub-room

• When you select “FM” or “AM” as the sub-room source, you can do the following:

– Tune into any station frequency manually (see page 35).

FM/AM TUNING

/REW

DOWN

PLAY

TUNING

FF/

UP

On the front panel From the remote control

– Select a preset station (see pages 35 and 36).

FM/AM PRESET

L—BALANCE—R

1

CENTER

2

SUBWFR

4 5

EFFECT

3

ROOM SIZE

6

On the front panel

REAR·L

7

/P

DIGITAL EQ

10

RETURN

REAR·R

8

0

FM MODE

LIVENESS

9

CENTER TONE

+ 10

100+

From the remote control

– Select FM reception mode (see page 36).

FM MODE

0

FM MODE

On the front panel From the remote control

• When you select the other sources as the sub-room source, you can operate them by using the remote control supplied with this receiver. (“TV SOUND,” “DVD MULTI” and the digital input cannot be selected as the sub-room source.)

– If they are one of the JVC products equipped with the COMPU

LINK remote control system or the AV COMPU LINK remote control system, see pages 55 to 64.

– If they are one of the JVC products, but not equipped with the above remote control systems, or if they are the products of the other manufacturers, see pages 65 to 71.

CAUTION:

Be careful not to turn up the volume so high when controlling the receiver without listening to the playback sound. For example, when adjusting the volume level in the sub-room from the main room.

Notes:

• Any sound adjustments such as the Surround/DSP modes cannot be applied to the sub-room source. You can only adjust the volume level.

• The One Touch Operation function (see page 34) cannot be used for the sub-room sources.

26

EN14-26.RX-9010VBK[J]f 26 01.2.15, 0:15 PM

Basic Settings

Some of the following settings are required after connecting and positioning your speakers, while others will make operations easier.

• You can use “On-screen Menu” for most of the main room operations. For details, see page 50.

The following operations are only possible while the receiver is ready for the main room operations.

IMPORTANT:

Check to see if the proper indicator(s) and information appear on the display on the front panel before/while using the buttons and controls.

For the main room operations:

• The MAIN ROOM indicator is lit.

• The source name for the sub-room is not lit on the display.

• When using the remote control:

– Set MAIN ROOM/SUB ROOM selector to

“MAIN ROOM.”

– Check to see if the following information

MAIN ROOM appear on the display window on the remote control:

SUB ROOM

MAIN ROOM/

SUB ROOM selector

MAIN ROOM

SUB ROOM

Buttons

SOUND

Indications

MAIN ROOM

*

SUB ROOM *

Indications

SOUND

After pressing SOUND, the following function are assigned to the specific number buttons:

Indications Buttons

BALANCE L

BALANCE R

SUBWFR

SOUND

S WFR

On the front panel ONLY:

1. Press SETTING repeatedly until

“FRONT SPK 2:” appears on the display.

The display changes to show the current setting.

MAIN:

SUB:

SETTING

2. Press CONTROL UP

5

/DOWN

∞

to specify the way you want to use the speakers connected to the

FRONT 2/SUB ROOM

CONTROL

DOWN UP

SPEAKERS terminals.

• Each time you press the buttons, the display changes to show the following:

MAIN SUB

Select this to use as the 2nd front speakers for the main room.

Select this to use as the front speakers for the subroom.

Note:

You can also adjust the front speakers setting with “On-screen Menus” by using remote control. (See page 54.)

Ex. When you press SOUND with

MAIN ROOM/SUB ROOM selector set to “MAIN ROOM.”

STANDBY

MAIN ROOM

MAIN ROOM

ON/OFF

SUB ROOM

SUB ROOM

ON/OFF

TV/CATV/DBS

POWER

ON

VCR1

POWER

MAIN ROOM SUB ROOM

When you set MAIN ROOM/SUB ROOM selector * and press the buttons listed above, the corresponding indication appears for 10 seconds for your confirmation.

Note:

* MAIN ROOM or SUB ROOM indicator does not appear when no indicators appear on the display window.

Setting the Front Speakers Either for the

Main Room or Sub-room

You can use the front speakers connected to the FRONT 2/SUB

ROOM SPEAKERS terminals either as the 2nd front speakers for the main room or as the front speakers for the sub-room.

Before you start, remember...

• There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is canceled before you finish, start from step 1 again.

Adjusting the Front Speaker Output

Balance

If the sounds you hear from the front right and left speakers are unequal, you can adjust the speaker output balance.

• You can do this setting for each source.

Before you start, remember....

• There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is canceled before you finish, start from step 1 again.

On the front panel:

1. Press LEVEL ADJUST repeatedly until “BAL – (with current setting)” appears on the display.

LEVEL

ADJUST

2. Press CONTROL UP

5

/DOWN

∞

to adjust the balance.

• Pressing CONTROL UP 5 decreases the left channel output (from R –21 to

CONTROL

DOWN UP

CENTER, from CENTER to L –21).

• Pressing CONTROL DOWN

∞

decreases the right channel output (from L –21 to CENTER, from

CENTER to R –21).

27

EN27-36.RX-9010VBK[J]f 27 01.2.15, 0:15 PM

From the remote control:

1. Press SOUND.

The 10 keys are activated for sound adjustments.

SOUND

2. Press BALANCE R or BALANCE L to adjust the balance.

L—BALANCE—R

• Pressing BALANCE R decreases the left channel output (from R –21 to CENTER,

1 2 from CENTER to L –21).

• Pressing BALANCE L decreases the right channel output (from L –21 to CENTER, from CENTER to R

–21).

Adjusting the Subwoofer Output Level

You can adjust the subwoofer output level if you have selected

“YES” for the “SUBWOOFER” (see to the left).

• You can do this setting for each source.

Before you start, remember....

• There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is canceled before you finish, start from step 1 again.

• When the front speakers are all deactivated, the subwoofer level cannot be adjusted.

Note:

This function is applied only to the main room sources.

On the front panel:

1. Press LEVEL ADJUST repeatedly until “SUBWFR” appears on the display.

The display changes to show the current setting.

2. Press CONTROL UP

5

/DOWN

∞

to adjust the subwoofer output level (from –20 dB to +10 dB).

LEVEL

ADJUST

CONTROL

DOWN UP

Setting the Subwoofer Information

Register whether you have connected a subwoofer or not.

Before you start, remember....

• There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is canceled before you finish, start from step 1 again.

On the front panel ONLY:

1. Press SETTING repeatedly until

“SUBWOOFER” appears on the display.

The display changes to show the current setting.

2. Press CONTROL UP

5

/DOWN

∞

to select “YES” or “NO.”

• Each time you press the button, the display alternates between “YES” and “NO.”

SETTING

CONTROL

DOWN UP

YES:

NO:

Select this when a subwoofer is connected.

Select this when no subwoofer is used.

From the remote control:

1. Press SOUND.

The 10 keys are activated for sound adjustments.

2. Press SUBWFR.

SOUND

SUBWFR

5

3. Press LEVEL + or LEVEL – to adjust the subwoofer output level from –20 dB to + 10 dB.

• Each time you press the button, “S WFR” appears on the display on the remote control.

LEVEL+

LEVEL–

Note:

You cannot use SUBWOOFER OUT ON/OFF on the front panel (see page 21) and adjust the subwoofer output level (see to the right) when

“SUBWOOFER” is set to “NO.”

01.2.15, 0:15 PM

28

EN27-36.RX-9010VBK[J]f 28

Setting the Speakers for a Surround

Field

To obtain the best possible surround sound of the Surround and DSP modes, you have to register the information about the speakers arrangement after all connections are completed.

• This function is applied only to the main room sources.

Before you start, remember....

• There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is canceled before you finish, start from step 1 again.

Front, Center, and Rear Speaker Setting

Register the sizes of all the connected speakers.

• When you change your speakers, you need to register the information about the speakers again.

On the front panel ONLY:

1. Press SETTING repeatedly until

“FRONT SPK” (Front Speaker),

“CTR SPK” (Center Speaker) or

“REAR SPK” (Rear Speaker) appears on the display.

The display changes to show the current setting.

SETTING

2. Press CONTROL UP

5

/DOWN

∞

to select the appropriate item about the speaker selected in the above step.

• Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the following:

CONTROL

DOWN UP

Center Delay Time Setting

Register the delay time of the sound from the center speaker, comparing to that of the sound from the front speakers.

If the distance from your listening point to the center speaker is equal to that to the front speakers, select 0 ms. As the distance to the center speaker becomes shorter, increase the delay time.

• 1 msec increase (or decrease) in delay time corresponds to 11 13 /

16 inches (30 cm) decrease (or increase) in distance.

• When shipped from the factory, the delay time is set to 0 ms.

On the front panel ONLY:

1. Press SETTING repeatedly until

“CTR DELAY” (Center Delay) appears on the display.

The display changes to show the current setting.

SETTING

2. Press CONTROL UP

5

/DOWN

∞

to select the delay time of the center speaker output (from 0 ms to 5ms).

CONTROL

DOWN UP

Notes:

• Center delay time is not valid for the DVD MULTI playback mode.

• You cannot adjust the center delay time when you have set “CTR

SPK” to “NONE.”

LARGE SMALL NONE

LARGE: Select this when the speaker size is relatively large.

SMALL: Select this when the speaker size is relatively small.

NONE: Select this when you have not connected a speaker.

(Not selectable for the front speakers)

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to select the appropriate items for the other speakers.

Notes:

• Keep the following comment in mind as reference when adjusting.

– If the size of the cone speaker unit built in your speaker is greater than 4 3 /

4

inches (12 cm), select “LARGE,” and if it is smaller than

4 3 /

4

inches (12 cm), select “SMALL.”

• If you have selected “NO” for the subwoofer setting, you can only select “LARGE” for the front speaker setting.

• If you have selected “SMALL” for the front speaker setting, you cannot select “LARGE” for the center and rear speaker settings.

Rear Delay Time Setting

Register the delay time of the sound from the rear speakers, comparing to that of the sound from the front speakers.

If the distance from your listening point to the rear speakers is equal to that to the front speakers, select 0 ms. As the distance to the rear speakers becomes shorter, increase the delay time.

• 1 msec increase (or decrease) in delay time corresponds to 11 13 /

16 inches (30 cm) decrease (or increase) in distance.

• When shipped from the factory, the delay time is set to 5 ms.

On the front panel ONLY:

1. Press SETTING repeatedly until

“REAR DELAY” appears on the display.

The display changes to show the current setting.

SETTING

2. Press CONTROL UP

5

/DOWN

∞

to select the delay time of the rear speaker output (from 0 ms to 15 ms).

CONTROL

DOWN UP

Notes:

• Rear delay time is not valid for the DVD MULTI playback mode.

• You cannot adjust the rear delay time when you have set “REAR

SPK” to “NONE.”

29

EN27-36.RX-9010VBK[J]f 29 01.2.15, 0:15 PM

Front speaker

Center speaker

Front speaker

2.4 m

2.1 m

3.0 m

2.7 m

Rear speakers

EX. In this case, set the center delay time to

“1 ms” and the rear delay time to “2 ms.”

Crossover Frequency Setting

Small speakers cannot reproduce the bass sound very well. So, if you have used a small speaker for any of the front, center, and rear channels, this receiver automatically reallocate the bass elements, originally assigned to the channel for which you have connected the small speaker, to another channel (for which you have connected the large speaker).

To use this function properly, you need to set the crossover frequency level according to the size of the small speaker connected.

• If you have selected “LARGE” for all speakers (see page 29), this function cannot be adjusted.

On the front panel ONLY:

1. Press SETTING repeatedly until

“CROSS OVER” appears on the display.

The display changes to show the current setting.

SETTING

2. Press CONTROL UP

5

/ DOWN

∞

to select the crossover frequency level according to the size of the small speaker connected.

• Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the following:

CONTROL

DOWN UP

80Hz 100Hz 120Hz

• Use the following comments as reference when adjusting:

80Hz: Select this when the cone speaker unit built in the speaker is about 4 3 /

4

inches (12 cm).

100Hz: Select this when the cone speaker unit built in the speaker is about 3 15 /

16

inches (10 cm).

120Hz: Select this when the cone speaker unit built in the speaker is about 3 3 /

16

inches (8 cm).

Note:

Crossover frequency is not valid for the DVD MULTI playback mode,

5 CH/4 CH Stereo mode, 3D-PHONIC mode, and HEADPHONE DSP mode.

Low Frequency Effect Attenuator Setting

If the bass sound is distorted while playing back a source using

Dolby Digital or DTS Digital Surround, follow the procedure below.

On the front panel ONLY:

1. Press SETTING repeatedly until

“LFE ATT” (Low Frequency Effect

Attenuator) appears on the display.

The display changes to show the current setting.

SETTING

2. Press CONTROL UP

5

/DOWN

∞

to select the low frequency effect attenuator level.

• Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the following:

0dB 10dB

CONTROL

DOWN UP

0dB:

10dB:

Normally select this.

Select this when the bass sound is distorted.

Notes:

• Low frequency effect attenuator is not valid for the DVD MULTI playback mode.

• This function takes effect only when the Dolby Digital or DTS Digital

Surround sounds with LFE signals comes in and “SUBWOOFER” is set to “YES.”

Digital Input (DIGITAL IN) Terminal

Setting

When you use the digital input terminals, you have to register what components are connected to which terminals (DIGITAL 1/2/3/4).

Before you start, remember...

• There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is canceled before you finish, start from step 1 again.

On the front panel ONLY:

To set the DIGITAL 1 terminal:

SETTING

1. Press SETTING repeatedly until

“DGTL COAX” (Digital Coaxial) appears on the display.

The display changes to show the current setting for DIGITAL 1 terminal.

2. Press CONTROL UP

5

/DOWN

∞

to select the appropriate digital terminal setting.

• Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the following:

CONTROL

DOWN UP

1: DVD

“

1: MD**

“

1: CDR

“

1: TV (or DBS* )

“

1: CD

“

(back to the beginning)

* If you have changed the source name from “TV” to “DBS,”

“DBS” appears (see page 33).

** Change the source name to “MD” for TAPE/MD terminals when you use an MD recorder (see page 33).

Continued to the next page.

30

EN27-36.RX-9010VBK[J]f 30 01.2.15, 0:15 PM

To set the DIGITAL 2/3/4 terminals:

1. Press SETTING until DIGITAL 2/3/4 terminals setting appears on the display.

The display changes to show the current settings for the DIGITAL 2/3/4 terminals.

DIGITAL 2 terminal setting

SETTING

Selecting the Analog or Digital Input

Mode

When you have connected digital source components using the digital terminals (see page 10), you need to change the input mode for these components to the appropriate digital input mode correctly

— DGTL AUTO, DGTL DTS, or DGTL D.D.

DIGITAL 3 terminal setting DIGITAL 4 terminal setting

2. Press CONTROL UP

5

/DOWN

∞

to select the appropriate digital terminal settings.

• Each time you press the buttons, the display changes to show the following:

CONTROL

DOWN UP

When the DGTL COAX (DIGITAL 1) is set to “DVD”

2: CD 3: TV (or DBS*) 4: CDR

“

2: CD 3: TV (or DBS*) 4:MD**

“

2: CD 3: MD** 4: CDR

“

2: MD** 3: TV (or DBS*) 4: CDR

“

(back to the beginning)

When the DGTL COAX (DIGITAL 1) is set to “MD”**

2: CD 3: TV (or DBS*) 4: CDR

“

2: CD 3: TV (or DBS*) 4: DVD

“

2: CD 3: DVD 4: CDR

“

2: DVD 3: TV (or DBS*) 4: CDR

“

(back to the beginning)

When the DGTL COAX (DIGITAL 1) is set to “CDR”

2: CD 3: TV (or DBS*) 4: DVD

“

2: CD 3: TV (or DBS*) 4: MD**

“

2: CD 3: MD** 4: DVD

“

2: MD** 3: TV (or DBS*) 4: DVD

“

(back to the beginning)

Before you start, remember...

• The digital input (DIGITAL IN) terminal setting should be correctly done for the sources you want to select the digital

input mode for. Without setting this digital input terminal correctly, you cannot change the input mode from analog input to digital input even if you follow the procedure below.

• The digital input can be used for the main room sources. The analog input is always selected as the sub-room source without respect to this setting.

On the front panel:

1. Press one of the source selecting button (DVD,

TV SOUND/DBS, CD, CDR, or TAPE/MD)* for which you want to change the input mode.

The lamp on the front panel button for selected source lights up.

DVD MULTI DVD VCR 2 VIDEO TV SOUND/DBS VCR 1

PHONO CD CDR TAPE / MD USB AUDIO FM / AM

When the DGTL COAX (DIGITAL 1) is set to “TV” or “DBS”

2: CD 3: DVD 4: CDR

“

2: CD 3: DVD 4: MD**

“

2: CD 3: MD** 4: CDR

“

2: MD** 3: DVD 4: CDR

“

(back to the beginning)

When the DGTL COAX (DIGITAL 1) is set to “CD”

2: DVD 3: TV (or DBS*) 4: CDR

“

2: DVD 3: TV (or DBS*) 4: MD**

“

2: DVD 3: MD** 4: CDR

“

2: MD** 3: TV (or DBS*) 4: CDR

“

(back to the beginning)

* If you have changed the source name from “TV” to “DBS,”

“DBS” appears (see page 33).

** Change the source name to “MD” for TAPE/MD jacks when you use an MD recorder (see page 33).

Note:

When shipped from the factory, the DIGITAL IN terminals can be used as the digital input for the following components:

• DIGITAL 1 (coaxial): For DVD player

• DIGITAL 2 (optical): For CD player

• DIGITAL 3 (optical): For digital TV broadcast tuner

• DIGITAL 4 (optical): For CD recorder

SOURCE NAME

Note:

* You can select the digital input only for the sources which you have selected the digital input terminals for. (See “Digital Input

(DIGITAL IN) Terminal Setting” on page 30.)

2. Press INPUT ANALOG/DIGITAL briefly to change the input mode.

• Each time you press the button, the input mode changes as follows:

INPUT

ANALOG/DIGITAL

INPUT ATT

DGTL AUTO

(Digital)

ANALOG

DGTL AUTO: Select this for the digital input mode. The receiver automatically detects the incoming signal.

always lights up on the display, and the digital signal indicator for the detected

ANALOG: signals also lights up.

Select this for the analog input mode.

ANALOG always lights up.

When selecting “DGTL AUTO”, following indicators showing detected signals light up on the display.

LINEAR PCM

LINEAR PCM

DIGITAL

: Lights up when Linear PCM signals come in.

• Flashes while seaching the incoming signals.

: Lights up when the digital signals are not recognized.

: Lights up when Dolby Digital signals come in.

: Lights up when DTS Digital Surround signals come in.

31

EN27-36.RX-9010VBK[J]f 31 01.2.15, 0:15 PM

When playing a software encoded with the Dolby Digital or

DTS Digital Surround, the following symptoms may occur:

• Sound does not come out at the beginning of playback.

• Noise comes out while using the searching for or skipping chapters or tracks.

In this case press CONTROL UP 5 /DOWN ∞ to select “DGTL D.D” or “DGTL DTS” CONTROL

DOWN UP while “DGTL AUTO” still remains on the display.

• Each time you press the button, the input mode changes as follows:

DGTL AUTO

(Digital)

DGTL D.D

(Digital Dolby Digital)

DGTL DTS

(Digital)

• “DGTL” lights instead of “DGTL AUTO” on the display when

“DGTL D.D” or “DGTL DTS” is selected.

When selecting “DGTL D.D” or “DGTL DTS”, following indicators showing detected signals light up on the display.

: Always lights up when “DGTL D.D” or

“DGTL DTS” is selected.

When selecting “DGTL D.D”

DIGITAL : • Lights up when Dolby Digital signals come in.

• Flashes when Dolby Digital signals are not recognized.

When selecting “DGTL DTS”

: • Lights up when DTS Digital Surround signals come in.

• Flashes when DTS Digital Surround signals are not recognized.

Note:

When you turn off the power or select another source, “DGTL

DTS” and “DGTL D.D” settings are canceled and the digital input mode is automatically reset to “DGTL AUTO.”

To change the input mode back to analog input, select

“ANALOG” in step 2.

From the remote control:

1. Press the source selecting button (DVD, CD,

TAPE/MD, CDR or TV/DBS)* for which you want to change the input mode.

2. Press ANALOG/DIGITAL INPUT to change the input mode.

• Each time you press the button, the input mode changes as follows:

ANALOG/DIGITAL

INPUT

DGTL AUTO

(Digital)

ANALOG

When playing a software encoded with the Dolby Digital or

DTS Digital Surround, “DGTL AUTO” may not happen to work well. In this case press CONTROL UP

5

/DOWN

∞

on the front panel to select “DGTL D.D” or “DGTL DTS” (while

“DGTL AUTO” remains on the display).

Note:

You can select “DGTL D.D” or “DGTL DTS” with “On-screen Menus” by using the remote control (see page 50).

Selecting the Video Input Terminal

This receiver is equipped with component video input terminals for the DVD player and DBS tuner, which give you higher picture quality. When you use the component video input terminals for the

DVD player and/or DBS tuner, change the video input terminal setting.

Before you start, remember....

• There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is canceled before you finish, start from step 1 again.

On the front panel ONLY:

1. Press SETTING repeatedly until

“VIDEO DVD” or “VIDEO DBS” appears on the display.

The display changes to show the current setting.

SETTING

• Select “VIDEO DVD” to select the video input terminal for the DVD player and “VIDEO DBS” for the DBS tuner.

2. Press CONTROL UP

5

/DOWN

∞

to select the appropriate video input terminal.

• Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the following:

CONTROL

DOWN UP

COMPNT

(Component)

S/C

(S-video/Composite)

DVD

VCR 1

TV/DBS

DVD MULTI

VCR 2

VIDEO

PHONO CD

CDR TAPE/MD

FM/AM USB AUDIO

Note:

* You can select the digital input only for the sources which you have selected the digital input terminals for. (See “Digital Input

(DIGITAL IN) Terminal Setting” on page 30.)

COMPNT: Select this when you connect the DVD player or

DBS tuner to the component video input terminals.

S/C: Select this when you connect the DVD player or

DBS tuner to the composite video or S-video input terminal.

Note:

Without changing the video input terminal setting, you can see the picture through the video input terminals, but cannot use the AV

COMPU LINK remote control system correctly (see page 62).

32

EN27-36.RX-9010VBK[J]f 32 01.2.15, 0:15 PM

Changing the Source Name

When you have connected an MD recorder to the TAPE/MD jacks or the DBS tuner to the TV SOUND/DBS jacks on the rear panel, change the source name which will be shown on the display when you select the MD recorder or DBS tuner as the source.

• When you select DBS as a source for the sub-room, you cannot change the source name.

On the front panel ONLY:

When changing the source name from “TAPE” to

“MD”:

• Press and hold SOURCE NAME (TAPE/MD) until “ASSGN. MD” appears on the display.

TAPE / MD

Showing the Text Information on the

Display

When you have connected an MD recorder or CD player equipped with TEXT COMPU LINK remote control system (see page 57), you can show the text information, such as disc title or track title, on the display of this receiver. To show it on the display, follow the procedure below.

Before you start, remember....

• There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is canceled before you finish, start from step 1 again.

On the front panel ONLY:

1. Press SETTING repeatedly until “FL DISP”

(Display) appears on the display.

SETTING

SOURCE NAME

When changing the source name from “TV ” to

“DBS”:

• Press and hold SOURCE NAME (TV SOUND/

DBS) until “ASSGN. DBS” appears on the display.

TV SOUND/DBS

SOURCE NAME

The display changes to show the current setting.

2. Press CONTROL UP

5

/DOWN

∞

to select either the source name or the text information to be shown on the display.

CONTROL

DOWN UP

To change the source name to “TAPE” or “TV,” repeat the same procedure above — press and hold SOURCE NAME (TAPE/MD) to select “TAPE,” or press and hold SOURCE NAME (TV

SOUND/DBS) to select “TV.”

• Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the following:

NORM

(Normal)

TEXT

Note:

Without changing the source name, you can still use the connected components. However, there may be some inconvenience.

• “TAPE” or “TV SOUND” will appear on the display when you select the MD recorder or DBS tuner.

• You cannot use the digital input (see page 30) for the MD recorder.

• You cannot use the COMPU LINK remote control system (see page

55) to operate the MD recorder.

NORM:

TEXT:

Source name and Surround/DSP appear during play.

Text information appears during play.

Note:

Though you have selected “TEXT,” the source name and Surround/

DSP mode appear if a playing disc has no text information.

33

EN27-36.RX-9010VBK[J]f 33 01.2.15, 0:15 PM

Basic Setting and Adjustment — Auto

Memory

Without any setting required, this receiver stores different sound settings for each different playing source automatically whenever you do the following:

• Turning on the power (see page 17)

• Changing the source to play (see page 18)

• Changing the source name (see page 33)

So, you do not have to change the sound settings next time you select the same source. The stored settings for the selected source are automatically recalled.

To store the volume level

(ONE TOUCH OPERATION)

Before you start, remember....

• There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is canceled before you finish, start from step 1 again.

On the front panel ONLY:

1. Press SETTING repeatedly until “ONE TOUCH” appears on the display.

SETTING

The following settings are automatically stored for each source:

• Analog/digital input mode (see page 31)

• Bass boost (see page 21)

• Digital equalization adjustment (see page 20)

• DVD MULTI playback mode setting (see page 49)

• Front speaker output balance (see page 27)

• Input attenuator mode (see page 21)

• Line direct (see page 22)

• Midnight mode (see page 21)

• Subwoofer setting and its output level (see pages 21 and 28)

• Surround mode on/off (see page 39)

• Surround/DSP mode setting (see pages 40 – 48)

You can also assign and store the volume level for each source. See

“To store the volume level” to the right.

Notes:

• This function cannot be used for the sub-room sources.

• If the source is FM or AM, you can assign different settings for each band.

• You cannot assign and store different settings for digital input mode and analog input mode (when selecting a digital source).

• The Surround modes and DSP modes cannot be used with DVD

MULTI playback mode at the same time.

The display changes to show the current setting.

2. Press CONTROL UP

5

/DOWN

∞

to turn on the

One Touch Operation.

CONTROL

DOWN UP

The ONE TOUCH OPERATION indicator lights up on the display.

• Each time you press the button, the one touch operation function turns on (“ON”) and off (“OFF”).

To recall the volume level

With the ONE TOUCH OPERATION indicator lit, the volume level for the currently selected source is recalled when the source is selected.

To cancel the One Touch Operation

Select “OFF” in step 2 above so that the ONE TOUCH

OPERATION indicator goes off. (Even though the One Touch

Operation is canceled, the recalled volume remains active.)

EN27-36.RX-9010VBK[J]f 34 01.2.15, 0:15 PM

34

Receiving Radio Broadcasts

You can browse through all the stations or use the preset function to go immediately to a particular station.

• You can use “On-screen Menu” for most of the main room operations. For details, see page 50.

Indicates the functions YOU CAN ALSO USE when the receiver is ready for the sub-room operations.

IMPORTANT:

Check to see if the proper indicator(s) and information(s) appear on the display on the front panel before/while using the buttons and controls.

When using the buttons and controls on the front panel:

• For the main room operations

– The MAIN ROOM indicator is lit.

– The source name for the sub-room is not lit on the display.

• For the sub-room operations

– The SUB ROOM indicator is lit.

– The source name for the sub-room is lit on the display.

When using the remote control:

• For the main room operations

– Set MAIN ROOM/SUB ROOM selector to

“MAIN ROOM.”

• For the sub-room operations

– Set MAIN ROOM/SUB ROOM selector to

“SUB ROOM.”

MAIN ROOM SUB ROOM

2. Press TUNING UP or TUNING DOWN

/REW PLAY

DOWN TUNING

until you find the frequency you want.

• Pressing TUNING UP increases the frequency.

• Pressing TUNING DOWN decreases the frequency.

FF/

UP

Notes:

• When a station of sufficient signal strength is tuned in, the TUNED indicator lights on the display.

• When an FM stereo program is received, the STEREO indicator also lights up.

• When you hold the button (and release it) in step 2, the frequency keeps changing until a station is tuned in.

• You can only select the same station of the same band (FM or AM) both for the main room and sub-room operations. If you change the station for the sub-room, it also changes for the main room (and vice versa). This also means that if you change the station for the sub-room while recording a broadcasting program in the main room, recording in the main room will be interrupted.

Tuning in Stations Manually

On the front panel:

1. Press FM/AM to select the band

(FM or AM).

The last received station of the selected band is tuned in.

• Each time you press the button, the band alternates between FM and AM.

For the main room

R ANALOG L

1

SPEAKERS

AUTO MUTING TUNED STEREO

MAIN ROOM

VOLUME

FM/AM

For the sub-room

SPEAKERS

SUB ROOM

AUTO MUTING TUNED STEREO

SUB ROOM

VOLUME

Using Preset Tuning

Once a station is assigned to a channel number, the station can be quickly tuned. You can preset up to 30 FM and 15 AM stations.

To store the preset stations

Before you start, remember...

• There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is canceled before you finish, start from step 1 again.

On the front panel ONLY:

1. Tune in the station you want to preset (see

“Tuning in Stations Manually” to the left).

• If you want to store the FM reception mode for this station, select the FM reception mode you want. See “Selecting the

FM Reception Mode” on page 36.

ANALOG

L R

1

SPEAKERS

AUTO MUTING TUNED STEREO

MAIN ROOM

VOLUME

2. Press MEMORY.

MEMORY

2. Press FM/AM TUNING

5

/

∞

until

FM/AM TUNING

you find the frequency you want.

• Pressing FM/AM TUNING

5

increases the frequency.

• Pressing FM/AM TUNING

∞

decreases the frequency.

From the remote control:

1. Press FM/AM to select the band (FM or AM).

FM/AM

The last received station of the selected band is tuned in.

• Each time you press the button, the band alternates between

FM and AM.

35

ANALOG

L R

1

SPEAKERS

AUTO MUTING TUNED STEREO

MAIN ROOM

VOLUME

The channel number position starts flashing on the display for about 10 seconds.

3. Press FM/AM PRESET

5

/

∞

to select a channel number while the channel number position is flashing.

FM/AM PRESET

EN27-36.RX-9010VBK[J]f 35 01.2.15, 0:15 PM

4. Press MEMORY again while the selected channel number is flashing on the display.

1

SPEAKERS

AUTO MUTING TUNED STEREO

MAIN ROOM

VOLUME

MEMORY

The selected channel number stops flashing.

The station is assigned to the selected channel number.

ANALOG L R

5. Repeat steps 1 to 4 until you store all the stations you want.

To erase a stored preset station

Storing a new station on a used number erases the previously stored one.

To tune in a preset station

On the front panel:

1. Press FM/AM.

The last received station of the selected band is tuned in.

• Each time you press the button, the band alternates between FM and AM.

FM/AM

2. Press FM/AM PRESET

5

/

∞

until you find the channel you want.

• Pressing FM/AM PRESET 5 increases the number.

• Pressing FM/AM PRESET ∞ decreases the number.

FM/AM PRESET

From the remote control:

1. Press FM/AM.

The last received station of the selected band is tuned in.

• Each time you press the button, the band alternates between FM and AM.

FM/AM

2. Press the 10 keys to select a preset channel number.

L—BALANCE—R EFFECT

• For channel number 5, press 5.

• For channel number 15, press +10 then 5.

• For channel number 20, press +10 then 10.

• For channel number 30, press +10, +10, then 10.

1

CENTER

4

REAR·L

7

/P

DIGITAL EQ

10

RETURN

2

SUBWFR

5

REAR·R

8

0

FM MODE

3

ROOM SIZE

6

LIVENESS

9

CENTER TONE

+ 10

100+

Selecting the FM Reception Mode

When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to receive or noisy

You can change the FM reception mode while receiving an FM broadcast.

• You can store the FM reception mode for each preset station.

Press FM MODE.

• Each time you press the button, the FM reception mode alternates between “AUTOMUTING” and “MONO.”

FM MODE

On the front panel

ANALOG L R

1

SPEAKERS

ANALOG L R

1

SPEAKERS

0

FM MODE

From the remote control

AUTO MUTING TUNED STEREO

MAIN ROOM

VOLUME

TUNED

MAIN ROOM

VOLUME

AUTOMUTING: When a program is broadcasted in stereo, you will hear stereo sound; when in monaural, you will hear monaural sounds. This mode is also useful to suppress static noise between stations. The AUTO

MUTING indicator lights on the display.

MONO: Reception will be improved although you will lose the stereo effect. In this mode, you will hear noise while tuning into the stations. The AUTO MUTING and

STEREO indicator go off from the display.

Note:

Before you use the FM MODE button on the remote control, press

FM/AM on the remote control to set the mode of the remote control to

“TUNER.”

Notes:

• You can only select the same station of the same band (FM or AM) both for the main room and sub-room operations. If you change the station for the sub-room, it also changes for the main room (and vice versa). This also means that if you change the station for the sub-room while recording a broadcasting program in the main room, recording in the main room will be interrupted.

• When you use the 10 keys on the remote control, be sure that

“TUNER” appears on the display window on the remote control.

If not, start at step 1.

• The preset number does not appear for the sub-room.

36

EN27-36.RX-9010VBK[J]f 36 01.2.15, 0:15 PM

Creating a Surround Field in the Main Room

The built-in Surround Processor provides Surround mode and four types of the DSP (Digital Signal Processor) mode —

DAP (Digital Acoustic Processor) mode, 5 CH/4 CH Stereo mode, 3D-PHONIC mode and HEADPHONE DSP mode.

With this receiver, you can use a Surround mode and a DSP mode at the same time. Once you have adjusted Surround and/or DSP modes, the adjustments done for each source are memorized.

• You can use “On-screen Menu” for most of the main room operations. For details, see page 50.

The following operations are only possible while the receiver is ready for the main room operations, and are only used for the main room sources.

DSP modes

With this receiver, you can use four types of the DSP mode.

Surround modes

With this receiver, you can use two types of the Surround mode.

Following modes cannot be used when only the front speakers are connected to this receiver (without the rear speakers or center speaker).

Dolby Surround (Dolby Digital and Dolby Pro Logic) *

Used to watch the soundtracks of software encoded with Dolby

Digital (bearing the mark

D I G I T A L

(bearing the mark

DOLBY SURROUND

).

) or with Dolby Surround

Dolby Surround encoding format records the left front channel, right front channel, center channel, and rear channel (total 4 channels) signals into 2 channels. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built in this receiver decode these 2 channel signals into original 4 channel signals — matrix-based multichannel reproduction, and allows you to enjoy the realistic sound field in your listening room.

On the other hand, Dolby Digital encoding method (so called a discrete 5.1 channel digital audio format) records and compresses the left front channel, right front channel, center channel, left rear channel, right rear channel, and LFE channel (total 6 channels, but

LFE channel is counted as 0.1 channel, therefore called 5.1

channels) signals digitally. Each channel is completely independent from other channel signals to avoid interference, therefore, you can obtain much better sound quality with much stereo and surround effects.

The Dolby Digital decoder built in this receiver can create much more realistic sound field in your listening room. You may feel as if you were in a real theater.

In addition, Dolby Digital enables stereo rear sounds, and sets the cutoff frequency of the rear treble at 20 kHz, comparing to 7 kHz for

Dolby Pro Logic. These facts enhance the sound movement and being-there feelings much more than Dolby Pro Logic.

• To enjoy the software encoded with Dolby Digital, you must connect the source component using the digital terminal on the rear of this receiver. (See page 10.)

DTS Digital Surround **

DTS Digital Surround (bearing the mark ) is another discrete

5.1 channel digital audio format available on CD, LD, and DVD software.

Comparing to Dolby Digital, audio compression rate is relatively low. This fact allows DTS Digital Surround format to add breadth and depth to the reproduced sounds. As a result, DTS Digital

Surround features natural, solid and clear sound.

• To enjoy the software encoded with DTS Digital Surround, you must connect the source component using the digital terminal on the rear of this receiver. (See page 10.)

DAP modes

In order to reproduce a more acoustic sound field in your listening room while playing music sources, you can use DAP modes. This mode can be used when the front speakers are connected to this receiver (without respect to the rear/center speaker connection).

THEATER 1: Reproduces the sound field of a large theater

(where the seating capacity about 1,000).

THEATER 2: Reproduces the sound field of a small theater

(where the seating capacity about 300).

HALL 1: Gives clear vocal and the feeling of a large concert hall (where the seating capacity about 1,000).

HALL 2: Gives clear vocal and the feeling of a small concert hall (where the seating capacity about 300).

LIVE CLUB: Gives the feeling of a live music club with a low ceiling.

DANCE CLUB: Gives a throbbing bass beat.

PAVILION: Gives the spacious feeling of a pavilion with a high ceiling.

5 CH/4 CH Stereo mode

You can create more powerful sound field for both of the digital and analog stereo sounds source. The 4 CH Stereo mode reproduces a sound filed through the front left and right speakers and rear left and right speakers. The 5 CH Stereo mode adds the center channel element to the 4 CH Stereo sound field by outputting mixed left and right signals through the center speaker. This mode cannot be used when only the front speakers are connected to this receiver without the rear speakers.

Note:

“5CH STEREO” is selected when setting the center speaker to

“LARGE” or “SMALL.” “4CH STEREO” is selected when setting the center speaker to “NONE” (see page 29).

* Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby,” “Pro Logic,” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

Confidential Unpublished Works. ©1992–1997 Dolby Laboratories, Inc. All rights reserved.

** Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942 and other world-wide patents issues and pending.

“DTS” and “DTS Digital Surround” are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. ©1996 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

37

EN37-49.RX-9010VBK[J]f 37 01.2.15, 0:15 PM

3D-PHONIC modes

The 3D-PHONIC mode gives you such a nearly surround effect as is reproduced through the Dolby Surround decoder, which is widely used to reproduce sounds with a feeling of movement like those experienced in movie theaters. The 3D-PHONIC mode is the result of research on sound localization technology carried out at JVC for many years. This mode can be used when the front speakers are connected to this receiver (without respect to the rear/center

speaker connection). When the 3D PHONIC mode is reproduced with the center speaker connected, you can feel as if actors on the screen actually speak in your room.

• You can select “3D ACTION” only when playing an analog or linear PCM (digital) source.

• You can select “3D DIGITAL” only when playing a source encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS Digital Surround.

Reproducing the Sound Field

The sound heard in a concert hall or club consists of direct sound and indirect sound — early reflections and reflections from behind.

Direct sounds reach the listener directly without any reflection. On the other hand, indirect sounds are delayed by the distances of the ceiling and walls. These direct sounds and indirect sounds are the most important elements of the acoustic surround effects.

The Surround and DSP modes can create these important elements, and give you a real “being there” feeling.

Early reflections

Reflections from behind

3D ACTION: Best for action and war movies — where the action is fast and explosive.

3D DIGITAL: Reproduces multichannel source encoded with

Dolby Digital or with DTS Digital Surround.

HEADPHONE DSP mode

The HEADPHONE DSP mode can create the stereo sound while listening to a source using headphones as if you listen through the speakers. So you can feel as if you were in a music room. This mode can be used only when both of the front speakers are deactivated (see page 19).

Direct sounds

Notes:

• When the SUB ROOM and SPEAKERS SUB ROOM indicators are lit on the display, the SURROUND ON/OFF button do not work.

• When the SUB ROOM and SPEAKERS SUB ROOM indicators are lit on the display, you can only use DAP and 3D-PHONIC modes for the main room source. In this case, “DSP” and “3D-PHONIC” indicators light up on the front panel.

• When you select “DVD MULTI” as the source to play, you cannot select or adjust the Surround and DSP modes.

• When the Line Direct function is turned on, the DSP modes are canceled temporarily (see page 22).

• No adjustment can be made for the HEADPHONE DSP mode.

DVD MULTI Playback Mode

This receiver provides the DVD MULTI playback mode for reproducing the analog discrete 5.1 channel output mode of the

DVD player or other equipment.

You can adjust the DVD MULTI playback mode while playing back a video software such as a DVD using the analog discrete

5.1 channel output mode.

• For the DVD MULTI playback mode connection, see page 9.

• For details on the DVD MULTI playback mode, see page 49.

DSP Modes Available to Input Mode

MODE

INPUT

SIGNAL

SURROUND

DAP MODE

D S P

3D

ACTION

(DIGITAL)

V : Possible / 2 : Impossible

5 CH/4 CH

Stereo

SURROUND with

DAP

SURR. OFF

(DSP OFF/ HEADPHONE HEADPHONE

SURROUND

HEADPHOHE

DSP

OFF)

ANALOG

(2 CH)

DVD MULTI

(5.1 CH)

V

(DOLBY PRO LOGIC)

2

V

2

V

(3D ACTION)

2

V

2

V

2

V

2

V

2

V

V

LINEAR PCM

DOLBY DIGITAL

DTS

V

(DOLBY PRO LOGIC)

V

* 1

(DOLBY DIGITAL)

V

* 2

(DTS SURROUND)

V

V

V

V

(3D ACTION)

V

(3D DIGITAL)

V

(3D DIGITAL)

V

V

V

V

V

V

V

V

V

V

V

V

*

1

*

2

When 2 channel signal comes in, DOLBY PRO LOGIC is selected. When other signals come in, DOLBY DIGITAL is selected.

When 2 channel signal comes in, DOLBY PRO LOGIC is selected. When other signals come in, DTS SURROUND is selected.

V

V

V

38

EN37-49.RX-9010VBK[J]f 38 01.2.15, 0:15 PM

Available DSP Modes According to the Speaker Arrangement

Available DSP modes will vary depending on how many speakers are used with this receiver.

Make sure that you have set the speaker information correctly (see page 29).

Speaker arrangements

Front speaker

TV

Center speaker

Front speaker

Available DSP modes

Each time you press DSP MODE, the DSP modes change as follows:

THEATER 1

\

THEATER 2

\

HALL 1

\

HALL 2

\

LIVE CLUB

\

DANCE CLUB

\

PAVILION

\

5 CH STEREO (when using 5 speakers) or 4 CH STEREO (when using 4 speakers)*

\

3D ACTION or 3D DIGITAL

\

SURR. OFF (DSP OFF)

\

(Back to the beginning)

Rear speaker

Rear speaker

To activate the Surround mode, press SURROUND ON/OFF button so that the

SURROUND ON/OFF lamp on the front panel button lights up.

TV

Front speaker

Rear speaker

Front speaker

Rear speaker

Notes:

• If the settings for the center and the rear speakers are changed to “NONE” (see page 29), the Surround mode will be canceled.

• When both of the Surround mode and DSP mode are deactivated, “SURR. OFF” appears on the display.

* “5CH STEREO” is selected when setting the center speaker to “LARGE” or “SMALL,” and

“4CH STEREO” is selected when setting the center speaker to “NONE” (see page 29).

Front speaker

Front speaker

TV

Center speaker

TV

Front speaker

Front speaker

THEATER 1

\

THEATER 2

\

HALL 1

\

HALL 2

\

LIVE CLUB \ DANCE CLUB \ PAVILION \

3D ACTION or 3D DIGITAL

\

SURR. OFF (DSP OFF)

\

(Back to the beginning)

To activate the Surround mode, press SURROUND ON/OFF button so that the

SURROUND ON/OFF lamp on the front panel button lights up.

Notes:

• If the setting for the center speaker is changed to “NONE” (see page 29), the Surround mode will be canceled.

• When both of the Surround mode and DSP mode are deactivated, “SURR. OFF” appears on the display.

THEATER 1 \ THEATER 2 \ HALL 1 \ HALL 2 \

LIVE CLUB

\

DANCE CLUB

\

PAVILION

\

3D ACTION or 3D DIGITAL \ SURR. OFF (DSP OFF) \

(Back to the beginning)

Note:

Surround mode cannot be used when only the front speakers are connected.

TV HEADPHONE j

HEADPHONE DSP

Note:

To use the HEADPHONE or HEADPHONE DSP mode, deactivate both of the front speakers

(see page 19).

When the SUB ROOM and SPEAKERS SUB ROOM indicators are lit on the front panel

You can only use 3D-PHONIC modes for the main room source, without respect to the center/rear speaker connection.

39

EN37-49.RX-9010VBK[J]f 39 01.2.15, 0:15 PM

Adjusting the Surround Modes

Once you have adjusted the Surround modes, the adjustment is memorized for each source. You can also use a Surround mode with a DAP mode (see page 43).

IMPORTANT:

Check to see if the proper indicator(s) and information appear on the display on the front panel before/while using the buttons and controls.

For the main room operations:

• The MAIN ROOM indicator is lit.

• The source name for the sub-room is not lit on the display.

• When using the remote control:

– Set MAIN ROOM/SUB ROOM selector to

“MAIN ROOM.”

– Check to see if the following information appear on the display window on the remote control.

MAIN ROOM SUB ROOM

Buttons

SOUND

Indications

SOUND

After pressing SOUND, the following function are assigned to the specific number buttons:

Buttons

CENTER TONE

CENTER

REAR•L

REAR•R

Indications

SOUND

CTR

REARL

REARR

Ex. “ SOUND ” appears on the display window.

MAIN ROOM

MAIN ROOM

ON/OFF

STANDBY

SUB ROOM

SUB ROOM

ON/OFF

TV/CATV/DBS

POWER

ON

VCR1

POWER

MAIN ROOM SUB ROOM

When you press the buttons listed above, the indication appears for 5 – 10 seconds for your confirmation.

2. Press SURROUND ON/OFF to activate an appropriate Surround mode — PRO LOGIC, DOLBY

SURROUND

ON/OFF

DIGITAL or DTS SURROUND.

The SURROUND ON/OFF lamp on the front panel button lights up.

• Each time you press the button, the Surround mode turns on and off alternately.

• When “PRO LOGIC” is selected, the PRO LOGIC indicator lights up on the display.

3. Press TEST to check the speaker output balance.

“TEST TONE L” starts flashing on the display, and a test tone comes out of the speakers in the following order:

TEST

TEST TONE L

(Left front speaker)

TEST TONE C

(Center speaker)

TEST TONE LS

(Left rear speaker)

TEST TONE R

(Right front speaker)

TEST TONE RS

(Right rear speaker)

Notes:

• You can adjust the speaker output levels without outputting the test tone.

• No test tone comes out of the center speaker when “CTR SPK” is set to “NONE” (see page 29).

• No test tone comes out of the rear speakers when “REAR SPK” is set to “NONE” (see page 29).

• If the TV is turned on and the proper video input is selected on the TV, the test tone screen will appear on the TV.

SOUND

4. Press SOUND.

The 10 keys are activated for sound adjustments.

5. Select the speaker you want to adjust.

• To select the center speaker level, press CENTER.

• To select the left rear speaker level, press REAR•L.

• To select the right rear speaker level, press REAR•R.

CENTER

4

REAR·L

7

/P

REAR·R

8

Before you start, remember...

• Make sure that you have set the speaker information correctly

(see page 29).

• When the SUB ROOM and SPEAKERS SUB ROOM indicators are lit on the display, the SURROUND ON/OFF button does not work.

• There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is canceled before you finish, start from step 3 again.

• You cannot adjust the center speaker output level and center tone when you have set “CTR SPK” to “NONE.” See page 29.

• You cannot adjust the rear speaker output levels when you have set

“REAR SPK” to “NONE.” See page 29.

• To adjust the front speaker output balance and subwoofer output level, see pages 27 and 28.

From the remote control:

1. Select and play a sound source.

• To enjoy Dolby Pro Logic, play back a software encoded with

Dolby Surround and labeled with

DOLBY SURROUND mark.

• To enjoy Dolby Digital, play back a software encoded with

Dolby Digital and labeled with mark.

D I G I T A L

• To enjoy DTS Digital Surround, play back a software encoded with DTS Digital Surround and labeled with mark.

6. Press LEVEL + or LEVEL – to adjust the speaker output levels (–

10 dB to +10 dB).

LEVEL+

LEVEL–

• Each time you press the button, the indication corresponding to the button selected in step 5 appears on the display window on the remote control.

7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 to adjust the other speaker output levels.

TEST

8. Press TEST again to stop the test tone.

Continued to the next page.

40

EN37-49.RX-9010VBK[J]f 40 01.2.15, 0:15 PM

9. Press CENTER TONE to select the center tone level you want.

The center tone adjustment affects the mid-

CENTER TONE

+ 10

100+ frequency range, which the human voice is mostly made up of.

• Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the following:

CTR TONE 1 CTR TONE 2 CTR TONE 3

(Softer) (Soft) (Flat)

CTR TONE 5

(Sharper)

CTR TONE 4

(Sharp)

To make the dialogue softer, select “CTR TONE 1” or “CTR

TONE 2.”

To make the dialogue clearer, select “CTR TONE 4” or “CTR

TONE 5.”

When “CTR TONE 3” is selected, no adjustment is applied.

On the front panel:

You can also use the buttons on the front panel to adjust the Surround modes. However, no test tone is available when using the buttons on the front panel. So, make adjustments while listening to the sound of the source played back.

1. Select and play a sound source.

• To enjoy Dolby Pro Logic, play back a software encoded with

Dolby Surround and labeled with

DOLBY SURROUND mark.

• To enjoy Dolby Digital, play back a software encoded with Dolby

Digital and labeled with mark.

D I G I T A L

• To enjoy DTS Digital Surround, play back a software encoded with DTS Digital Surround and labeled with mark.

2. Press SURROUND ON/OFF to activate an appropriate Surround mode — PRO LOGIC, DOLBY

DIGITAL or DTS SURROUND.

SURROUND ON/OFF

The SURROUND ON/OFF lamp on the front panel button lights up.

• Each time you press the button, the Surround mode turns on and off alternately.

• When “PRO LOGIC” is selected, the PRO LOGIC indicator lights up on the display.

3. Adjust the speaker output levels.

1) Press LEVEL ADJUST repeatedly until one of the following indications appears on the display.

“CENTER”:

To adjust the center speaker level.

“REAR L”:

To adjust the left rear speaker level.

“REAR R”:

To adjust the right rear speaker level.

2) Press CONTROL UP

5

/DOWN

∞

to adjust the selected speaker output level

(from –10 dB to +10 dB).

3) Repeat 1) and 2) to adjust the other speaker output levels.

LEVEL

ADJUST

CONTROL

DOWN UP

4. Adjust the center tone.

1) Press EFFECT repeatedly until “CTR

TONE” appears on the display.

The display changes to show the current setting.

2) Press CONTROL UP

5

/DOWN

∞

to select the center tone level you want.

• Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the following:

EFFECT

CONTROL

DOWN UP

CTR TONE 1 CTR TONE 2 CTR TONE 3

(Softer) (Soft) (Flat)

CTR TONE 5

(Sharper)

CTR TONE 4

(Sharp)

To make the dialogue softer, select “CTR TONE 1” or “CTR

TONE 2.”

To make the dialogue clearer, select “CTR TONE 4” or “CTR

TONE 5.”

When “CTR TONE 3” is selected, no adjustment is applied.

Adjusting the DAP Modes

You can also use a DAP mode with a Surround mode (see page 43).

IMPORTANT:

Check to see if the proper indicator(s) and information appear on the display on the front panel before/while using the buttons and controls.

For the main room operations:

• The MAIN ROOM indicator is lit.

• The source name for the sub-room is not lit on the display.

• When using the remote control:

– Set MAIN ROOM/SUB ROOM selector to

“MAIN ROOM.”

– Check to see if the following information appear on the display window on the remote control.

Buttons

SOUND

Indications

SOUND

MAIN ROOM SUB ROOM

After pressing SOUND, the following function are assigned to the specific number buttons:

Indications Buttons

EFFECT

ROOM SIZE

LIVENESS

CENTER TONE

CENTER

REAR•L

REAR•R

SOUND

CTR

REARL

REARR

Ex. “ SOUND ” appears on the display window.

STANDBY

MAIN ROOM

MAIN ROOM

ON/OFF

SUB ROOM

SUB ROOM

ON/OFF

TV/CATV/DBS

POWER

ON

VCR1

POWER

MAIN ROOM SUB ROOM

When you press the buttons listed above, the indication appears for 5 – 10 seconds for your confirmation.

41

EN37-49.RX-9010VBK[J]f 41 01.2.15, 0:15 PM

Before you start, remember...

• Make sure that you have set the speaker information correctly

(see page 29).

• When the SUB ROOM and SPEAKERS SUB ROOM indicators are lit on the display, you can only use 3D-PHONIC modes for the main room source.

• There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is canceled before you finish, start from step 2 again.

• You cannot adjust the center speaker output level when you have set “CTR SPK” to “NONE” (see page 29).

• You cannot adjust the rear speaker output level when you have set

“REAR SPK” to “NONE” (see page 29).

• To adjust the front speaker output balance and subwoofer output level, see pages 27 and 28.

On the front panel:

1. Press DSP MODE repeatedly until the DAP mode you want to adjust

DSP MODE

— THEATER 1, THEATER 2,

HALL 1, HALL 2, LIVE CLUB,

DANCE CLUB, or PAVILION — appears on the display.

The DSP MODE lamp on the front panel button lights up, and the DSP indicator also lights up on the display.

• When you have set “REAR SPK” to “NONE,” the 3D-

PHONIC indicator also lights up.

2. Adjust the speaker output levels.

LEVEL

ADJUST

1) Press LEVEL ADJUST repeatedly until one of the following indications appears on the display.

“CENTER”:

To adjust the center speaker level.

“REAR L”:

To adjust the left rear speaker level.

“REAR R”:

To adjust the right rear speaker level.

2) Press CONTROL UP 5 /DOWN ∞ to adjust the selected speaker output level (from –10 dB to +10 dB).

3) Repeat 1) and 2) to adjust the other speaker output levels.

CONTROL

DOWN UP

3. Adjust the center tone.

1) Press EFFECT repeatedly until “CTR

TONE” appears on the display.

The display changes to show the current setting.

2) Press CONTROL UP

5

/DOWN

∞ to select the center tone level you

EFFECT

CONTROL

DOWN UP want.

The center tone adjustment affects the mid-frequency range, which the human voice is mostly made up of.

• Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the following:

CTR TONE 1 CTR TONE 2 CTR TONE 3

(Softer) (Soft) (Flat)

CTR TONE 5

(Sharper)

CTR TONE 4

(Sharp)

To make the dialogue softer, select “CTR TONE 1” or

“CTR TONE 2.”

To make the dialogue clearer, select “CTR TONE 4” or

“CTR TONE 5.”

When “CTR TONE 3” is selected, no adjustment is applied.

4. Adjust the overall levels of the effect.

1) Press EFFECT repeatedly until

“EFFECT” appears on the display.

The display changes to show the current setting.

2) Press CONTROL UP 5 /DOWN ∞ to select the effect level you want.

• Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the following:

EFFECT

CONTROL

DOWN UP

EFFECT 1 EFFECT 2 EFFECT 3

EFFECT 5 EFFECT 4

As the number increases, the selected DAP effect becomes stronger. (Normally set it to “EFFECT 3.”)

5. Adjust the room size (sense of spaciousness).

1) Press EFFECT repeatedly until

“ROOM SIZE” appears on the display.

The display changes to show the current setting.

2) Press CONTROL UP 5 /DOWN ∞ to select the room size you want.

• Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the following:

EFFECT

CONTROL

DOWN UP

ROOMSIZE 1 ROOMSIZE 2

ROOMSIZE 5

ROOMSIZE 3

ROOMSIZE 4

As the number increases, the interval between reflections increases so that you will feel as if you were in a larger room. (Normally set it to “ROOMSIZE 3.”)

6. Adjust the liveness.

1) Press EFFECT repeatedly until

“LIVENESS” appears on the display.

The display changes to show the current setting.

2) Press CONTROL UP 5 /DOWN ∞ to select the liveness level you want.

• Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the following:

EFFECT

CONTROL

DOWN UP

LIVENESS 1 LIVENESS 2

LIVENESS 5

LIVENESS 3

LIVENESS 4

As the number increases, the attenuation level of reflections over time decreases so that acoustics change from “Dead” to

“Live.” (Normally set it to “LIVENESS 3.”)

42

EN37-49.RX-9010VBK[J]f 42 01.2.15, 0:15 PM

From the remote control:

1. Press DSP MODE repeatedly until the

DAP mode you want to adjust —

THEATER 1, THEATER 2, HALL 1,

HALL 2, LIVE CLUB, DANCE

DSP

MODE

CLUB, or PAVILION — appears on the display.

The DSP MODE lamp on the front panel button lights up, and the DSP indicator also lights up on the display.

• When you have set “REAR SPK” to “NONE,” the 3D-

PHONIC indicator also lights up.

2. Press SOUND.

The 10 keys are activated for sound adjustments.

SOUND

3. Select the speaker you want to adjust.

• To select the center speaker level, press CENTER.

• To select the left rear speaker level, press REAR•L.

• To select the right rear speaker level, press REAR•R.

CENTER

4

REAR·L

7

/P

REAR·R

8

8. Press ROOM SIZE to adjust the room size (sense of spaciousness).

• Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the following:

ROOM SIZE

6

ROOMSIZE 1 ROOMSIZE 2 ROOMSIZE 3

ROOMSIZE 5 ROOMSIZE 4

As the number increases, the interval between reflections increases so that you will feel as if you were in a larger room.

(Normally set it to “ROOMSIZE 3.”)

9. Press LIVENESS to adjust the liveness.

• Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the following:

LIVENESS

9

LIVENESS 1 LIVENESS 2 LIVENESS 3

LIVENESS 5 LIVENESS 4

As the number increases, the attenuation level of reflections over time decreases so that acoustics change from “Dead” to

“Live.” (Normally set it to “LIVENESS 3.”)

4. Press LEVEL + or LEVEL – to adjust the speaker output levels (–

10 dB to

+10 dB).

LEVEL+

LEVEL–

• Each time you press the button, the indication corresponding to the button selected in step 3 appears on the display window on the remote control.

5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to adjust the other speaker output levels.

6. Press CENTER TONE to select the center tone level you want.

• Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the following:

CENTER TONE

+ 10

100+

CTR TONE 1 CTR TONE 2 CTR TONE 3

(Softer) (Soft) (Flat)

CTR TONE 5

(Sharper)

CTR TONE 4

(Sharp)

To make the dialogue softer, select “CTR TONE 1” or “CTR

TONE 2.”

To make the dialogue clearer, select “CTR TONE 4” or “CTR

TONE 5.”

When “CTR TONE 3” is selected, no adjustment is applied.

7. Press EFFECT to adjust the overall level of the effect.

• Each time you press the button, the effect level changes as follows:

EFFECT 1

EFFECT

3

EFFECT 2 EFFECT 3

EFFECT 5 EFFECT 4

As the number increases, the selected DAP effect becomes stronger. (Normally set it to “EFFECT 3.”)

Adjusting the Surround Modes with the

DAP Modes

IMPORTANT:

Check to see if the proper indicator(s) and information appear on the display on the front panel before/while using the buttons and controls.

For the main room operations:

• The MAIN ROOM indicator is lit.

• The source name for the sub-room is not lit on the display.

• When using the remote control:

– Set MAIN ROOM/SUB ROOM selector to

“MAIN ROOM.”

– Check to see if the following information appear on the display window on the remote control.

MAIN ROOM SUB ROOM

Buttons

SOUND

Indications

SOUND

After pressing SOUND, the following function are assigned to the specific number buttons:

Indications Buttons

EFFECT

ROOM SIZE

LIVENESS

CENTER TONE

CENTER

REAR•L

REAR•R

SOUND

CTR

REARL

REARR

Ex. “ SOUND ” appears on the display window.

STANDBY

MAIN ROOM

MAIN ROOM

ON/OFF

SUB ROOM

SUB ROOM

ON/OFF

TV/CATV/DBS

POWER

ON

VCR1

POWER

MAIN ROOM SUB ROOM

When you press the buttons listed above, the indication appears for 5 – 10 seconds for your confirmation.

43

EN37-49.RX-9010VBK[J]f 43 01.2.15, 0:15 PM

Before you start, remember...

• Make sure that you have set the speaker information correctly

(see page 29).

• This function does not work when you activate the sub-room.

• There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is canceled before you finish, start from step 4 again.

• You cannot adjust the rear speaker output levels when you have set

“REAR SPK” to “NONE.” See page 29.

• You cannot adjust the center speaker output level and center tone when you have set “CTR SPK” to “NONE.” See page 29.

• To adjust the front speaker output balance and subwoofer output level, see pages 27 and 28.

From the remote control:

1. Select and play a sound source.

• To enjoy Dolby Pro Logic, play back a software encoded with

Dolby Surround and labeled with

DOLBY SURROUND mark.

• To enjoy Dolby Digital, play back a software encoded with

Dolby Digital and labeled with

D I G I T A L mark.

• To enjoy DTS Digital Surround, play back a software encoded with DTS Digital Surround and labeled with mark.

2. Press SURROUND ON/OFF to activate an appropriate Surround mode — PRO LOGIC, DOLBY

DIGITAL or DTS SURROUND.

3. Press DSP MODE repeatedly until the DAP mode you want to adjust

— THEATER 1, THEATER 2,

SURROUND

ON/OFF

The SURROUND ON/OFF lamp on the front panel button lights up.

• Each time you press the button, the Surround mode turns on and off alternately.

• When “PRO LOGIC” is selected, the PRO LOGIC indicator lights up on the display.

DSP

MODE

HALL 1, HALL 2, LIVE CLUB,

DANCE CLUB, or PAVILION — appears on the display.

The DSP MODE lamp on the front panel button lights up, and the DSP indicator also lights up on the display.

4. Press TEST to check the speaker output balance.

“TEST TONE L” starts flashing on the display,

TEST and a test tone comes out of the speakers in the following order:

TEST TONE L

(Left front speaker)

TEST TONE C

(Center speaker)

TEST TONE R

(Right front speaker)

TEST TONE LS

(Left rear speaker)

TEST TONE RS

(Right rear speaker)

Notes:

• You can adjust the speaker output levels without outputting the test tone.

• No test tone comes out of the center speaker when “CTR SPK” is set to “NONE” (see page 29).

• No test tone comes out of the rear speakers when “REAR SPK” is set to “NONE” (see page 29).

• If the TV is turned on and the proper video input is selected on the TV, the test tone screen will appear on the TV.

SOUND

5. Press SOUND.

The 10 keys are activated for sound adjustments.

6. Select the speaker you want to adjust.

• To select the center speaker level, press CENTER.

• To select the left rear speaker level, press REAR•L.

• To select the right rear speaker level, press REAR•R.

CENTER

4

REAR·L

7

/P

REAR·R

8

7. Press LEVEL + or LEVEL – to adjust the speaker output levels (–

10 dB to

+10 dB).

LEVEL–

• Each time you press the button, the indication corresponding to the button selected in step 6 appears on the display window on the remote control.

8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 to adjust the other speaker output levels.

TEST

9. Press TEST again to stop the test tone.

LEVEL+

10.Press CENTER TONE to select the center tone level you want.

CENTER TONE

+ 10

The center tone adjustment affects the midfrequency range, which the human voice is

100+ mostly made up of.

• Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the following:

CTR TONE 1 CTR TONE 2 CTR TONE 3

(Softer) (Soft) (Flat)

CTR TONE 5

(Sharper)

CTR TONE 4

(Sharp)

To make the dialogue softer, select “CTR TONE 1” or “CTR

TONE 2.”

To make the dialogue clearer, select “CTR TONE 4” or “CTR

TONE 5.”

When “CTR TONE 3” is selected, no adjustment is applied.

11.Press EFFECT to adjust the overall level of the effect.

• Each time you press the button, the effect level changes as follows:

EFFECT

3

EFFECT 1 EFFECT 2 EFFECT 3

EFFECT 5 EFFECT 4

As the number increases, DAP effect becomes stronger.

(Normally set it to “EFFECT 3.”)

12.Press ROOM SIZE to adjust the room size (sense of spaciousness).

• Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the following:

ROOM SIZE

6

ROOMSIZE 1 ROOMSIZE 2 ROOMSIZE 3

ROOMSIZE 5 ROOMSIZE 4

As the number increases, the interval between reflections increases so that you will feel as if you were in a larger room.

(Normally set it to “ROOMSIZE 3.”)

Continued to the next page.

44

EN37-49.RX-9010VBK[J]f 44 01.2.15, 0:15 PM

13.Press LIVENESS to adjust the liveness.

• Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the following:

LIVENESS

9

LIVENESS 1 LIVENESS 2

LIVENESS 5

LIVENESS 3

LIVENESS 4

As the number increases, the attenuation level of reflections over time decreases so that acoustics change from “Dead” to “Live.”

(Normally set it to “LIVENESS 3.”)

On the front panel:

You can also use the buttons on the front panel to adjust the sound with a Surround mode and a DAP mode. However, no test tone is available when using the buttons on the front panel. So, make adjustments while listening to the sound of the source played back.

1. Select and play a sound source.

• To enjoy Dolby Pro Logic, play back a software encoded with

Dolby Surround and labeled with

DOLBY SURROUND mark.

• To enjoy Dolby Digital, play back a software encoded with

Dolby Digital and labeled with

D I G I T A L mark.

• To enjoy DTS Digital Surround, play back a software encoded with DTS Digital Surround and labeled with mark.

2. Press SURROUND ON/OFF to activate an appropriate Surround

SURROUND ON/OFF

mode — PRO LOGIC, DOLBY

DIGITAL or DTS SURROUND.

The SURROUND ON/OFF lamp on the front panel button lights up.

• Each time you press the button, the Surround mode turns on and off alternately.

• When “PRO LOGIC” is selected, the PRO LOGIC indicator lights up on the display.

3. Press DSP MODE repeatedly until the DAP mode you want to adjust

— THEATER 1, THEATER 2,

DSP MODE

HALL 1, HALL 2, LIVE CLUB,

DANCE CLUB, or PAVILION — appears on the display.

The DSP MODE lamp on the front panel button lights up, and the DSP indicator also lights up on the display.

4. Adjust the speaker output levels.

1) Press LEVEL ADJUST repeatedly until one of the following indications appears on the display.

“CENTER”:

To adjust the center speaker level.

“REAR L”:

To adjust the left rear speaker level.

“REAR R”:

To adjust the right rear speaker level.

2) Press CONTROL UP

5

/DOWN

∞

to adjust the selected speaker output level

(from –10 dB to +10 dB).

3) Repeat 1) and 2) to adjust the other speaker output levels.

LEVEL

ADJUST

CONTROL

DOWN UP

5. Adjust the center tone.

1) Press EFFECT repeatedly until “CTR

TONE” appears on the display.

The display changes to show the current setting.

2) Press CONTROL UP

5

/DOWN

∞ to select the center tone level you want.

• Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the following:

EFFECT

CONTROL

DOWN UP

CTR TONE 1 CTR TONE 2 CTR TONE 3

(Softer) (Soft) (Flat)

CTR TONE 5

(Sharper)

CTR TONE 4

(Sharp)

To make the dialogue softer, select “CTR TONE 1” or

“CTR TONE 2.”

To make the dialogue clearer, select “CTR TONE 4” or

“CTR TONE 5.”

When “CTR TONE 3” is selected, no adjustment is applied.

6. Adjust the overall levels of the effect.

1) Press EFFECT repeatedly until

“EFFECT” appears on the display.

The display changes to show the current setting.

2) Press CONTROL UP 5 /DOWN ∞ to select the effect level you want.

• Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the following:

EFFECT

CONTROL

DOWN UP

EFFECT 1 EFFECT 2 EFFECT 3

EFFECT 5 EFFECT 4

As the number increases, DAP effect becomes stronger.

(Normally set it to “EFFECT 3.”)

7. Adjust the room size (sense of spaciousness).

1) Press EFFECT repeatedly until

EFFECT

“ROOM SIZE” appears on the display.

The display changes to show the current setting.

CONTROL

DOWN UP

2) Press CONTROL UP 5 /DOWN ∞ to select the room size you want.

• Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the following:

ROOMSIZE 1 ROOMSIZE 2

ROOMSIZE 5

ROOMSIZE 3

ROOMSIZE 4

As the number increases, the interval between reflections increases so that you will feel as if you were in a larger room. (Normally set it to “ROOMSIZE 3.”)

45

EN37-49.RX-9010VBK[J]f 45 01.2.15, 0:15 PM

8. Adjust the liveness.

1) Press EFFECT repeatedly until

“LIVENESS” appears on the display.

The display changes to show the current setting.

2) Press CONTROL UP

5

/DOWN

∞

to select the liveness level you want.

• Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the following:

EFFECT

CONTROL

DOWN UP

LIVENESS 1 LIVENESS 2

LIVENESS 5

LIVENESS 3

LIVENESS 4

As the number increases, the attenuation level of reflections over time decreases so that acoustics change from “Dead” to

“Live.” (Normally set it to “LIVENESS 3.”)

Adjusting the 5 CH/4 CH Stereo Mode

IMPORTANT:

Check to see if the proper indicator(s) and information appear on the display on the front panel before/while using the buttons and controls.

For the main room operations:

• The MAIN ROOM indicator is lit.

• The source name for the sub-room is not lit on the display.

• When using the remote control:

– Set MAIN ROOM/SUB ROOM selector to

“MAIN ROOM.”

– Check to see if the following information appear on the display window on the remote control.

MAIN ROOM SUB ROOM

Buttons

SOUND

Indications

SOUND

After pressing SOUND, the following function are assigned to the specific number buttons:

Buttons

CENTER TONE

CENTER

REAR•L

REAR•R

Indications

SOUND

CTR

REARL

REARR

Ex. “ SOUND ” appears on the display window.

MAIN ROOM

MAIN ROOM

ON/OFF

STANDBY

SUB ROOM

SUB ROOM

ON/OFF

TV/CATV/DBS

POWER

ON

VCR1

POWER

MAIN ROOM SUB ROOM

When you press the buttons listed above, the indication appears for 5 – 10 seconds for your confirmation.

Before you start, remember...

• Make sure that you have set the speaker information correctly

(see page 29).

• This function does not work when you activate the sub-room.

• There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is canceled before you finish, start from step 2 again.

• You cannot adjust the center speaker output level and select the center tone level for 4 CH Stereo mode.

• To adjust the front speaker output balance and subwoofer output level, see pages 27 and 28.

On the front panel:

DSP MODE

1. Press DSP MODE repeatedly until

“5CH STEREO*” appears on the display.

The DSP MODE lamp on the front panel button lights up, and the DSP indicator also lights up on the display.

* “4CH STEREO” appears on the display when you have set

“CTR SPK” to “NONE.” (See page 29.)

2. Adjust the speaker output levels.

1) Press LEVEL ADJUST repeatedly until one of the following indications appears on the display.

“CENTER”: (for 5CH STEREO only)

To adjust the center speaker level.

“REAR L”:

To adjust the left rear speaker level.

“REAR R”:

To adjust the right rear speaker level.

2) Press CONTROL UP

5

/DOWN

∞ to adjust the selected speaker output level (from –10 dB to +10 dB).

3) Repeat 1) and 2) to adjust the other speaker output levels.

LEVEL

ADJUST

CONTROL

DOWN UP

3. Adjust the center tone (for 5CH STEREO only.)

1) Press EFFECT repeatedly until “CTR

EFFECT

TONE” appears on the display.

The display changes to show the current setting.

2) Press CONTROL UP 5 /DOWN ∞ to select the center tone level you want.

• The center tone adjustment affects the mid-frequency range, which the human voice is mostly made up of.

• Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the following:

CONTROL

DOWN UP

CTR TONE 1 CTR TONE 2 CTR TONE 3

(Softer) (Soft) (Flat)

CTR TONE 5

(Sharper)

CTR TONE 4

(Sharp)

To make the dialogue softer, select “CTR TONE 1” or

“CTR TONE 2.”

To make the dialogue clearer, select “CTR TONE 4” or

“CTR TONE 5.”

When “CTR TONE 3” is selected, no adjustment is applied.

Continued to the next page.

46

EN37-49.RX-9010VBK[J]f 46 01.2.15, 0:15 PM

From the remote control:

1. Press DSP MODE repeatedly until

“5CH STEREO*” appears on the display.

DSP

MODE

The DSP MODE lamp on the front panel button lights up, and the DSP indicator also lights up on the display.

* “4CH STEREO” appears on the display when you have set

“CTR SPK” to “NONE.” (See page 29.)

2. Press SOUND.

The 10 keys are activated for sound adjustments.

3. Select the speaker you want to adjust.

• To select the center speaker level, press CENTER (for 5CH

STEREO only).

• To select the left rear speaker level, press REAR•L.

• To select the right rear speaker level, press REAR•R.

CENTER

4

REAR·L

7

/P

REAR·R

8

SOUND

Adjusting the 3D-PHONIC Modes

Once you have adjusted the 3D-PHONIC modes, the adjustment is memorized for each source.

IMPORTANT:

Check to see if the proper indicator(s) and information appear on the display on the front panel before/while using the buttons and controls.

For the main room operations:

• The MAIN ROOM indicator is lit.

• The source name for the sub-room is not lit on the display.

• When using the remote control:

– Set MAIN ROOM/SUB ROOM selector to

“MAIN ROOM.”

– Check to see if the following information appear on the display window on the remote control.

MAIN ROOM SUB ROOM

Buttons

SOUND

Indications

SOUND

After pressing SOUND, the following function are assigned to the specific number buttons:

Buttons

EFFECT

CENTER TONE

CENTER

REAR•L

REAR•R

Indications

SOUND

CTR

REARL

REARR

4. Press LEVEL + or LEVEL – to adjust the speaker output levels (

–10 dB to +10 dB).

LEVEL+

LEVEL–

• Each time you press the button, the indication corresponding to the button selected in step 3 appears on the display window on the remote control.

5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to adjust the other speaker output levels.

6. Press CENTER TONE to select the center tone level you want (for 5CH

STEREO only).

CENTER TONE

+ 10

100+

• The center tone adjustment affects the mid-frequency range, which the human voice is mostly made up of.

• Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the following:

CTR TONE 1 CTR TONE 2 CTR TONE 3

(Softer) (Soft) (Flat)

CTR TONE 5

(Sharper)

CTR TONE 4

(Sharp)

To make the dialogue softer, select “CTR TONE 1” or “CTR

TONE 2.”

To make the dialogue clearer, select “CTR TONE 4” or “CTR

TONE 5.”

When “CTR TONE 3” is selected, no adjustment is applied.

Ex. “ SOUND ” appears on the display window.

STANDBY

MAIN ROOM

MAIN ROOM

ON/OFF

SUB ROOM

SUB ROOM

ON/OFF

TV/CATV/DBS

POWER

ON

VCR1

POWER

MAIN ROOM SUB ROOM

When you press the buttons listed above, the indication appears for 5 – 10 seconds for your confirmation.

Before you start, remember...

• Make sure that you have set the speaker information correctly

(see page 29).

• There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is canceled before you finish, start from step 2 again.

• You cannot adjust the center speaker output level when you have set “CTR SPK” to “NONE” See page 29.

• To adjust the front speaker output balance and subwoofer output level, see pages 27 and 28.

47

EN37-49.RX-9010VBK[J]f 47 01.2.15, 0:15 PM

On the front panel:

DSP MODE

1. Press DSP MODE repeatedly until

“3D ACTION” or “3D DIGITAL” appears on the display.

The DSP MODE lamp on the front panel button lights up, and the 3D-PHONIC and DSP indicators also light up on the display.

LEVEL

ADJUST

2. Adjust the center speaker output level.

1) Press LEVEL ADJUST repeatedly until “CENTER” appears on the display.

2) Press CONTROL UP

5

/DOWN

∞

to adjust the center speaker output level

(from –10 dB to +10 dB).

CONTROL

DOWN UP

3. Adjust the center tone.

1) Press EFFECT repeatedly until “CTR

TONE” appears on the display.

The display changes to show the current setting.

2) Press CONTROL UP 5 /DOWN ∞ to select the center tone level you want.

The center tone adjustment affects the mid-frequency range, which the human voice is mostly made up of.

• Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the following:

EFFECT

CONTROL

DOWN UP

CTR TONE 1 CTR TONE 2 CTR TONE 3

(Softer) (Soft) (Flat)

CTR TONE 5

(Sharper)

CTR TONE 4

(Sharp)

To make the dialogue softer, select “CTR TONE 1” or

“CTR TONE 2.”

To make the dialogue clearer, select “CTR TONE 4” or

“CTR TONE 5.”

When “CTR TONE 3” is selected, no adjustment is applied.

4. Adjust the overall levels of the effect.

1) Press EFFECT repeatedly until

“EFFECT” appears on the display.

The display changes to show the current setting.

2) Press CONTROL UP

5

/DOWN

∞ to select the effect level you want.

• Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the following:

EFFECT

CONTROL

DOWN UP

From the remote control:

1. Press DSP MODE repeatedly until

“3D ACTION” or “3D DIGITAL” appears on the display.

DSP

MODE

The DSP MODE lamp on the front panel button lights up, and the 3D-PHONIC and DSP indicators also light up on the display.

SOUND

2. Press SOUND.

The 10 keys are activated for sound adjustments.

3. Press CENTER to select the center speaker.

CENTER

4

4. Press LEVEL + or LEVEL – to adjust the center speaker output levels (from –10 dB to +10 dB).

LEVEL+

LEVEL–

• Each time you press the button, “CTR” appears on the display window on the remote control.

5. Press CENTER TONE to select the center tone level you want.

• Each time you press the button, the display changes to show the following:

CENTER TONE

+ 10

100+

CTR TONE 1 CTR TONE 2 CTR TONE 3

(Softer) (Soft) (Flat)

CTR TONE 5

(Sharper)

CTR TONE 4

(Sharp)

To make the dialogue softer, select “CTR TONE 1” or “CTR

TONE 2.”

To make the dialogue clearer, select “CTR TONE 4” or “CTR

TONE 5.”

When “CTR TONE 3” is selected, no adjustment is applied.

6. Press EFFECT to adjust the overall level of the effect.

• Each time you press the button, the effect level changes as follows:

EFFECT 1

EFFECT

3

EFFECT 2 EFFECT 3

EFFECT 5 EFFECT 4

As the number increases, 3D effect mode becomes stronger.

(Normally set it to “EFFECT 3.”)

EFFECT 1 EFFECT 2

EFFECT 5

EFFECT 3

EFFECT 4

As the number increases, the selected 3D effect mode becomes stronger. (Normally set it to “EFFECT 3.”)

48

EN37-49.RX-9010VBK[J]f 48 01.2.15, 0:15 PM

Using the DVD MULTI Playback Mode

This receiver provides the DVD MULTI playback mode for reproducing the analog discrete output mode of the DVD player. Before playing back a DVD, refer also to the manual supplied for the DVD player.

• You can use “On-screen Menu” for most of the main room operations. For details, see page 50.

The following operations are only possible while the receiver is ready for the main room operations, and are only used for the main room source — DVD MULTI.

IMPORTANT:

Check to see if the proper indicator(s) and information appear on the display on the front panel before/while using the buttons and controls.

For the main room operations:

• The MAIN ROOM indicator is lit.

• The source name for the sub-room is not lit on the display.

• When using the remote control:

– Set MAIN ROOM/SUB ROOM selector to

“MAIN ROOM.”

– Check to see if the following information appear on the display window on the remote control.

MAIN ROOM SUB ROOM

Buttons

SOUND

Indications

SOUND

“CENTER”:

To adjust the center speaker level.

“REAR L”:

To adjust the left rear speaker level.

“REAR R”:

To adjust the right rear speaker level.

2) Press CONTROL UP

5

/DOWN

∞ to adjust the selected speaker output level (from –10 dB to +10 dB).

3) Repeat 1) and 2) to adjust the other speaker output levels.

CONTROL

DOWN UP

Notes:

• You cannot adjust the center tone level.

• You cannot use the Midnight Mode for DVD MULTI playback mode

(see page 21).

• When using a pair of headphones, the sounds of front left and right are outputted from the headphones.

After pressing SOUND, the following function are assigned to the specific number buttons:

Buttons

CENTER

REAR•L

REAR•R

Indications

CTR

REARL

REARR

Activating the DVD MULTI Playback Mode

You can adjust the DVD MULTI playback mode while playing back a DVD using the analog discrete output mode on the DVD player.

Once you have made adjustments, the receiver memorizes the adjustments until you change them. You also need to set the DVD player to the analog discrete output mode.

Before you start, remember...

• When the SUB ROOM and the SPEAKERS SUB ROOM indicators are lit on the display, you cannot select “DVD MULTI” as the main room source.

• There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is canceled before you finish, start from step 3 again.

• To adjust the front speaker output balance and subwoofer output level, see pages 27 and 28.

DVD MULTI

On the front panel:

1. Press DVD MULTI so that “DVD

MULTI” appears on the display.

Note:

When you select “DVD MULTI” as the main room source to play, the Surround /DSP modes are canceled temporarily, and the

SURROUND ON/OFF and DSP MODE buttons do not work.

2. Select the analog discrete output mode on the

DVD player, and start playing a DVD.

• Refer to the manual supplied with the DVD player.

If you need to make any adjustment, go to the following steps.

LEVEL

ADJUST

3. Adjust the speaker output levels.

1) Press LEVEL ADJUST repeatedly until one of the following indications appears on the display.

49

From the remote control:

1. Press DVD MULTI so that “DVD

MULTI” appears on the display.

DVD MULTI

Note:

When you select “DVD MULTI” as the main room source to play, the Surround/DSP modes are canceled temporarily, and the

SURROUND ON/OFF and DSP MODE buttons do not work.

2. Select the analog discrete output mode on the

DVD player, and start playing a DVD.

• Refer to the manual supplied with the DVD player.

If you need to make any adjustment, go to the following steps.

SOUND

3. Press SOUND.

The 10 keys are activated for adjusting the sound.

4. Select the speaker you want to adjust.

• To select the center speaker level, press CENTER.

• To select the left rear speaker level, press REAR•L.

• To select the right rear speaker level, press REAR•R.

CENTER

4

REAR·L

7

/P

REAR·R

8

5. Press LEVEL + or LEVEL – to adjust the speaker output levels

(from –10 dB to +10 dB).

LEVEL+

LEVEL–

• Each time you press the button, the indication corresponding to the button selected in step 4 appears on the display window on the remote control.

6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to adjust the other speaker output levels.

EN37-49.RX-9010VBK[J]f 49 01.2.15, 0:15 PM

Using the On-Screen Menus

You use the black-and-white color Menus on the TV screen to control the receiver.

To use this function, you need to connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT jack on the rear panel (see page 9), and set the

TV’s input mode to the proper position to which the receiver is connected.

• When the TV’s input mode is incorrect; for example, a different video input or TV tuner mode is selected, you cannot show the Menus on the TV screen.

The following operations are only possible while the receiver is ready for the main room operations, and are used for the main room sources.

IMPORTANT:

Check to see if the proper indicator(s) and information appear on the display on the front panel before/while using the buttons and controls.

For the main room operations:

• The MAIN ROOM indicator is lit.

• The source name for the sub-room is not lit on the display.

• When using the remote control:

– Set MAIN ROOM/SUB ROOM selector to

“MAIN ROOM.”

– Check to see if the following information appear on the display window on the remote control.

MAIN ROOM SUB ROOM

On-Screen Operation buttons (on the remote control)

TV VOL CHANNEL

TV/VIDEO

MUTING

VOLUME

MENU

TEXT

DISPLAY

Activating the Surround Modes

(Also see page 40)

1. Press MENU.

The MENU appears on the TV.

• Pressing one of the

%

/ fi

/

@

/

#

buttons also displays the

MENU.

2. Press

%

/

fi

to move to “SURROUND.”

3. Press

@

/

#

to select the

Surround mode you want to use.

MENU

SOURCE : CD

SURROUND:PRO LOGIC

DSP MODE:THEATER1

INPUT :ANALOG

SOUND CONTROL

TUNER CONTROL

SETTING

:OPERATE

VOLUME : 20

4. When you finish, press

EXIT.

The menu disappears from the TV.

TEXT

DISPLAY

MENU

DVD

MENU

SET

RM-SRX9010J

REMOTE CONTROL

A/V CONTROL RECEIVER

EXIT

DVD

MENU

Ex. When you press MENU with the multi-room operation selector set to “MAIN ROOM.”

SET

STANDBY

MAIN ROOM

MAIN ROOM

ON/OFF

SUB ROOM

SUB ROOM

ON/OFF

TV/CATV/DBS

POWER

ON

VCR1

POWER

MAIN ROOM SUB ROOM

EXIT

“MENU” appears on the display window of the remote control when you press the buttons — MENU, % / fi / @ / # , SET,

EXIT.

Activating the DAP Modes (Also see page 41)

1. Press MENU.

The MENU appears on the TV.

• Pressing one of the % / fi / @ / # buttons also displays the

MENU.

2. Press

%

/

fi

to move to “DSP MODE.”

MENU

SOURCE : CD

3. Press

@

/

#

to select the

DSP mode you want to use.

SURROUND:PRO LOGIC

DSP MODE:THEATER1

INPUT :ANALOG

SOUND CONTROL

TUNER CONTROL

SETTING

:OPERATE

VOLUME : 20

4. When you finish, press EXIT.

The menu disappears from the TV.

Showing the MENU on the TV Screen

Press MENU.

The MENU appears on the TV.

• Pressing one of the % / fi / @ / # buttons also displays the

MENU.

MENU

SOURCE : CD

SURROUND:PRO LOGIC

DSP MODE:THEATER1

INPUT :ANALOG

SOUND CONTROL

TUNER CONTROL

SETTING

:OPERATE

VOLUME : 20

Use % / fi to move up and down, and @ / # to select, adjust or set the item.

Notes:

• “INPUT” appears only when the digital input (DIGITAL IN) terminal setting has been correctly done for the digital source currently selected. (See page 30.)

• The on-screen display will disappear if no operation is done for about 1 minute.

Note:

If “DVD MULTI” is selected as a playing source, “SURROUND” and

“DSP MODE” do not appear on the display.

Selecting the Analog or Digital Input Mode

(Also see page 31)

This selection is only possible when the digital input (DIGITAL IN) terminal setting has been correctly done for the digital source currently selected. (See page 30.)

1. Press MENU.

The MENU appears on the TV.

• Pressing one of the

%

/ fi

/

@

/

#

buttons also displays the

MENU.

MENU

2. Press

%

/

fi

to move to “INPUT.”

3. Press

@

/

#

to select the analog or digital input mode you want.

SOURCE : CD

SURROUND:PRO LOGIC

DSP MODE:THEATER1

INPUT :ANALOG

SOUND CONTROL

TUNER CONTROL

SETTING

:OPERATE

VOLUME : 20

4. When you finish, press EXIT.

The menu disappears from the TV.

50

EN50-61.RX-9010VBK[J]f 50 01.2.15, 0:16 PM

Adjusting the Equalization Patterns

(Also see page 20)

1. Press MENU.

The MENU appears on the TV.

• Pressing one of the

%

/ fi

/

@

/

#

buttons also displays the

MENU.

2. Press

%

/

fi

to move to “SOUND

CONTROL,” then press

@

/

#

.

The SOUND CONTROL menu appears.

3. Press

%

/

fi

to move to “DIGITAL EQ,” then press

@

/

#

.

The DIGITAL EQ menu appears.

SOUND CONTROL

DIGITAL EQ

LEVEL ADJUST

EFFECT ADJUST

MIDNIGHT MODE: NORMAL

INPUT ATT : NORMAL

LINE DIRECT: OFF

BASS BOOST : OFF

SUBWOOFER : ON

4. Press

%

/

fi

to move to the frequency you want to adjust.

DIGITAL EQ

:ENTER

5. Press

@

/

#

to adjust the frequency level you want.

The frequency level changes by

2 dB from –8 dB to +8 dB.

FRONT 63Hz : 0dB

FRONT 250Hz : 0dB

FRONT 1kHz : 0dB

FRONT 4kHz : 0dB

FRONT 16kHz : 0dB

:OPERATE

6. When you finish, press EXIT repeatedly until the menu disappears from the TV.

Adjusting the Surround and DSP Modes

(Also see pages 40 – 48)

You can use a Surround mode with a DAP mode, but not with the

5 CH/4 CH Stereo mode and 3D PHONIC mode.

1. Press MENU.

The MENU appears on the TV.

• Pressing one of the

%

/ fi

/

@

/

#

buttons also displays the

MENU.

2. Select Surround mode and/or DSP mode you like to adjust (see page 50).

3. Press

%

/

fi

to move to “SOUND

CONTROL,” then press

@

/

#

.

The SOUND CONTROL menu appears.

4. Press

%

/

fi

to move to “LEVEL ADJUST,” then press

@

/

#

.

The LEVEL ADJUST menu appears.

5. Press

%

/

fi

to move to the item you want to set or adjust, then press

@

/

#

.

On these adjustment menus, you can do the following:

SOUND CONTROL

DIGITAL EQ

LEVEL ADJUST

EFFECT ADJUST

MIDNIGHT MODE: NORMAL

INPUT ATT : NORMAL

LINE DIRECT: OFF

BASS BOOST : OFF

SUBWOOFER : ON

LEVEL ADJUST

:ENTER

TEST TONE : OFF

L/R BALANCE : CENTER

CENTER LEVEL: 0dB

REAR L LEVEL: 0dB

REAR R LEVEL: 0dB

SUBWFR LEVEL: 0dB

:OPERATE

6. Press EXIT once.

For Surround modes and Surround mode with DAP mode:

“TEST TONE”: Output a test tone.

“L/R BALANCE”: Adjust the right and left balance of the front speakers.

“CENTER LEVEL”: Adjust the center speaker output level. *

“REAR L LEVEL”: Adjust the left rear speaker output level. **

“REAR R LEVEL”: Adjust the right rear speaker output level. **

“SUBWFR LEVEL”: Adjust the subwoofer output level. ***

For DAP mode:

“L/R BALANCE”: Adjust the right and left balance of the front speakers.

“CENTER LEVEL”: Adjust the center speaker output level. *

“REAR L LEVEL”: Adjust the left rear speaker output level. **

“REAR R LEVEL”: Adjust the right rear speaker output level. **

“SUBWFR LEVEL”: Adjust the subwoofer output level. ***

For 5 CH/4 CH Stereo mode:

“L/R BALANCE”: Adjust the right and left balance of the front speakers.

“CENTER LEVEL”: Adjust the center speaker output level. ****

“REAR L LEVEL”: Adjust the left rear speaker output level. **

“REAR R LEVEL”: Adjust the right rear speaker output level. **

“SUBWFR LEVEL”: Adjust the subwoofer output level. ***

For 3D-PHONIC mode:

“L/R BALANCE”: Adjust the right and left balance of the front speakers.

“CENTER LEVEL”: Adjust the center speaker output level. *

“SUBWFR LEVEL”: Adjust the subwoofer output level.***

For SURR. OFF (DSP OFF):

“L/R BALANCE”: Adjust the right and left balance of the front speakers.

“SUBWFR LEVEL”: Adjust the subwoofer output level.***

Notes:

* You cannot select “CENTER LEVEL” when “CTR SPK” is set to “NONE” (see page 29).

** You cannot select both “REAR L LEVEL” and “REAR R

LEVEL” when “REAR SPK” is set to “NONE” (see page 29).

*** You cannot select “SUBWFR LEVEL” when “SUBWFR” is set to “NO” (see page 28).

**** You cannot select “CENTER LEVEL” when 4 CH Stereo mode is selected.

51

EN50-61.RX-9010VBK[J]f 51 01.2.15, 0:16 PM

7. Press

%

/

fi

to move to “EFFECT ADJUST,” then press

@

/

#

.

The EFFECT LEVEL menu appears.

8. Press

%

/

fi

to move to the item you want to adjust, then press

@

/

#

.

On these adjustment menus, you can do the following.

SOUND CONTROL

DIGITAL EQ

LEVEL ADJUST

EFFECT ADJUST

MIDNIGHT MODE: NORMAL

INPUT ATT : NORMAL

LINE DIRECT: OFF

BASS BOOST : OFF

SUBWOOFER : ON

EFFECT ADJUST

:ENTER

EFFECT LEVEL: 3

ROOM SIZE : 3

LIVENESS : 3

CENTER TONE : 3

:OPERATE

For Surround mode:

“CENTER TONE”: Select the center tone level. *

For Surround with DAP mode, DAP mode:

“EFFECT LEVEL”: Adjust the surround effect level.

“ROOM SIZE”:

“LIVENESS”:

Adjust the room size effect.

Adjust the liveness level.

“CENTER TONE”: Select the center tone level. *

For 5 CH Stereo mode:

“CENTER TONE”: Select the center tone level.

For 3D-PHONIC mode:

“EFFECT LEVEL”: Adjust the surround effect level.

“CENTER TONE”: Select the center tone level. *

Note:

• You cannot select “EFFECT ADJUST” in step 7, when both of the Surround and DSP modes are deactivated.

* You cannot select “CENTER TONE” when “CTR SPK” is set to

“NONE” (see page 29).

9. When you finish, press EXIT repeatedly until the menu disappears from the TV.

Adjusting the DVD MULTI Playback Mode

(Also see page 49)

1. Select DVD MULTI as the playing source.

Press DVD MULTI.

2. Press MENU.

The MENU appears on the TV.

• Pressing one of the

%

/ fi

/

@

/

#

buttons also displays the MENU.

3. Press

%

/

fi

to move to “SOUND

CONTROL,” then press

@

/

#

.

The SOUND CONTROL menu appears.

4. Press

%

/

fi

to move to “LEVEL ADJUST,” then press

@

/

#

.

The LEVEL ADJUST menu

LEVEL ADJUST appears.

TEST TONE :

L/R BALANCE : CENTER

CENTER LEVEL: 0dB

REAR L LEVEL: 0dB

REAR R LEVEL: 0dB

SUBWFR LEVEL: 0dB

:OPERATE

5. Press

%

/

fi

to move to the item you want to set or adjust, then press

@

/

#

.

On this adjustment menu, you can do the following:

“L/R BALANCE”:

“CENTER LEVEL”:

“REAR L LEVEL”:

“REAR R LEVEL”:

“SUBWFR LEVEL”:

Adjust the right and left balance of the front speakers .

Adjust the center speaker output level.

Adjust the left rear speaker output level.

Adjust the right rear speaker output level.

Adjust the subwoofer output level.

6. When you finish, press EXIT repeatedly until the menu disappears from the TV.

Listening at Night — Midnight Mode

(Also see page 21)

1. Press MENU.

The MENU appears on the TV.

• Pressing one of the

%

/ fi

/

@

/

#

buttons also displays the

MENU.

2. Press

%

/

fi

to move to “SOUND

CONTROL,” then press

@

/

#

.

The SOUND CONTROL menu appears.

3. Press

%

/

fi

to move to

“MIDNIGHT MODE.”

SOUND CONTROL

4. Press use.

@

/

#

to select the mode you want to

DIGITAL EQ

LEVEL ADJUST

EFFECT ADJUST

MIDNIGHT MODE: NORMAL

INPUT ATT : NORMAL

LINE DIRECT: OFF

BASS BOOST : OFF

SUBWOOFER : ON

:OPERATE

5. When you finish, press

EXIT repeatedly until the menu disappears from the TV.

Attenuating the Input Signal

(Also see page 21)

1. Press MENU.

The MENU appears on the TV.

• Pressing one of the

%

/ fi

/

@

/

#

buttons also displays the

MENU.

2. Press

%

/

fi

to move to “SOUND

CONTROL,” then press

@

/

#

.

The SOUND CONTROL menu appears.

3. Press

%

/

fi

to move

to “INPUT ATT.”

4. Press

@

/

#

to select the Input Attenuator mode “ATT ON” or

“NORMAL.”

SOUND CONTROL

DIGITAL EQ

LEVEL ADJUST

EFFECT ADJUST

MIDNIGHT MODE: NORMAL

INPUT ATT : NORMAL

LINE DIRECT: OFF

BASS BOOST : OFF

SUBWOOFER : ON

:OPERATE

5. When you finish, press EXIT repeatedly until the menu disappears from the TV.

52

EN50-61.RX-9010VBK[J]f 52 01.2.15, 0:16 PM

Selecting the Line Direct Function

(Also see page 22)

1. Press MENU.

The MENU appears on the TV.

• Pressing one of the

%

/ fi

/

@

/

#

buttons also displays the

MENU.

2. Press

%

/

fi

to move to “SOUND

CONTROL,” then press

@

/

#

.

The SOUND CONTROL menu appears.

3. Press

%

/

fi

to move to “LINE DIRECT.”

SOUND CONTROL

4. Press

@

/

#

to turn the line direct function

“ON” or “OFF.”

DIGITAL EQ

LEVEL ADJUST

EFFECT ADJUST

MIDNIGHT MODE: NORMAL

INPUT ATT : NORMAL

LINE DIRECT: OFF

BASS BOOST : OFF

SUBWOOFER : ON

:OPERATE

5. When you finish, press

EXIT repeatedly until the menu disappears from the TV.

Selecting the Bass Boost Function

(Also see page 21)

1. Press MENU.

The MENU appears on the TV.

• Pressing one of the % / fi / @ / # buttons also displays the

MENU.

2. Press

%

/

fi

to move to “SOUND

CONTROL,” then press

@

/

#

.

The SOUND CONTROL menu appears.

3. Press

%

/

fi

to move to “BASS BOOST.”

SOUND CONTROL

4. Press

@

/

#

to turn the bass boost function

“ON” or “OFF.”

DIGITAL EQ

LEVEL ADJUST

EFFECT ADJUST

MIDNIGHT MODE: NORMAL

INPUT ATT : NORMAL

LINE DIRECT: OFF

BASS BOOST : OFF

SUBWOOFER : ON

:OPERATE

5. When you finish, press

EXIT repeatedly until the menu disappears from the TV.

Activating the Subwoofer Sound

(Also see page 21)

1. Press MENU.

The MENU appears on the TV.

• Pressing one of the

%

/ fi

/

@

/

#

buttons also displays the

MENU.

2. Press

%

/

fi

to move to “SOUND

CONTROL,” then press

@

/

#

.

The SOUND CONTROL menu appears.

3. Press

%

/

fi

to move to “SUBWOOFER.”

4. Press

@

/

#

to turn the subwoofer output “ON”

SOUND CONTROL

DIGITAL EQ

LEVEL ADJUST

EFFECT ADJUST

MIDNIGHT MODE: NORMAL

INPUT ATT : NORMAL

LINE DIRECT: OFF

BASS BOOST : OFF

SUBWOOFER : ON

or “OFF.”

:OPERATE

5. When you finish, press

EXIT repeatedly until the menu disappears from the TV.

Operating the Tuner

(Also see pages 35 and 36)

1. Select FM or AM as the playing source.

Press FM/AM.

2. Press MENU.

The MENU appears on the TV.

• Pressing one of the % / fi / @ / # buttons also displays the

MENU.

MENU

3. Press

%

/

fi

to move to “TUNER

CONTROL,” then press

@

/

#

.

The TUNER CONTROL menu appears.

SOURCE : ch–– FM 87.5 MHz

SURROUND:PRO LOGIC

DSP MODE:THEATER1

SOUND CONTROL

TUNER CONTROL

SETTING

:ENTER

VOLUME : 20

4. Press

%

/

fi

to move to the item you want to set, then press

@

/

#

.

On the TUNER CONTROL menu, you can do the following:

TUNER CONTROL

BAND : FM

PRESET CH : ––

FREQUENCY : 87.5 MHz

FM MODE :AUTO MUTING

PRESET MEMORY

:ENTER

“BAND”:

“PRESET CH”:

“FREQUENCY”:

“FM MODE”:

Select the band.

Select a preset channel station.

Tune in a station manually.

Select the FM reception mode.*

“PRESET MEMORY”: See “Storing the Preset Stations” on page 54.

Note:

* Not displayed when an AM station is selected.

5. When you finish, press EXIT repeatedly until the menu disappears from the TV.

53

EN50-61.RX-9010VBK[J]f 53 01.2.15, 0:16 PM

Storing the Preset Stations (Also see page 35)

1. Press MENU.

The MENU appears on the TV.

• Pressing one of the % / fi / @ / # buttons also displays the

MENU.

2. Press

%

/

fi

to move to “TUNER

CONTROL,” then press

@

/

#

.

The TUNER CONTROL menu appears.

3. Tune into a station on the TUNER CONTROL menu, referring to “Operating the Tuner” on page 53.

4. Press

%

/

fi

to move to “PRESET

MEMORY,” then press

@

/

#

.

moves to “PRESET CH” and the channel number starts flashing.

TUNER CONTROL

BAND : FM

PRESET CH : 20

FREQUENCY : 87.5 MHz

FM MODE :AUTO MUTING

PRESET MEMORY

:MEMORY

:OPERATE

5. Press

@

/

#

to select a preset station number you want.

6. Press SET to store the setting.

The selected channel number stops flashing.

7. When you finish, press EXIT repeatedly until the menu disappears from the TV.

Setting the Basic Setting Items

(Also see pages 27 – 34)

1. Press MENU.

The MENU appears on the TV.

• Pressing one of the

%

/ fi

/

@ / # buttons also displays the MENU.

2. Press

%

/

fi

to move to “SETTING,” then press

@

/

#

.

The SETTING 1 appears.

3. Press

%

/

fi

to move

to the item you want to set or adjust, then press

@

/

#

.

• To go to the SETTING 2 menu, move to “NEXT

PAGE,” then press

@

/

#

.

• To go back to the SETTING

1 menu, move to

“PREVIOUS PAGE,” then press

@

/

#

.

MENU

SOURCE : CD

SURROUND:PRO LOGIC

DSP MODE:THEATER1

INPUT :ANALOG

SOUND CONTROL

TUNER CONTROL

SETTING

:ENTER

VOLUME : 20

SETTING 1

SUBWOOFER : NO

FRONT SPK : LARGE

CENTER SPK : SMALL

REAR SPK : SMALL

CNTR DELAY: 0msec

REAR DELAY : 5msec

CROSSOVER : 80Hz

FRONT SPK2 : MAIN ROOM

ONE TOUCH OPR : OFF

NEXT PAGE

:OPETATE

SETTING 2

DIGITAL 1 : DVD

DIGITAL 2 : CD

DIGITAL 3 : TV

DIGITAL 4 : CDR

VIDEO DVD : S/C

VIDEO DBS : S/C

LFE ATT : 0dB

FL DISPLAY : NORMAL

PREVIOUS PAGE

:OPERATE

On the SETTING 1 and 2 menus, you can do the following:

SETTING 1 menu

“SUBWOOFER”: Set the subwoofer information (see page 28).

“FRONT SPK”: Set the front speaker information (see page 29).

“CENTER SPK”: Set the center speaker information (see page 29).

“REAR SPK”: Set the rear speaker information (see page 29).

“CNTR DELAY”: Adjust the delay time of the center speaker output (see page 29). *

“REAR DELAY”: Adjust the delay time of the rear speaker output (see page 29). **

“CROSSOVER”: Set the crossover frequency

(see page 30).

“FRONT SPK2”: Set the front speaker 2 information

(see page 27).

“ONE TOUCH OPR”: Set the one touch operation.

(see page 34).

SETTING 2 menu

“DIGITAL 1/2/3/4”: Set the digital input terminal

(see page 30).

“VIDEO DVD”: Set the video input terminal for the

DVD player (see page 32).

“VIDEO DBS”:

“LFE ATT”:

Set the video input terminal for the

DBS tuner (see page 32).

Set the low frequency effect attenuator level (see page 30).

“FL DISPLAY”: Shows the disc text information on the display (see page 33).

Notes:

* Not adjustable when “CTR SPK” is set to “NONE” (see page

29).

** Not adjustable when “REAR SPK” is set to “NONE” (see page

29).

4. When you finish, press EXIT repeatedly until the menu disappears from the TV.

54

EN50-61.RX-9010VBK[J]f 54 01.2.15, 0:16 PM

COMPU LINK Remote Control System

The COMPU LINK remote control system allows you to operate JVC audio components through this receiver.

To use this remote control system, you need to connect JVC audio components through the COMPU LINK (SYNCHRO) jacks (see below) in addition to the connections using cables with RCA pin plugs (see pages 7 and 8).

• Make sure that the AC power cords of these components are unplugged before connection. Plug the AC power cords only after all connections are complete.

CD player

Notes:

• There are four versions of COMPU LINK remote control system.

This receiver is equipped with the fourth version — COMPU LINK-

4. This version is created by adding systematic operations with the

CD recorder to the previous version — COMPU LINK-3.

• If your audio component has two COMPU LINK jacks, you can use either one. If it has only one COMPU LINK jack, connect it so that it is the last item in the series of components. (For example, the turntable or CD player in the diagram above.)

• To operate the cassette deck or MD recorder using the COMPU

LINK remote control system, set the source name correctly. (See page 33.)

• Refer also to the manuals supplied with your audio components.

CD recorder

Cassette deck or

MD recorder

RX-9010VBK

Turntable

COMPU LINK – 4

(SYNCHRO)

This remote control system allows you to use four functions listed below.

Remote Control through the Remote Sensor on the

Receiver

You can control the connected audio components through the receiver using this remote control. For details, see pages 65 – 67.

Automatic Source Selection

• When you press the play ( 3 ) button on a connected component or on its own remote control, the receiver automatically turns on and changes the main room source to the component.

ANALOG L R

1

SPEAKERS

MAIN ROOM

VOLUME

– If the receiver is already turned on, and the SUB ROOM indicator and the source name for the sub-room are lit on the display, the receiver changes the sub-room source to the component.

IMPORTANT:

Check to see if the proper indicator(s) and information appear on the display on the front panel before/while using the buttons and controls.

When using the buttons and controls on the front panel:

• For the main room operations

– The MAIN ROOM indicator is lit.

– The source name for the sub-room is not lit on the display.

• For the sub-room operations

– The SUB ROOM indicator is lit.

– The source name for the sub-room is lit on the display.

When using the remote control:

• For the main room operations

– Set MAIN ROOM/SUB ROOM selector to

“MAIN ROOM.”

MAIN ROOM

• For the sub-room operations

– Set MAIN ROOM/SUB ROOM selector to “SUB ROOM.”

SUB ROOM

SPEAKERS

SUB ROOM

SUB ROOM

VOLUME

• When you press PLAY on the remote control supplied for this receiver, the receiver PLAY automatically turns on and changes the main

room source or sub-room source (depending on

MAIN ROOM/SUB ROOM selector setting on the remote control) to the target component.

• When you select a new source on the receiver or on the remote control supplied for this receiver either for the main room or sub-

room, the newly selected component begins playing immediately, and the previously selected source continues playing without sound for a few seconds.

55

EN50-61.RX-9010VBK[J]f 55 01.2.15, 0:16 PM

Automatic Power On/Off (Standby): only possible with the COMPU LINK-3 and COMPU LINK--4 connection

Automatic Power On:

• When you turn on the receiver by pressing POWER on the front panel or AUDIO POWER ON on the remote control

(with MAIN ROOM/SUB ROOM selector set to “MAIN

ROOM”):

OR

When you turn on the main room sound by pressing MAIN

ROOM ON/OFF while the receiver is turned on:

\

The MAIN ROOM indicator and the source name for the main room light up on the display, and one of the connected components will turn on automatically, depending on which component has been previously selected as the main room

source.

• When you turn on the receiver by pressing

AUDIO POWER ON on the remote control (with MAIN

ROOM/SUB ROOM selector set to “SUB ROOM”):

OR

When you turn on the sub-room sound by pressing

SUB ROOM ON/OFF while the receiver is turned on:

\

The SUB ROOM indicator and the source name for the subroom light up on the display, and one of the connected components will turn on automatically, depending on which component has been previously selected as the sub-room

source.

Automatic Power Off (Standby):

• When you turn off the receiver by pressing POWER, the connected components will turn off (standby).

• When you turn off the main room sound by pressing

MAIN ROOM ON/OFF, the selected main room source component turns off (unless the same component is selected as the sub-room source).

– If the SUB ROOM indicator and the source name for the subroom are lit on the display, the main room source will stop playing, but will not turn off.

• When you turn off the sub-room source by pressing

SUB ROOM ON/OFF, the selected sub-room source component turns off (unless the same component is selected as the main room source).

– If the MAIN ROOM indicator and the source name for the main room are lit on the display, the main room source will stop playing, but will not turn off.

Synchronized Recording

This operation is only possible while the receiver is ready for the main room operations.

Synchronized recording means the cassette deck (or MD recorder) starts recording as soon as a CD begins playing.

• When using a CD player for synchronized recording, refer to the manual supplied with it.

To use synchronized recording, follow these steps:

1. Put a tape in the cassette deck (or an MD in the

MD recorder), and a disc in the CD player.

2. Press the record (

¶

) button and the pause (

8

) button on the cassette deck (or MD recorder) at the same time.

This puts the cassette deck (or MD recorder) into recording pause.

If you do not press the record (

¶

) button and pause (

8

) button at the same time, the synchronized recording feature will not operate.

3. Press the play (

3

) button on the CD player.

The main room source changes on the receiver, and as soon as play starts, the cassette deck (or MD recorder) starts recording.

When the play ends, the cassette deck (or MD recorder) enters recording pause, and stops about 4 seconds later.

Notes:

• During synchronized recording;

– the selected main room source cannot be changed. (You can change the sub-room source.)

– If the same source is selected both for the main room and the sub-room, operating the sub-room source will affect the recording.

• The COMPU LINK remote control system may not operate properly during synchronized recording;

– If the power of any component is shut off.

– If the main room sound is turned off by pressing

MAIN ROOM ON/OFF.

In this case, you must start again from the beginning.

01.2.15, 0:16 PM

56

EN50-61.RX-9010VBK[J]f 56

TEXT COMPU LINK Remote Control System

The TEXT COMPU LINK remote control system has been developed to deal with the disc information recorded in the

CD Text * and MDs. Using this information in the discs, you can operate the CD player or MD recorder equipped with the TEXT COMPU LINK remote control system through the receiver.

The following operations are only possible while the receiver is ready for the main room operations, and are used for the main room sources.

CONNECTIONS:

To use this remote control system, you need to connect the CD player and/or MD recorder you want to operate, following the procedures below.

1. If you have already plugged your CD player, MD recorder, and this receiver into the AC outlets, unplug their AC power cords first.

2. Connect your CD player, MD recorder, and this receiver as follows, through the COMPU LINK jacks and TEXT COMPU LINK jacks.

1) COMPU LINK jacks: Use the cables with the monaural mini-plugs (not supplied with this receiver).

CD player

FUNCTIONS:

This remote control system allows you to use the functions listed below.

Displaying the Disc Information on the TV screen

Disc information such as its performer and disc title (and track titles only when a CD Text is selected) is shown on the TV screen.

Disc Search: Only for CD Player

This remote control system can allow you to search for discs by the performer, disc title, and music genre.

With this disc search, you can easily find the disc you want to play.

Disc Title Input:

If your CD player or MD recorder has the disc memory function, you can input the following information about the normal audio CDs or MDs on the TV screen.

• For CDs: Performer, disc title, and music genre

• For MDs: Disc title and song titles

COMPU LINK – 4

(SYNCHRO)

2) TEXT COMPU LINK jacks: Use the cables with the stereo mini-plugs (not supplied with this receiver).

TEXT

COMPU LINK

MD recorder

CD player

MD recorder

3. Connect your CD player, MD recorder and this receiver, using the cables with RCA pin plugs (see pages 7 and 8).

4. Plug the AC power cords of these components above into the AC outlets.

5. When turning on these components for the first time, turn on the connected components first, then turn on this receiver.

* What is a CD Text?

In a CD Text, some information about the disc (its disc title, performer, composer, arranger, etc.) is recorded.

Notes:

• If your audio component has two COMPU LINK jacks, you can use either one. If it has only one COMPU LINK jack, connect it so that it is the last item in the series of components. (For example, the CD player in the diagram in the left column.)

• If your audio component has two TEXT COMPU LINK jacks, you can use either one. If it has only one TEXT COMPU LINK jack, connect it so that it is the last item in the series of components. (For example, the CD player in the diagram in the left column.)

• “TEXT COMPULINK SOURCE NOT CONNECTED” appears on the display in the following cases:

– When the connections explained on the left are not correctly done.

– When you try to use the TEXT COMPULINK function a few seconds after you turn on the connected equipment. This is not a malfunction of the units.

• Refer also to the manuals supplied with your CD player or MD recorder.

IMPORTANT:

If you turn on the receiver before turning on the other components after connecting the components, the TEXT COMPU LINK remote control system does not work correctly.

If this happens:

1. Turn off all the components including this receiver.

2. Turn on the connected components.

3. Turn on this receiver.

57

EN50-61.RX-9010VBK[J]f 57 01.2.15, 0:16 PM

Disc Information screen

OPERATIONS:

To use this remote control system, you need to connect the TV to the

MONITOR OUT jack on the rear panel (see page 9), and set the

TV’s input mode to the proper position to which the receiver is connected. Make sure you have connected the CD player or

MD recorder equipped with the TEXT COMPU LINK remote control system. If not, you cannot use the following functions.

IMPORTANT:

Check to see if the proper indicator(s) and information appear on the display on the front panel before/while using the buttons and controls.

For the main room operations:

• The MAIN ROOM indicator is lit.

• The source name for the sub-room is not lit on the display.

• When using the remote control:

– Set MAIN ROOM/SUB ROOM selector to

“MAIN ROOM.”

– Check to see if the following information

MAIN ROOM appear on the display window on the remote control.

SUB ROOM

On-Screen Operation buttons (on the remote control)

TV VOL CHANNEL

TV/VIDEO

MUTING

VOLUME

MENU

TEXT

DISPLAY

SET

DVD

MENU

EXIT

RM-SRX9010J

REMOTE CONTROL

A/V CONTROL RECEIVER

MENU

DVD

MENU

SET

TEXT

DISPLAY

EXIT

“MENU” appears on the display window of the remote control when you press the buttons — TEXT DISPLAY, % / fi / @ /

#

, SET, EXIT.

Ex. When you press TEXT DISPLAY,

“MENU” appears on the display window.

STANDBY

MAIN ROOM

MAIN ROOM

ON/OFF

SUB ROOM

SUB ROOM

ON/OFF

TV/CATV/DBS

POWER

ON

VCR1

POWER

MAIN ROOM SUB ROOM

1

2

3

4

5

1 Source name: CD or MD

2 Select or , then press SET to change the disc.

3 Track numbers and track titles.

• When you move to a track number, you can change the track information by pressing @ / # . Each time you press the button, track information alternates between its track title and its performer. (You can also start playing the track by pressing SET.)

4 Select this (move in front), then press SET to go to the DISC SEARCH screen (see page 59).

5 Select this (move in front), then press SET to go to the TITLE INPUT screen (see page 60).

6 This appears only when a CD Text is selected.

7 Disc information such as the disc title, performer, and music genre.

When this is selected ( in front), you can change the disc information by pressing @ / # . Each time you press the button, disc information (see “Note on 7 ”) changes.

8 Select or , then press SET to change the track.

9 Usable buttons and their functions for the current selection.

Indication here will be changed according to what is currently selected ( in front) on the screen. See “Note on 9 .”

Note on 7 :

The following information will appear on the display:

• For CD Texts — Disc title, Performer, Genre, Song writer,

Composer, Arranger, Message

Only recorded information will be shown. If there is no data, “NO

DATA” will appear.

• For MDs — Disc title

If there is no data, “NO DATA” will appear.

6

7

8

9

Showing the Disc Information on the TV

Screen

Press TEXT DISPLAY while “CD” or “MD” is selected as the source.

The Disc Information screen appears on the TV.

Note on 9 :

For example, the SET button will be used to start play (PLAY), to go to the next screen (ENTER), and to determine the selection (ENTER).

To exit from the Disc information screen:

Press EXIT.

Notes:

• The on-screen display will disappear in the following cases:

– if no operation is done for about 10 minutes.

– if you do any operation other than explained in this section.

• To control the MD recorder using the TEXT COMPU LINK remote control system, you have to change the source name shown on the display from “TAPE” to “MD.” (See page 33.)

• Some special characters and marks cannot be displayed correctly.

58

EN50-61.RX-9010VBK[J]f 58 01.2.15, 0:16 PM

Searching for a Disc (Only for the CD player)

Search for a disc by its performer:

1. Press TEXT DISPLAY while “CD” is selected as the source.

The Disc Information screen appears on the TV.

2. Press

%

/

fi

to move to “SEARCH,” then press

SET.

The DISC SEARCH screen appears .

3. Press

%

/

fi

then press SET.

The PERFORMER SEARCH screen appears.

to move to “PERFORMER,”

Search for a disc by its disc title:

1. Press TEXT DISPLAY while “CD” is selected as the source.

The Disc Information screen appears on the TV.

2. Press

%

/

fi

to move to “SEARCH,” then press

SET.

The DISC SEARCH screen appears.

3. Press

%

/

fi

to move to “DISC TITLE,” then press SET.

The DISC TITLE SEARCH screen appears.

4. Press

%

/

fi

/

@

/

#

to move in front of the first character of the performer you want to search for, then press

SET.

To correct the incorrect entry, press % / fi / @ / # to move

in front of the correct character, then press SET.

Note:

Symbols such as @, # or $ cannot be available for search.

5. Press SET again.

Disc search starts, then the

SEARCH RESULT screen, showing the performers, appears.

4. Press

%

/

fi

/

@

/

#

to move in front of the first character of the disc title you want to search for, then press

SET.

To correct the incorrect entry, press

%

/ fi

/

@

/

#

to move in front of the correct character, then press SET.

Note:

Symbols such as @, # or $ cannot be available for search.

5. Press SET again.

Disc search starts, then the

SEARCH RESULT screen, showing the disc titles, appears.

6. On the SEARCH RESULT screen, you can do the following:

• Changing the indication of the disc information:

Press % / fi to move to a searched for disc, then press

@

/

#

. Each time you press

@

/

#

, the disc information alternates between its performer and its disc title.

• Starting a disc play and going to the Disc Information

screen (see page 58): Press

%

/ fi

to move to a searched for disc, then press SET.

• Showing unseen disc information (if more than 5 discs are

listed as a result of the search): Press % / fi until they appear.

• Going back to the PERFORMER SEARCH screen: Press

EXIT.

6. On the SEARCH RESULT screen, you can do the following:

• Changing the indication of the disc information:

Press

%

/ fi

to move to a searched for disc, then press

@ / # . Each time you press @ / # , the disc information alternates between its disc title and its performer.

• Starting a disc play and going to the Disc Information

screen (see page 58): Press

%

/ fi

to move to a searched for disc, then press SET.

• Showing unseen disc information (if more than 5 discs are

listed as a result of the search): Press

%

/ fi

until they appear.

• Going back to the DISC TITLE SEARCH screen: Press

EXIT.

59

EN50-61.RX-9010VBK[J]f 59 01.2.15, 0:16 PM

Search for a disc by its genre:

1. Press TEXT DISPLAY while “CD” is selected as the source.

The Disc Information screen appears on the TV.

2. Press

%

/

fi

to move to “SEARCH,” then press SET.

The DISC SEARCH screen appears.

3. Press

%

/

fi

to move to “GENRE,” then press SET.

The GENRE SEARCH screen appears.

4. Press

%

/

fi

to move to the genre you want to search for, then press

SET.

To show the unseen genres, press

%

/ fi

until they appear.

Disc search starts, then the

SEARCH RESULT screen, showing the disc titles, appears.

5. On the SEARCH

RESULT screen, you can do the following:

• Changing the indication of the disc information:

Press

%

/ fi

to move to a searched for disc, then press

@ / # . Each time you press @ / # , the disc information alternates between its disc title and its performer.

• Starting a disc play and going to the Disc Information

screen (see page 58): Press % / fi to move to a searched for disc, then press SET.

• Showing unseen disc information (if more than 5 discs are

listed as a result of the search): Press

%

/ fi

until they appear.

• Going back to the GENRE SEARCH screen: Press EXIT.

Entering the Disc Information

For the CD Player with the disc memory function:

You can use the disc memory function through this receiver.

The disc information (its performer, disc title, and music genre) of normal audio CDs will be stored into the memory built in the CD player.

For the disc memory function, refer to the manual supplied with your

CD player.

• The performer, disc title, and music genre information are usually recorded on a CD Text. However, if a CD Text has no genre information recorded on the disc itself, you can input its music genre by yourself.

Note:

You can enter the TITLE INPUT screens for a CD Text and input its titles. However, you cannot store the titles you have input for a CD

Text.

Example: Entering the following information for Disc 1

Performer: “MICHAEL”

Disc title: “MY FAVORITE”

1. Press TEXT DISPLAY while “CD” is selected as the source.

The Disc Information screen appears on the TV.

2. Press

%

/

fi

to move to “TITLE INPUT,” then press SET.

The TITLE INPUT:

PERFORMER screen appears.

3. Press

%

/

fi

/

@

/

#

to move in front of a character you want, then press SET to enter the character.

• If the current CD is a CD Text, go to step 5 without entering the performer.

To use the lower-case letters, press

%

/ fi

/

@

/

#

to move to , then press SET.

To use the upper-case letters again, press % / fi / @ / # to move to , then press SET.

Continued to the next page.

60

EN50-61.RX-9010VBK[J]f 60 01.2.15, 0:16 PM

4. Repeat step 3 until you finish putting a performer name (up to

32 characters).

To insert a space, press

%

/ fi

/

@

/

#

to move to

, then press SET.

To correct an incorrect character:

1) Press

%

/ fi

/

@

/

#

to move to

+

or

=

, then press

SET until the incorrect character is selected.

2) Press

%

/ fi

/

@

/

#

to move to , then press SET to erase the character.

3) Press

%

/ fi

/

@

/

#

to move in front of the correct character, then press SET to enter the correct character.

5. Press

%

/

fi

/

@

/

#

to move to “DISC 1:

MICHAEL (in this example),” then press

SET.

The TITLE INPUT: DISC

TITLE screen appears.

6. Enter the disc title, referring to steps 3 and

4.

• If the current CD is a CD

Text, go to the next step without entering the disc title.

7. Press

%

/

fi

/

@

/

#

to move to “DISC 1:

MY FAVORITE (in this example),” then press

SET.

The TITLE INPUT: DISC 1

GENRE screen appears.

8. Press

%

/

fi

to move to the genre you want, then press SET.

The Disc Information screen appears again.

To show the unseen genres, press

%

/ fi

until they appear.

For the MD recorder:

You can write the disc information (disc title and song titles) into the disc. You can only write the song title for the song currently selected.

• If you have the CD-MD combination deck, you can also enter the disc information (its performer, disc title, and its music genre) of normal audio CDs into the memory built in the CD-MD combination deck. (To do this, follow the procedure of “For the

CD Player with the disc memory function” on page 60.)

• If you change the disc or song title including more than 32 characters, the characters following 32nd will be erased from the title.

1. Press TEXT DISPLAY while “MD” is selected as the source.

The Disc Information screen appears on the TV.

2. Press

%

/

fi

to move to “TITLE INPUT,” then press SET.

The DISC TITLE INPUT screen appears.

3. Enter the title, referring to steps 3 and 4 of “For the CD Player with the disc memory function” on pages 60 and 61.

• You can enter up to 32 characters for the disc title.

4. Press

%

/

fi

/

@

/

#

to move to the disc title you have just entered, then press SET.

The disc title is stored into the memory, and the SONG

TITLE INPUT screen for the currently selected song appears.

• You can enter a song title for the song currently selected.

5. Enter the song title, referring to steps 3 and 4 of

“For the CD Player with the disc memory function” on pages 60 and 61.

• You can enter up to 32 characters for the song title.

6. Press

%

/

fi

/

@

/

#

to move to the song title you have just entered, then press SET.

The song title is stored into the memory, and the Disc

Information screen appears again.

61

EN50-61.RX-9010VBK[J]f 61 01.2.15, 0:16 PM

AV COMPU LINK Remote Control System

This receiver is equipped with the AV COMPU LINK-III. The AV COMPU LINK remote control system allows you to operate JVC video components (TV, VCR, and DVD player) through the receiver. To use this remote control system, you need to connect the video components you want to operate, following the procedure below.

1. If you have already plugged your VCR 1 (VCR connected to the VCR 1 jacks), DVD player, TV, and this receiver into the AC outlets, unplug their AC power cords first.

2. Connect the IR signal transmitter (supplied) to the IR OUT on the rear, and place it so that it is aimed at the remote sensor on the target video components.

• See “CONNECTIONS 1” below.

3. Connect your VCR 1, DVD player, TV, and this receiver as follows, using the cables with the monaural mini-plugs (not supplied).

• See “CONNECTIONS 2” below.

4. Connect the audio input/output jacks on VCR 1, DVD player, TV, and this receiver using the cables with

RCA pin plug.

• See pages 8 and 9.

5. Connect the video input/output jacks on VCR 1, DVD player, TV, and this receiver, using the cables with

RCA pin plugs, with S-video plugs or with component video plugs.

• See “CONNECTIONS 3” on the next page.

6. Plug the AC power cords of the components into the AC outlets.

7. When turning on the TV for the first time after the AV COMPU LINK connection, turn the TV volume to the minimum using the TV volume control on the TV.

8. Turn on the other connected components first, then turn on this receiver.

• When turning on the VCR 1, use the remote control supplied with this receiver (press VCR 1 POWER).

CONNECTIONS 1: IR Signal Transmitter Connection

RF REMOTE

ANTENNA

Target video component(s)

On the rear panel IR OUT

Less than 10 f

(3 m) eet

At an angle of approx. 60°

IR signal transmitter

CONNECTIONS 2: AV COMP LINK Connection

VHS

VCR 1

AV

COMPU LINK

DVD player

DVD

AV

COMPU LINK

TV

AV

COMPU LINK EX

CAUTION:

You can only connect the TV with

AV COMPU LINK to the AV

COMPU LINK EX or AV COMPU

LINK III terminal.

DO NOT connect the TV with AV

COMPU LINK to the AV COMPU

LINK RECEIVER/AMP terminal.

RX-9010VBK

AV

COMPU LINK III

Notes:

• The AV COMPU LINK remote control system cannot control the DBS tuner connected to the TV SOUND/DBS and DBS component video terminals, and video components connected to the VIDEO and VCR 2 terminals on the receiver.

• When connecting only the VCR 1 and DVD player to this receiver, connect it directly to the receiver using cable with the monaural miniplugs.

• When connecting the receiver and the TV with AV COMPU LINK EX terminal by using the component video cables, you cannot use

Automatic Selection of TV’s Input Mode (see page 64).

• Refer also to the manual supplied with your video components.

62

EN62-74.RX-9010VBK[J]f 62 01.2.15, 0:16 PM

CONNECTIONS 3: Video Cable Connection

This receiver is equipped with three types of the video terminals — S-video, composite video, or component video, and the signals coming into this receiver through one type of video terminals can output only through the same type of the terminal. So you need to connect the VCR and/or DVD player to the TV using one of the following three ways:

When connecting the source equipment to the receiver using the S-video terminals, connect also this receiver to the TVs’ Video Input 1 terminal using S-video cables.

CASE 1

Source

Equipment

RX-9010VBK TV

S-video cable S-video cable

Note: To Video Input 1

If you connect the DVD player and the DBS tuner to this receiver using the composite video terminals, change the video input terminal setting to "S/C" (see page 32).

When connecting the source equipment to the receiver using the composite video terminals, connect also this receiver to the TVs’ Video Input 2 terminal (composite video input) using composite video cables.

CASE 2

Source

Equipment Composite video cable

RX-9010VBK

Composite video cable

TV

Note: To Video Input 2

If you connect the DVD player and the DBS tuner to this receiver using the S-video terminals, change the video input terminal setting to "S/C" (see page 32).

When connecting the source equipment to the receiver using the component video terminals, connect also this receiver to the TVs’ Video Input terminals (component video input) using component video cables.

CASE 3

Source

Equipment Component video cable

RX-9010VBK

Component video cable

TV

Note:

To Video Input 2

If you connect the DVD player and the DBS tuner to this receiver using the video component terminals, change the video input terminal setting to "COMPNT" (see page 32).

The AV COMPU LINK remote control system allows you to use the five basic functions listed below.

Remote Control of the TV, DVD player, and VCR

Using This Remote Control

IMPORTANT:

To operate the video components using the IR signal transmitter

(supplied), place it so that it is aimed at the remote sensor on the target video component(s).

• The IR signal transmitter can send signals at a distance of 10 feet

(3 m).

TV

DVD player

VCR

DVD

One-Touch Video Play

• Simply by inserting a video cassette without its safety tab into the

VCR 1 (the VCR connected to the VCR 1 jacks), you can enjoy the video playback without setting other switches manually. The receiver automatically turns on and changes the main room

source to “VCR 1.”

The TV automatically turns on and changes the input mode to the position so that you can view the playback picture.

(

When you insert a video cassette with its safety tab, press the play

3

) button on the VCR 1 or on its remote control. So, you can get the same result.

– If the receiver is already turned on, and the SUB ROOM indicator and the source name for the sub-room are lit on the display, the receiver changes the sub-room source to “VCR 1.”

(In this case, the TV will not turn on automatically.)

• When you press PLAY on the remote control supplied with this receiver for operating the VCR 1, the receiver automatically turns on and changes the main room source or sub-room source

(depending on MAIN ROOM/SUB ROOM selector setting on the remote control) to “VCR 1.”

– For main room operations only: The TV automatically turns on and changes the input mode to the position so that you can view the playback picture.

IR signal transmitter RX-9010VBK

You can control the connected video components using this remote control: Aim the remote control at the remote sensors on the target video component(s) or on the receiver directly.

For details, see page 62.

63

EN62-74.RX-9010VBK[J]f 63 01.2.15, 0:16 PM

One-Touch DVD Play

Simply by starting playback on the DVD player, you can enjoy the

DVD playback without setting other switches manually.

When you press PLAY on the remote control supplied with this receiver for operating the DVD player, the receiver automatically turns on and changes the main room source or sub-room source

(depending on MAIN ROOM/SUB ROOM selector setting on the remote control) to the appropriate input — “DVD,” or “DVD

MULTI” as the main room source, and “DVD” as the sub-room source.

The TV automatically turns on (for main room operations only) and changes the input mode to the position so that you can view the playback picture.

• When the DVD player is connected through the analog input jacks

on this receiver (and analog input is selected), the receiver automatically turns on and changes the source to “DVD” or “DVD

MULTI.”

– If the receiver is already turned on, and the SUB ROOM indicator and the source name for sub-room are lit on the display, the receiver changes the sub-room source to “DVD.” In this case, the TV will not turn on automatically.

• When the DVD player is connected through the digital input

terminal on this receiver (and digital input is selected), the receiver automatically turns on and changes the main room source to “DVD.”

– If the receiver is already turned on and the SUB ROOM indicator and the source name for sub-room are lit on the display, no sound comes out.

Automatic Power On/Off (Standby)

Automatic Power On:

The TV, VCR 1 (the VCR connected to the VCR 1 jacks), and DVD player turn on and off along with the receiver.

• When you turn on the receiver by pressing POWER on the front panel or AUDIO POWER ON on the remote control

(with MAIN ROOM/SUB ROOM selector set to “MAIN

ROOM”):

OR

When you turn on the main room sound by pressing

MAIN ROOM ON/OFF while the receiver is turned on:

The MAIN ROOM indicator and the source name for the main room light up on the display, and —

– If the previously selected main room source is “VCR 1,” the

TV and VCR 1 will turn on automatically.

– If the previously selected main room source is “DVD,” or

“DVD MULTI,” the TV and DVD player will turn on automatically.

– If the previously selected main room source is “VIDEO,”

“VCR 2”, “TV” or “DBS,” only the TV will turn on automatically.

• When you turn on the receiver by pressing

AUDIO POWER ON on the remote control (with MAIN

ROOM/SUB ROOM selector set to “SUB ROOM”):

OR

When you turn on the sub-room sound by pressing

SUB ROOM ON/OFF while the receiver is turned on:

The SUB ROOM indicator and the source name for the sub-room light up on the display, and —

– If the previously selected sub-room source is “VCR 1,” the

VCR 1 will turn on automatically.

– If the previously selected sub-room source is “DVD,” the DVD player will turn on automatically.

– If the previously selected sub-room source is “VIDEO,” “VCR

2,” or “DBS,” nothing happens.

Automatic Selection of TV’s Input Mode (Only for the

Main Room Operations)

• When you select “TV” as the main room source to play on the receiver, the TV automatically changes the input mode to the TV tuner so that you can watch TV.

• When you select “DVD,” “DVD MULTI,” “VCR 1,” “VCR 2, ”

“VIDEO” or “DBS” as the main room source to play on the receiver, the TV automatically changes the input mode to the appropriate position (either Video Input 1 or Video Input 2) so that you can view the playback picture.

Notes:

• When you select “TV ” as the source on the receiver, you cannot see the menu on the TV screen since the AV COMPU LINK remote control system automatically changes the TV’s input mode to the

TV tuner.

If you do not mind stopping listening to the TV sounds, you can then show the on-screen displays after changing the TV’s input mode to the appropriate position (either Video Input 1 or Video

Input 2) the receiver is connected to.

• This function does not work when you connect the TV with the AV

COMPU LINK to the AV COMPU LINK EX. In this case, reconnect the TV referring to case 1 or case 2 on page 63.

Automatic Power Off (Standby):

• When you turn off the receiver by pressing POWER, the TV,

VCR 1 and the DVD player will turn off (standby).

• When you turn off the main room sound by pressing

MAIN ROOM ON/OFF, the selected main room source component turns off (unless the same component is selected as the sub-room source), and the TV also turns off.

– If the SUB ROOM indicator and the source name for the subroom are lit on the display, nothing happens.

• When you turn off the sub-room sound by pressing

SUB ROOM ON/OFF, the selected sub-room source component turns off (unless the same component is selected as the main room source).

– If the MAIN ROOM indicator and the source name for the main room are lit on the display, nothing happens.

Note:

If you turn off the receiver by pressing POWER or turn off the main room sound by pressing MAIN ROOM ON/OFF while recording on the

VCR 1, the VCR 1 will not turn off, but continue recording.

64

EN62-74.RX-9010VBK[J]f 64 01.2.15, 0:16 PM

Operating JVC’s Audio/Video Components

You can operate JVC’s audio and video components with this receiver’s remote control, since control signals for JVC components are preset in the remote control.

Operating Audio Components

IMPORTANT:

To operate JVC’s audio components using this remote control:

• You need to connect JVC audio components through the COMPU

LINK-4 (SYNCHRO) jacks (see page 55) in addition to the connections using cables with RCA pin plugs (see pages 7 and 8).

• Aim the remote control directly at the remote sensor on the receiver.

• If you use the buttons on the front panel or the menu function to choose a source, the remote control will not operate that source. To operate a source with the remote control, the source must be selected using source selecting buttons on the remote control.

• To operate the cassette deck or MD recorder using the COMPU

LINK remote control system, set the source name correctly. (See page 33.)

• Refer also to the manuals supplied with your components.

When using the remote control supplied with this receiver:

• For the main room operations

– Set MAIN ROOM/SUB ROOM selector to “MAIN ROOM.”

• For the sub-room operations

– Set MAIN ROOM/SUB ROOM selector to

“SUB ROOM.”

– Check to see if the following information appear on the display window on the remote control: MAIN ROOM SUB ROOM

65

MAIN ROOM/

SUB ROOM selector

MAIN ROOM

SUB ROOM

Indications

MAIN ROOM

*

SUB ROOM

*

* MAIN ROOM or SUB ROOM indicator does not appear when no indicators appear on the display window.

Buttons

FM/AM

CD

CDR

PHONO

TAPE/MD

CONTROL (repeatedly)

Indications

TUNER

CD

CDR

PHONO

TAPE

VCR1

=

TAPE

=

CDR

=

CDDSC

=

(back to the beginning)

SOUND SOUND

After selecting a source:

Buttons

PLAY

4

/REW

FF/

¢

STOP

PAUSE

1 – 10, +10, 0

Indications one of the selected source names listed above

After pressing SOUND, the following function are assigned to the specific number buttons:

Buttons

BALANCE L

BALANCE R

EFFECT

ROOM SIZE

LIVENESS

CENTER TONE

SUBWFR

CENTER

REAR•L

REAR•R

DIGITAL EQ

Indications

SOUND

S WFR

CTR

REARL

REARR

EQ

When you press the buttons listed above, the indication appears for 5 – 10 seconds for your confirmation.

Tuner

You can always perform the following operations:

FM/AM : Alternates between FM and AM.

After pressing FM/AM, you can perform the following operations:

1 – 10, +10 : Selects a preset channel number directly.

For channel number 5, press 5.

For channel number 15, press +10, then 5.

For channel number 20, press +10, then 10.

TUNING UP/DOWN : Tunes into stations.

FM MODE : Changes the FM reception mode.

Sound control section (Amplifier)

You can always perform the following operations:

SURROUND ON/OFF :

DSP MODE

TEST :

:

Turns on or off the Surround modes

— Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital, and DTS Digital Surround.

Selects the DSP modes.

Turns on or off the test tone output.

After pressing SOUND, you can perform the following operations:

SUBWFR then LEVEL +/– : Adjusts the subwoofer output level.

CENTER then LEVEL +/– : Adjusts the center speaker output level.

REAR•L then LEVEL +/– : Adjusts the left rear speaker output level.

REAR•R then LEVEL +/– : Adjusts the right rear speaker output level.

DIGITAL EQ then LEVEL +/– : Selects the audio band and adjusts its frequency level.

BALANCE L/BALANCE R : Adjusts the output balance of the front speakers.

Selects the effect level.

EFFECT :

CENTER TONE :

ROOM SIZE :

LIVENESS :

Selects the center tone.

Selects the room size.

Selects the liveness.

Notes:

• After adjusting sounds, press the corresponding source selecting button to operate your target source by using the 10 keys; otherwise, the 10 keys cannot be used for operating your target source.

• Each time you press LEVEL + or LEVEL –, the indication corresponding to the function you have selected appears on the display window on the remote control.

CD player

After pressing CD, you can perform the following operations on the

CD player:

PLAY :

4

:

Starts playing.

Returns to the beginning of the current (or previous) track.

¢

:

STOP :

Skips to the beginning of the next track.

Stops playing.

PAUSE : Pauses playing. To release it, press PLAY.

1 – 10, +10 : Selects a track number directly.

For track number 5, press 5.

For track number 15, press +10, then 5.

For track number 20, press +10, then 10.

For track number 30, press +10, +10, then 10.

EN62-74.RX-9010VBK[J]f 65 01.2.15, 0:16 PM

CD player-changer

After selecting CDDSC by pressing CONTROL repeatedly, you can perform the following operations on a CD player-changer:

PLAY :

4

:

Starts playing.

Returns to the beginning of the current (or previous) track.

¢

:

STOP :

Skips to the beginning of the next track.

Stops playing.

PAUSE : Pauses playing. To release it, press PLAY.

1 – 6, 7/P : Selects the number of a disc installed in a CD player-changer.

After pressing CD, you can perform the following operations on the

CD player-changer:

1 – 10, +10 : Selects a track number directly.

For track number 5, press 5.

For track number 15, press +10, then 5.

For track number 20, press +10, then 10.

For track number 30, press +10, +10, then 10.

EXAMPLE:

• Selecting disc number 4, track number 12, and starting playback.

1.Press CONTROL repeatedly until “CDDSC” appears on the display window, then press 4.

2.Press CD, then press +10, 2.

If your CD changer is of 200-disc loading capability (except for

XL-MC100 and XL-MC301) you can do the following operations using the number buttons after pressing CD.

1. Select a disc number.

2. Then select a track number (always enter two digits).

3. Start playback.

EXAMPLES:

• Selecting disc number 3, track number 2, and starting playback.

Press 3, then, 0, 2, then PLAY.

• Selecting disc number 10, track number 5, and starting playback.

Press 1, 0, then, 0, 5, then PLAY.

• Selecting disc number 105, track number 12, and starting playback. Press 1, 0, 5, then 1, 2 then PLAY.

CD recorder

After pressing CDR, you can perform the following operations on a

CD recorder:

PLAY :

4

:

Starts playing.

Returns to the beginning of the current (or

¢

:

STOP : previous) track.

Skips to the beginning of the next track.

Stops playing.

PAUSE : Pauses playing. To release it, press PLAY.

1 – 10, +10 : Selects a track number directly.

For track number 5, press 5.

For track number 15, press +10, then 5.

For track number 20, press +10, then 10.

For track number 30, press +10, +10, then 10.

Notes:

• When you start recording on the CD recorder, use the buttons on the CD recorder itself or on the remote control supplied with it.

• You can use either CDR or CONTROL to activate the buttons listed above. If you press CDR, the playing source also changes. On the other hand, if you press CONTROL repeatedly to select “CDR,” the playing source does not change.

Turntable

After pressing PHONO, you can perform the following operations on a turntable:

PLAY :

STOP :

Starts playing.

Stops operations.

Cassette deck

After pressing TAPE/MD or selecting “TAPE” by pressing

CONTROL repeatedly, you can perform the following operations on a cassette deck:

PLAY :

REW :

FF :

STOP :

PAUSE :

¶ REC :

Starts playing.

Fast-winds the tape from right to left.

Fast-winds the tape from left to right.

Stops operations.

Pauses playing. To release it, press PLAY.

Press this button with the PLAY button to start recording (for the main room operation only).

Press this button with the PAUSE button to enter recording pause.

Notes:

• When you use a cassette deck or MD recorder, change the source name connected to TAPE/MD terminals correctly (see page 33).

• You can use either TAPE/MD or CONTROL to activate the buttons listed above. If you press TAPE/MD, the playing source also changes. On the other hand, if you press CONTROL repeatedly to select “TAPE”, the playing source does not change.

MD recorder

After pressing TAPE/MD, you can perform the following operations on the MD recorder:

PLAY :

4

:

¢

¶

:

STOP

REC

:

PAUSE

:

:

Starts playing.

Returns to the beginning of the current (or previous) track.

Skips to the beginning of the next track.

Stops playing.

Pauses playing. To release it, press PLAY.

Press this button with the PLAY button to start recording (for the main room operation only).

Press this button with the PAUSE button to enter recording pause.

Note:

When you use a cassette deck or MD recorder, change the source name connected to TAPE/MD terminals correctly (see page 33).

66

EN62-74.RX-9010VBK[J]f 66 01.2.15, 0:16 PM

Operating Video Components

IMPORTANT:

To operate JVC’s video components using this remote control:

• You need to connect JVC video components through the AV

COMPU LINK jacks (see page 62) in addition to the connections using cables with RCA pin plugs (see pages 8 and 9).

• Some JVC VCRs can accept two types of the control signals — remote codes “A” and “B.” Before using this remote control, make sure that the remote control code of the VCR connected to the VCR

1 terminals is set to code “A.”

– When another JVC VCR is connected to the VCR 2 and VIDEO jacks, set its remote control code to code “B.” (This remote control cannot emit the control signals of code “B.”)

• To operate the video component(s) using the remote control:

– Aim the remote control directly at the remote sensor on each component, not on the receiver.

• To operate the video component(s) using the RF signals emitted from this remote control, the IR signal transmitter and the RF rod antenna must be connected to this receiver.

– Place the IR signal transmitter so that it is aimed at the remote sensor on the target video component(s).

– The RF signal-reachable distance may differ depending on the operating conditions and circumstances.

– The IR signal transmitter can send signals at a distance of 10 feet

(3 m).

When using the remote control:

Check to see if MAIN ROOM/SUB ROOM selector and

TV/CATV/DBS selector are set to the correct positions:

• TV/CATV/DBS selector:

To operate TVs, set it to “TV.”

• MAIN ROOM/SUB ROOM selector:

TV

CATV/

DBS

– For the main room operations

Set MAIN ROOM/SUB ROOM selector to “MAIN ROOM.”

– For the sub-room operations

Set MAIN ROOM/SUB ROOM selector to

“SUB ROOM.”

MAIN ROOM

– Check to see if the following information appear on the display window on the remote control:

SUB ROOM

67

MAIN ROOM/

SUB ROOM selector

MAIN ROOM

SUB ROOM

Indications

MAIN ROOM

SUB ROOM

*

*

* MAIN ROOM or SUB ROOM indicator does not appear when no indicators appear on the display window.

Buttons

VCR 1

DVD or DVD MULTI

TV/DBS

CONTROL (repeatedly)

DVD MENU

After selecting a source:

Indications

VCR 1

DVD

TV

VCR1

=

TAPE

=

CDR

=

CDDSC

=

(back to the beginning)

DMENU

Buttons

PLAY

4

/REW

FF/

¢

STOP

PAUSE

1 – 9, 0, +10, 100+

CHANNEL +/– one of the selected source names listed above

After pressing DVD MENU:

Buttons

%

, fi

,

@

,

#

, SET

Indications

VCR1 or TV

Indications

DMENU

When you press the buttons listed above, the corresponding indication appears for 5 – 10 seconds for your confirmation.

VCR (VCR connected to the VCR 1 jacks)

You can always perform the following operations:

VCR 1 POWER : Turns on or off the VCR 1.

After pressing VCR 1 or selecting “VCR” by pressing CONTROL repeatedly, you can perform the following operations on a VCR:

1 – 9, 0

PLAY

REW

FF :

:

:

STOP :

PAUSE :

¶ REC :

: Selects the TV channels on a VCR.

Starts playing.

Rewinds a tape.

Fast winds a tape.

Stops operations.

Pauses playing. To release it, press PLAY.

Press this button with the PLAY button to start recording (only for the main room operations).

Press this button with the PAUSE button to enter recording pause.

CHANNEL +/– : Changes the TV channels on a VCR.

Note:

You can use either VCR 1 button or CONTROL to activate the buttons listed above. If you press VCR 1, the playing source also changes. On the other hand, if you press CONTROL repeatedly to select “VCR1,” the playing source does not change.

DVD player

After pressing DVD (or DVD MULTI: only for the main room operations), you can perform the following operations on a DVD player:

1 – 10, 0, +10 : Selects the DVD titles or the tracks.

PLAY

4

:

: Starts playing.

Returns to the beginning of the current (or previous) track.

¢

:

STOP :

Skips to the beginning of the next track.

Stops playing.

PAUSE : Stops playing temporarily. To release it, press

PLAY.

After pressing DVD

MENU (only for the main room operations), these buttons can be used for the DVD menu operations.

MENU

SET

TEXT

DISPLAY

DVD

MENU

EXIT

Note:

For detailed menu operations, refer to the instructions supplied with the discs or the DVD player.

TV

You can always perform the following operations (with TV/CATV/

DBS selector set to “TV”):

TV/CATV/DBS POWER : Turns on or off the TV.

TV VOL +/– : Adjusts the volume.

TV/VIDEO : Sets the input mode (either TV or

VIDEO).

After pressing TV/DBS (with TV/CATV/DBS selector set to “TV”), you can perform the following operations on a TV:

CHANNEL +/– :

1 – 9, 0, 100+ :

RETURN :

Changes the channels.

Selects the channels.

Alternates between the previously selected channel and the current channel.

EN62-74.RX-9010VBK[J]f 67 01.2.15, 2:59 PM

Operating Other Manufacturers’ Equipment

This remote control supplied with the receiver can transmit control signals for other manufacturers’ VCRs, TVs, CATV converters, DBS tuners, DVD players ,and CD players. By changing the transmittable signals from preset ones to the other manufacturers’, you can operate the other manufacturer’s components using this remote control.

When operating the other manufacturers’ components, refer also to the manuals supplied with them. To operate these components with the remote control, first you need to set the manufacturer’s code each for VCR, TV, CATV converter,

DBS tuner, and DVD player.

After replacing batteries of the remote control, set the manufactures’ codes again.

IMPORTANT:

• To operate the video component(s) using the RF signals emitted from this remote control, the IR signal transmitter and the RF rod antenna must be connected to this receiver.

– Place the IR signal transmitter so that it is aimed at the remote sensor on the target video component(s).

– The RF signal-reachable distance may differ depending on the operating conditions and circumstances.

– The IR signal transmitter can send signals at a distance of 10 feet

(3 m).

When using the remote control:

Check to see if TV/CATV/DBS selector are set to the correct position:

TV/CATV/DBS selector:

• For TV operations

Set TV/CATV/DBS selector to “TV.”

• For the CATV converter and DBS tuner operations

Set TV/CATV/DBS selector to “CATV/DBS.”

TV

CATV/

DBS

• Check to see if the following information appear on the display window on the remote control.

After setting the remote control mode selector to “TV” :

Buttons

TV/DBS

VCR 1

DVD or DVD MULTI

CD

DVD MENU

Indications

TV

VCR 1

DVD

CD

DMENU

After setting the remote control mode selector to “CATV/DBS” :

Buttons

TV/DBS

VCR 1

DVD or DVD MULTI

CD

DVD MENU

Indications

CATV

VCR 1

DVD

CD

DMENU

After selecting a source:

Buttons

PLAY

4

¢

STOP

PAUSE

1 – 9, 0, +10, 100+

CHANNEL +/–

Indications one of the source names listed above

VCR1 or TV

After pressing DVD MENU:

Buttons

% , fi , @ , # , SET

Indications

DMENU

When you press the buttons listed above, the indication appears for 5 – 10 seconds for your confirmation.

Note:

All the functions may not be assigned to the buttons in some equipment.

To change the transmittable signals for operating another manufacturer’s TV

1. Set TV/CATV/DBS selector to “TV.”

2. Press and hold TV/CATV/DBS POWER.

3. Press TV/DBS.

4. Enter manufacturer’s code using buttons 1–9, and 0.

See page 70 to find the code.

5. Release TV/CATV/DBS POWER.

After setting TV/CATV/DBS selector to “TV,” you can perform the following operations on the TV:

TV/CATV/DBS POWER: Turns on and off the TV.

TV VOL +/–: Adjusts the volume.

TV/VIDEO: Sets the input mode (either TV or VIDEO).

After pressing TV/DBS (with the remote control mode selector set to “TV”), you can perform the following operations on a TV:

CHANNEL +/–: Changes the channels.

1 – 10, 0, 100+ (+10): Selects the channels.

The 10 button will function as the

ENTER button if your TV requires pressing ENTER after selecting a channel number.

Notes:

• Refer to the manual supplied with your TV.

• You cannot change the channels of some TVs by pressing number buttons. In this case, press CHANNEL +/– for changing the channels.

6. Try to operate your TV by pressing

TV/CATV/DBS POWER.

When your TV turns on or off, you have entered the correct code.

If there are more than one code listed for your brand of TV, try each one until the correct one is entered.

Continued to the next page.

68

EN62-74.RX-9010VBK[J]f 68 01.2.15, 6:08 PM

To change the transmittable signals for operating a CATV converter and DBS tuner

1. Set TV/CATV/DBS selector to “CATV/DBS.”

2. Press and hold TV/CATV/DBS POWER.

3. Press TV/DBS.

4. Enter manufacturer’s code using buttons 1–9, and 0.

See pages 70 and 71 to find the code.

5. Release TV/CATV/DBS POWER.

After setting TV/CATV/DBS selector to “CATV/DBS,” you can turn on and off the CATV convertor or on the DBS tuner:

TV/CATV/DBS POWER: Turns on and off the CATV converter or DBS tuner.

After pressing TV/DBS with TV/CATV/DBS selector set to

“CATV/DBS,” you can perform the following operations on the

CATV convertor or on the DBS tuner:

CHANNEL +/–: Changes the channels.

1 – 10, 0, 100+ (+10): Selects the channels.

The 10 button will function as the

ENTER button if your equipment requires pressing ENTER after selecting a channel number.

Note:

Refer to the manual supplied with your CATV convertor or DBS tuner.

4. Release VCR 1 POWER.

The following button can be used for operating the VCR :

VCR 1 POWER: Turns on and off the VCR.

After pressing VCR 1, you can perform the following operations on the VCR:

CHANNEL +/–: Changes the TV channels on the

VCR.

1 – 10, 0, 100+ (+10): Selects the TV channels.

The 10 button will function as the

ENTER button if your VCR requires pressing ENTER after selecting a channel number.

Starts playback.

PLAY:

REW:

FF:

STOP:

PAUSE:

¶ REC and PAUSE :

Rewinds a video tape.

Fast-winds a video tape.

Stops operation.

Pauses.

¶ REC and PLAY :

Enters recording pause (for the main room only).

Starts recording (for the main room only).

Note:

Refer to the manual supplied with your VCR.

5. Try to operate your VCR by pressing

VCR 1 POWER.

When your VCR turns on or off, you have entered the correct code.

If there are more than one code listed for your brand of

VCR, try each one until the correct one is entered.

6. Try to operate your CATV converter or DBS tuner by pressing TV/CATV/DBS POWER.

When your CATV converter or DBS tuner turns on or off, you have entered the correct code.

If there are more than one code listed for your brand of

CATV converter or DBS tuner, try each one until the correct one is entered.

Note:

You cannot use both of the CATV converter and DBS tuner at the same time.

To change the transmittable signals for operating another manufacturer’s VCR

1. Press and hold VCR 1 POWER.

2. Press VCR 1.

3. Enter manufacturer’s code using buttons 1–9, and 0.

See page 71 to find the code.

To change the transmittable signals for operating a DVD player

1. Press and hold VCR 1 POWER.

2. Press DVD.

3. Enter manufacturer’s code using buttons 1–9, and 0.

See page 71 to find the code.

4. Release VCR 1 POWER.

After pressing DVD or DVD MULTI, you can perform the following operations on a DVD player:

1 – 9, 0 : Selects the titles or the tracks.

PLAY :

4

:

Starts playing.

Returns to the beginning of the current (or previous) track.

¢ :

STOP :

Skips to the beginning of the next track.

Stops playing.

PAUSE : Stops playing temporarily. To release it, press

PLAY.

69

EN62-74.RX-9010VBK[J]f 69 01.2.15, 2:59 PM

After pressing DVD

MENU (only for the main room operations), these buttons can be used for the DVD menu operations.

MENU

SET

TEXT

DISPLAY

DVD

MENU

EXIT

Note:

For detailed menu operations, refer to the instructions supplied with the discs or the DVD player.

Note:

Refer to the manual supplied with your DVD player.

5. Try to operate your DVD player by pressing one of the above buttons.

• DO NOT forget to turn on the DVD player before pressing one of the above buttons.

If there are more than one code listed for your brand of DVD

player, try each one until the correct one is entered.

Manufactures' codes for TV

Manufacturer

JVC

FISHER

HITACHI

MAGNAVOX

METS

MITSUBISHI

PANASONIC

PHILIPS

QUELLE

17

52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58,

59, 60, 61, 62, 63, 64, 65,

66, 67

08, 24, 29, 30, 31, 48

08, 34, 49

05

38, 77

39

37, 43

45, 46

Codes

00 * , 14, 74

05

08, 09, 10, 49

08, 17, 49

50, 51, 52, 53

08, 18

24, 26, 76

RCA/PROSC

SAMSUNG

SANYO

SHARP

SONY

TOSHIBA

ZENITH

*This figure is set to the remote control as the initial JVC cord.

To change the transmittable signals for operating a CD player

1. Press and hold AUDIO POWER ON.

2. Press CD.

3. Enter manufacturer’s code using buttons 1–9, and 0.

See page 71 to find the code.

4. Release AUDIO POWER ON.

After pressing CD (with the remote control mode selector set to

“TV”), you can perform the following operations on a CD player:

1 – 9, 0, +10 : Selects the tracks.

PLAY

4

:

¢ :

:

STOP :

PAUSE :

Starts playing.

Returns to the beginning of the current (or previous) track.

Skips to the beginning of the next track.

Stops playing.

Stops playing temporarily. To release it, press

PLAY.

Note:

Refer to the manual supplied with your CD player.

5. Try to operate your CD player by pressing one of the above buttons.

• DO NOT forget to turn on the CD player before pressing one of the above buttons.

If there are more than one code listed for your brand of CD, try each one until the correct one is entered.

Manufactures' codes for DBS tuner

Manufacturer

JVC

AMSTRAD

BLAUPUNKT

ECHOSTAR

GOLDSTAR

GRUNDIG

HIRSHMANN

INSTRUMENT

ITT/NOKIA

KATHREIN

NEC

ORBITECH

PHILIPS

RCA

SAMSUNG

SCHWAIGER

SIEMENS

SONY

TECHNISAT

56, 57 * , 67

43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49

30

50, 51, 67

31

32, 33

48, 52, 53, 54, 55

68

34

52, 58, 59, 60, 61, 62, 63

35, 36

48

37, 38

65

39, 40

61, 64

41, 42

66

48

Codes

*This figure is set to the remote control as the initial JVC cord.

Note:

Manufacturers’ codes are subject to change without notice. If they are changed, this remote control cannot operate the equipment.

Continued to the next page.

70

EN62-74.RX-9010VBK[J]f 70 01.2.15, 2:59 PM

Manufactures' codes for CATV converter

Manufacturer Codes

GENERAL INSTRUMENT 29

HAMLIN/RE

JERROLD/G

01, 02, 03, 04, 05

06, 07, 08, 09, 10, 11,

OAK

PANASONIC

PIONEER

12, 13, 14

15, 16, 17

18, 19, 20

21, 22

SCIENTIFF

TOCOM

ZENITH

23, 24, 25

26

27, 28

Manufactures' codes for VCR

Manufacturer Codes

JVC

AIWA

BELL & HOWELL

EMERSON

FISHER

FUNAI

GE

GOLDSTAR

HITACHI

MAGNAVOX

MITSUBISHI

NEC

PANASONIC

PHILIPS

RCA/PROSC

SAMSUNG

SANYO

SHARP

SONY

TOSHIBA

ZENITH

00 * , 26, 27

01

03

08, 10, 11, 12, 64, 65

03, 14, 15, 16

01

18, 19, 20

07

18, 23, 24

04, 19, 24

30, 31, 32, 33

26, 27

19, 24, 39

19, 24

04, 18, 19, 23, 24, 43, 44, 45

45, 61, 62

03, 48

37, 50

52, 53, 54

43, 44

56, 57

*This figure is set to the remote control as the initial JVC cord.

Manufactures' codes for DVD player

Manufacturer Codes

JVC

DENON

PANASONIC

PHILIPS

PIONEER

RCA

SAMSUNG

SONY

TOSHIBA

YAMAHA

00

01

03

13

07

08

09

10

* , 02

04, 05, 06

11, 12

*This figure is set to the remote control as the initial JVC cord.

JVC

DENON

FISHER

KENWOOD

MAGNAVOX

MARANTZ

ONKYO

PANASONIC

PHILIPS

PIONEER

RCA

SANYO

SHARP

SONY

TEAC

TECHNICS

YAMAHA

Manufactures' codes for CD player

Manufacturer Codes

00 * , 06, 07, 08

01, 03

04

10, 11, 12

15, 16

17

18, 20, 21

22, 24

25, 26, 29

30

32, 33, 34

35

36

53

37, 38, 39

40, 41, 42, 45

46, 47, 48

*This figure is set to the remote control as the initial JVC cord.

Note:

Manufacturers’ codes are subject to change without notice. If they are changed, this remote control cannot operate the equipment.

71

EN62-74.RX-9010VBK[J]f 71 01.2.15, 0:16 PM

Troubleshooting

Use this chart to help you solve daily operational problems. If there is any problem you cannot solve, contact your JVC service center.

PROBLEM

The display does not light up.

The buttons and controls on the front panel do not work.

No sound from the speakers in the main room.

No sound from the front speakers in the sub-room.

Sound from one speaker only in the main room.

The SUB ROOM ON/OFF button does not work.

Surround cannot be used for the main room sources.

CD tracks are skipped, tape is rewound, or radio station is changed unintentionally.

The receiver does not work correctly as you operate it.

Noise is heard.

POSSIBLE CAUSE

The power cord is not plugged in.

The Multi-room function is not set correctly.

Speaker signal cables are not connected properly.

The SPEAKERS ON/OFF 1 and

SPEAKERS ON/OFF 2 buttons are not set correctly.

An incorrect source is selected for the main room.

Muting is activated for the main room source.

An incorrect input mode (analog or digital) is selected.

Connections are incorrect.

Speaker signal cables are not connected properly.

Main/sub setting for the speakers connected to the FRONT 2/SUB ROOM terminals are not set correctly.

Amplifier connected to the SUB ROOM

PRE OUT is not turned on.

An incorrect source is selected for the sub-room.

Muting is activated for the sub-room source.

Connections are incorrect.

Speaker signal cables are not connected properly.

The balance is set to one extreme.

The Surround/DSP mode is used for the main room.

Sub-room sound is activated (the SUB

ROOM indicator and SPEAKERS SUB

ROOM indicator are lit on the display).

When the same source is selected both for the main room and the sub-room, the source in one room affects the source in the other room.

Main room and sub-room operations are done at the same time.

An earth (

H

) cable is not connected to the

AM (

H

) terminal on the rear panel.

SOLUTION

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet. (See page 13.)

• Press MAIN ROOM ON/OFF for the main room operations.

• Press SUB ROOM ON/OFF and SUB

ROOM CONTROL for the sub-room operations.

Check speaker wiring and reconnect if necessary. (See pages 6 and 7.)

Press SPEAKERS ON/OFF 1 and

SPEAKERS ON/OFF 2 correctly.

(See page 19.)

Select the correct source for the main room.

Press MUTING to cancel the mute.

(See page 21.)

Select the correct input mode (analog or digital). (See page 31.)

Check connections. For analog corrections, see page 7. For digital corrections, see page

10. For USB connection, see page 11.

Check speaker connection and reconnect if necessary. (See page 14.)

Set the main/sub setting for the speakers correctly to use them as the sub-room front speakers. (See page 27.)

Turn on the amplifier.

Select the correct sub-room source.

Press MUTING to cancel the mute.

(See page 26.)

Check connections. For analog corrections, see page 7. For USB connection, see page 11.

Check speaker connection and reconnect if necessary. (See page 14.)

Adjust the balance properly (see page 27).

Cancel the Surround/DSP mode in the main room.

Deactivating the sub-room sound will allow you to use the Surround in the main room.

This is normal, not the malfunction of the unit.

Selecting different sources for the main room and the sub-room will avoid these troubles.

If this happens, perform the same operation again.

Connect the cable to the AM (

H

) terminal on the rear panel.

Continued to the next page.

72

EN62-74.RX-9010VBK[J]f 72 01.2.15, 0:16 PM

PROBLEM

Continuous hiss or buzzing during FM reception.

Occasional cracking noise during FM reception.

Howling during record playing.

No sound from PC connected with a USB cable.

POSSIBLE CAUSE

Incoming signal is too weak.

The station is too far away.

An incorrect antenna is used.

Antennas are not connected properly.

Ignition noise from automobiles.

Your turntable is too close to speakers.

An electrical shock is applied to the receiver, PC, or USB cable.

USB device is not selected on the computer.

“MUTE” is selected on the PC.

SOLUTION

Connect an outdoor FM antenna or contact your dealer. (See page 5.)

Select a new station.

Check with your dealer to be sure you have the correct antenna.

Check connections. (See page 5.)

Move the antenna farther from automobile traffic.

Move speakers away from the turntable.

Turn off and on the receiver once, then restart the application installed in the PC.

Select “USB Audio Device [1]” for

“Playback” of “Audio” (see page 11).

Refer to the manuals supplied with your PC.

Check if the volume is set at low level. Refer to the manuals supplied for your PC.

Move your PC away from the device emitting strong electromagnetic wave.

Close the applications you do not use.

Noise while reproducing PC sound connected with a USB cable.

Sound from PC connected with a USB cable stops intermittently.

No sound effect such as DSP mode and digital equalization.

“OVERLOAD” starts flashing on the display.

“TURN ON MAIN OR SUB ROOM” appears on the display.

The STANDBY lamp lights up after turning on the power, but soon the receiver turns off again (into standby mode).

Remote control does not work.

Remote control does not work properly.

Strong electromagnetic wave is emitted from such as television.

PC is subjected to excessive load due to using other applications.

The Line Direct function is turned on.

Speakers are overloaded because of high volume either in the main room or in the sub-room.

Speakers are overloaded because of short circuit of speaker terminals.

The receiver is turned on with the main room and sub-room sounds deactivated.

The receiver is overloaded because of applying high voltage.

The MAIN ROOM/SUB ROOM selector is not set correctly.

The TV/CATV/DBS selector is not set correctly.

RF communication between the receiver and the remote control is interrupted from outside.

Batteries are weak.

An incorrect remote control operation mode is selected.

Turn off the Line Direct function.

(See page 22.)

1. Press POWER on the front panel to turn off the receiver.

2. Stop the playback source.

3. Turn on the receiver again, and adjust the volume.

Press POWER on the front panel to turn off the receiver, check the speaker wiring, then press it again to turn on the receiver again.

If “OVERLOAD” does not disappear despite speaker wiring is not short-circuited, consult your dealer.

• Press MAIN ROOM ON/OFF for the main room operations.

• Press SUB ROOM ON/OFF for the subroom operations.

Press POWER on the front panel to turn off the receiver. After unplugging the AC power cord, consult your dealer.

Set the selector correctly either to “MAIN

ROOM” or to “SUB ROOM.”

Set the selector correctly either to “TV” or to

“CATV/DBS.”

Consult your dealer.

Replace batteries. (See page 13.)

Select the correct remote control operation mode. (See page 65.)

73

EN62-74.RX-9010VBK[J]f 73 01.2.15, 0:16 PM

Designs & specifications are subject to change without notice.

Specifications

Amplifier

Output Power

At Stereo operation:

Front channels:

120 W per channel, min. RMS, driven into 8

Ω

, 20 Hz to 20 kHz with no more than 0.02% total harmonic distortion.

120 W per channel, min. RMS, driven into 4

Ω

,

20 Hz to 20 kHz with no more than 0.08% total harmonic distortion.

At Surround operation:

Front channels: 100 W per channel, min. RMS, driven into 8

Ω at 1 kHz with no more than 0.8% total harmonic distortion.

Center channel: 100 W, min. RMS, driven into 8

Ω

at 1 kHz, with no more than 0.8% total harmonic distortion.

Rear channels: 100 W per channel, min. RMS, driven into 8

Ω at 1 kHz, with no more than 0.8% total harmonic distortion.

Audio

Audio Input Sensitivity/Impedance (1 kHz):

PHONO (MM): 2.5 mV/47 k

Ω

DVD, VCR 1, VCR 2, VIDEO, TV SOUND/DBS, CD, CDR, TAPE/MD:

200 mV/47 k

Ω

Audio Input (DIGITAL IN)* :

Coaxial: DIGITAL 1 (DVD): 0.5 V(p-p)/75

Ω

Optical: DIGITAL 2 (CD), DIGITAL 3 (TV), DIGITAL 4 (CDR):

–21 dBm to –15 dBm (660 nm ±30 nm)

* Corresponding to Linear PCM, Dolby Digital, and DTS

Digital Surround (with sampling frequency

— 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz).

USB:Revision 1.0, Full-speed (with sampling frequency

— 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz)

Audio Output Level:

SUB ROOM PRE OUT: 200 mV

Recording Output Level: TAPE/MD, VCR 1, VCR 2, CDR: 200 mV

Digital output: Optical: DIGITAL OUTPUT

Signal wave length: 660 nm

Output level: –21 dBm to –15 dBm

Signal-to-Noise Ratio (’66 IHF/’78 IHF):

PHONO: 70 dB/78 dB (at REC OUT)

DVD, VCR 1, VCR 2, VIDEO, TV SOUND/DBS, CD, CDR, TAPE/MD:

92 dB/80 dB (Line Direct On)

Frequency Response (8

Ω

):

PHONO: 20 Hz to 20 kHz (±1 dB)

VCR 1, VCR 2, VIDEO, TV SOUND/DBS, CD, CDR, TAPE/MD,

DVD CENTER, DVD REAR, DVD FRONT

: 20 Hz to 20 kHz (±1 dB, –3 dB)

USB : 20 Hz to 20 kHz (±1 dB, –3 dB)

RIAA Phono Equalization: ±1.0 dB (20 Hz to 20 kHz)

Bass boost (Volume control at –30 dB): +6 ±1.0 dB at 100 Hz

Video

Video Input Sensitivity/Impedance:

Composite video: DVD, VCR 1, VCR 2, VIDEO,

TV SOUND/DBS: 1 V(p-p)/75

Ω

S-video: DVD, VCR 1, VCR 2, VIDEO, TV SOUND/DBS:

(Y: luminance): 1 V(p-p)/75

Ω

(C: chrominance, burst): 0.286 V(p-p)/75

Ω

Component: DVD, DBS

(Y: luminance): 1 V(p-p)/75

Ω

(P

B

, P

R

):

±

0.7 V/75

Ω

Video Output Level:

Composite video: VCR 1, VCR 2, MONITOR OUT:

1 V(p-p)/75

Ω

S-video: VCR 1, VCR 2, MONITOR OUT:

(Y: luminance): 1 V(p-p)/75

Ω

(C: chrominance, burst): 0.286 V(p-p)/75

Ω

Component: MONITOR OUT

(Y: luminance): 1 V(p-p)/75

Ω

(P

B

, P

R

):

±

0.7 V/75

Ω

Synchronization: Negative

Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 45 dB

On-Screen Color System: NTSC

FM tuner (IHF)

Tuning Range: 87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz

Usable Sensitivity: Monaural:12.8 dBf (1.2 µV/75

Ω

)

50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:

Monaural: 21.3 dBf (3.2 µV/75

Ω

)

Stereo: 41.3 dBf (31.5 µV/75

Ω

)

Signal-to-Noise Ratio (IHF-A weighted):

Monaural: 78 dB at 85 dBf

Stereo: 73 dB at 85 dBf

Total Harmonic Distortion:

Monaural: 0.4% at 1 kHz

Stereo: 0.6% at 1 kHz

Stereo Separation at REC OUT: 35 dB at 1 kHz

Alternate Channel Selectivity: 45 dB: (±400 kHz)

Frequency Response: 30 Hz to 15 kHz: (+0.5 dB, –3 dB)

AM tuner

Tuning Range: 530 kHz to 1 710 kHz

Usable Sensitivity: Loop antenna: 400 µV/m

Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 50 dB (100 mV/m)

General

Power Requirements: AC 120V , 60 Hz

Power Consumption: 320 W/440 VA (at operation)

2 watts (in standby mode)

Dimensions (W x H x D): 435 mm x 156.5 mm x 425.1 mm

(17 3 /

16

in. x 6 3 /

16

in. x 16 3 /

4

in.)

Mass: 11.6 kg (25.6 lbs)

74

EN62-74.RX-9010VBK[J]f 74 01.2.15, 0:16 PM

QUALITY SERVICE

HOW TO LOCATE YOUR JVC SERVICE CENTER

TOLL FREE : 1-800-537-5722 http://www.jvcservice.com

Dear customer:

In order to receive the most satisfaction from your purchase, read the instruction booklet before operating the unit. In the event that repair is necessary, or for the address nearest your location, please refer to the factory service center list below or within the Continental

United States, Call 1-800-537-5722 for your authorized servicer. Remember to retain your Bill of Sale for Warranty Service.

—JVC

10 New Maple Avenue

Pine Brook, NJ 07058-9641

(973) 396-1000

5665 Corporate Avenue

Cypress, CA 90630-0024

(714) 229-8011

13 Cummings Park

Woburn, MA 01801

(781) 376-9100

JVC SERVICE & ENGINEERING

COMPANY OF AMERICA

DIVISION OF JVC AMERICAS CORP.

FACTORY SERVICE CENTER LOCATIONS

1500 Lakes Parkway

Lawrenceville, GA 30243-5857

(770) 339-2582

2969 Mapunapuna Place

Honolulu, HI 96819-2040

(808) 833-5828

8192 State Road 84

Davie, FL 33324

(954) 472-1960

705 Enterprise Street

Aurora, IL 60504-8149

(630) 851-7855

10700 Hammerly, Suite 110

Houston, TX 77043

(713) 935-9331

890 Dubuque Avenue

South San Francisco, CA 94080-1804

(650) 871-2666

Sophisticated electronic products may require occasional service. Just as quality is a keyword in the engineering and production of the wide array of JVC products, service is the key to maintaining the high level of performance for which JVC is world famous. The

JVC service and engineering organization stands behind our products.

NATIONAL HEADQUARTERS

JVC SERVICE & ENGINEERING COMPANY OF AMERICA

DIVISION OF JVC AMERICAS CORP.

1700 Valley Road

Wayne, NJ 07470

If you ship the product • • •

Pack your JVC unit in the original carton or one of equivalent size and strength. Enclose, with the unit, a letter stating the problem or symptom that exists and also a copy of the receipt or bill of sale you received when you purchased your

JVC unit. Print your home return address on the outside and the inside of the carton. Send to the appropriate JVC

Factory Service Center as listed above.

Don’t service it yourself.

CAUTION

To prevent electrical shock, do not open the cabinet. No user serviceable parts inside.

Refer servicing to qualified service personnel.

ACCESSORIES

To purchase accessories for your JVC product, you may contact your local JVC Dealer.

Or from the 48 Continental United States call toll free : 800-882-2345

(0101)

RX-9010VBK[J]Warranty 2 01.2.15, 0:20 PM

LIMITED WARRANTY AUDIO-2

JVC COMPANY OF AMERICA warrants this product and all parts thereof, except as set forth below ONLY TO THE ORIGINAL

PURCHASER AT RETAIL to be FREE FROM DEFECTIVE MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP from the date of original retail purchase for the period as shown below. (“The Warranty Period.”)

PARTS LABOR

2YR 2YR

THIS LIMITED WARRANTY IS VALID ONLY IN THE FIFTY(50) UNITED STATES, THE DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA AND IN

COMMONWEALTH OF PUERTO RICO.

WHAT WE WILL DO:

If this product is found to be defective, JVC will repair or replace defective parts at no charge to the original owner. Such repair and replacement services shall be rendered by JVC during normal business hours at JVC authorized service centers.

Parts used for replacement are warranted only for the remainder of the Warranty Period. All products and parts thereof may be brought to a JVC authorized service center on a carry-in basis except for Television sets having a screen size 25 inches and above which are covered on an in-home basis.

WHAT YOU MUST DO FOR WARRANTY SERVICE:

Return your product to a JVC authorized service center with a copy of your bill of sale. For your nearest JVC authorized service center, please call toll free: (800)537-5722.

If service is not available locally, box the product carefully, preferably in the original carton, and ship, insured, with a copy of your bill of sale plus and letter of explanation of the problem to the nearest JVC Factory Service Center, the name and location of which will be given to you by the toll-free number.

If you have any questions concerning your JVC Product, please contact our Customer Relations Department.

WHAT IS NOT COVERED:

This limited warranty provided by JVC does not cover:

1. Products which have been subject to abuse, accident, alteration, modification, tampering, negligence, misuse, faulty installation, lack of reasonable care, or if repaired or serviced by anyone other than a service facility authorized by JVC to render such service, or if affixed to any attachment not provided with the products, or if the model number or serial number has been altered, tampered with, defaced or removed;

2. Initial installation and installation and removal for repair;

3. Operational adjustments covered in the Owner’s Manual, normal maintenance, video and audio head cleaning;

4. Damage that occurs in shipment, due to act of God, and cosmetic damage;

5. Signal reception problems and failures due to line power surge;

6. Video Pick-up Tubes/CCD Image Sensor, Cartridge, Stylus(Needle) are covered for 90 days from the date of purchase;

7. Accessories;

8. Batteries (except the Rechargeable Batteries are covered for 90 days from the date of purchase);

There are no express warranties except as listed above.

THE DURATION OF ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, IS

LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY HEREIN.

JVC SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR THE LOSS OF USE OF THE PRODUCT, INCONVENIENCE, LOSS OR ANY OTHER

DAMAGES, WHETHER DIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGE TO

TAPES, RECORDS OR DISCS) RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS PRODUCT, OR ARISING OUT OF ANY BREACH OF

THIS WARRANTY. ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY

AND FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD SET FORTH ABOVE.

Some states do not allow the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages or limitations on how long an implied warranty last, so these limitations or exclusions may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state.

JVC COMPANY OF AMERICA

DIVISION OF JVC AMERICAS CORP.

1700 Valley Road

Wayne, NJ 07470

REFURBISHED PRODUCTS CARRY A SEPARATE WARRANTY, THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT APPLY. FOR DETAILS OF

REFURBISHED PRO DUCT WARRANTY, PLEASE REFER TO THE REFURBISHED PRODUCT WARRANTY INFORMATION

PACKAGED WITH EACH REFURBISHED PRODUCT.

For customer use:

Enter below the Model No. and Serial No. which is located either on the rear, bottom or side of the cabinet. Retain this information for future reference.

Model No.: Serial No.:

Purchase date: Name of dealer:

01.2.15, 0:20 PM RX-9010VBK[J]Warranty 3

VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED

EN

RX-9010VBK[J]cover_f 2 01.2.15, 0:19 PM

J

V

C

0201NHMMDWJEIN